Yamaha PSR730 Owner's Manual

[7.7MB] psr630 Manual Library - Yamaha - United States

User Manual: Yamaha PSR730 Owner's Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 178

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO
NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than
one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha.
This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a
cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is
used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:
The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the
time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or
modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update
existing units.
This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that
could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods
of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you
experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult
an audiologist.
IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before
damage occurs.

NOTICE:
Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a
function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not
covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners
responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your
dealer before requesting service.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:
Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the
production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be
aware of the following:

battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement.
This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these
may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a
rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery
being charged.
When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batteries of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery
case rupture.

Warning:
Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all
batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and
as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of
household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information.

Disposal Notice:
Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some
reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all
local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable
to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:
The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model
number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this
plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the
date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual
as a permanent record of your purchase.

Model
Serial No.

Battery Notice:
This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if
applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of

92-BP

Purchase Date

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in
this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use
the product.

IMPORTANT:

When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use
only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product
MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the
USA.

NOTE:
This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements
listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance
that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in
harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to
• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America.

the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference
harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with
FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in
all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference,
which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try
to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures:
• Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the
interference.
• Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or
fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
• In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna.
If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to
co-axial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please
contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If
you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha
Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600
Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep these precautions in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock,
short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts
or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable
parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or
wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might
spill into any openings.
• If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is
a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual
smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off

the power switch, disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and
have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• Use the specified adaptor (PA-6 or an equivalent recommended by
Yamaha) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the
instrument or overheating.
• Before cleaning the instrument, always remove the electric plug from
the outlet. Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which
may have accumulated on it.

CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the
instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or
radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord,
place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could
walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it.
• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord.
• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multipleconnector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause
overheating in the outlet.
• Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during
electrical storms.
• Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/–
polarity markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, fire, or
battery fluid leakage.
• Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries
together with old ones. Also, do not mix battery types, such as alkaline
batteries with manganese batteries, or batteries from different makers,
or different types of batteries from the same maker, since this can
cause overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage.
• Do not dispose of batteries in fire.

• Do not use the instrument near other electrical products such as televisions, radios, or speakers, since this might cause interference which can
affect proper operation of the other products.
• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over.
• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other
cables.
• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint
thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.
Also, do not place vinyl or plastic objects on the instrument, since this
might discolor the panel or keyboard.
• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument,
and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.
• Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the
stand, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over.
• Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or
uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing
loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a
physician.

• Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged.
• If the instrument is not to be in use for a long time, remove the batteries
from it, in order to prevent possible fluid leakage from the battery.
• Keep batteries away from children.
• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn
off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for
all components, set all volume levels to minimum.
• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car
during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components.

■ SAVING USER DATA
• Always save data to a floppy disk frequently, in order to help prevent
the loss of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error.
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or
modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations.
(4)

1

Congratulations!
You are the proud owner of a fine electronic keyboard. The Yamaha PSR-730/630 PortaTone
combines the most advanced tone generation technology with state-of-the-art digital electronics
and features to give you stunning sound quality with maximum musical enjoyment. A large graphic
display and easy-to-use interface also greatly enhance the operability of this advanced instrument.
In order to make the most of your PortaTone’s features and extensive performance potential, we
urge you to read the manual thoroughly while trying out the various features described. Keep the
manual in a safe place for later reference.
● The LCD displays as illustrated in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat
different from those on your instrument. The displays from the PSR-730 are used for the instructions and descriptions
in this manual.

Important Features
PSR-730

Touch-sensitive 61-key keyboard for a wide
range of dynamic musical expression (page 115).

A variety of voices, 215 panel voices (200
panel voices for PSR-630), 12 drum kits and 480
XG voices, with the maximum polyphony of 64
voices (32 voices for PSR-630).

The Groove & Dynamics function lets you
individualize your arrangement of any style of
music (page 35).

Pian

o

001
Large multi-function LCD display panel
makes it easy to select and edit parameters.

The functional layout of the track buttons
below the panel display makes operation easy.

Voice set feature automaticaly selects the
appropriate voice parameter settings for the panel
voices (page 116).

4

EZE
FRE

RY
EMO
N M
ATIO
R
T
S

3

Advanced auto-accompaniment technology gives you 100 fully-orchestrated accompaniment “styles” to back up what you play on the
keyboard (page 22).

Registration Memory saves your favorite
panel settings for instant recall when needed
(page 57).

Minus-one and Repeat functions are ideal
for learning new songs and polishing your keyboard technique (page 79).
Virtual Arranger feature lets you add chord
progressions to any of the auto-accompaniment
styles for more musical, refined accompaniment
(page 29).

One Touch Setting feature automatically
selects appropriate voice, effect, and other settings for the selected accompaniment style — all
you have to do is select a style and play (page 40).

2

Digital effects (reverb, chorus, DSP and
harmony) add depth and ambiance to your sound
(page 42).
PSR-730

The Multi Effect function lets you combine
two digital effects (page 48).

PSR-730

With the Digital Equalizer you can fine
tune the sound of your performance on five different frequency bands (page 51).

User Song recording feature makes it easy
to record and playback four melody tracks with an
accompaniment track (page 83).

15

AD
TI P
MUL

Multi Pads record and play short rhythmic
and melodic sequences that can be used to add
impact and variety to your performances (page
106).

DIS

K

The floppy disk drive plays XG disks and
lets you easily manage User Song, User Style,
User Pad and Registration data (page 64).

16

A total of sixteen tracks can be recorded
with the Multi recording function, including keyboard, harmony and accompaniment (page 88).

Create original accompaniment styles with
the User Style feature (you can also establish
your own rules for changing pitch based on chord
changes (page 98).

GM System Level 1
“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI
standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music
data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible
tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM
mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that
support the “GM System Level 1”.
PSR-730/630 supports GM System Level 1.

A range of MIDI functions for expanded
musical enjoyment (XG format compatible), and a
TO HOST terminal for easy connection to a personal computer (page 121)

MIDI templates for easy MIDI settings
(page 129).

XG
XG is a new MIDI format created by Yamaha which
significantly improves and expands upon the “GM System Level 1” standard by providing a greater variety of
high-quality voices plus considerably enhanced effect
operation while being fully compatible with GM.
PSR-730/630 supports the XG format.

◆ Packing List
Please check that these items are packed with your PSR-730/630.
• PSR-730/630

• Music Stand (page 7)

• Sample Disk

• Owner’s manual

3

Contents
Panel Controls

6

The Music Stand ........................................................ 7

Basic Display Operation

8

The Display Icons ............................................................ 8
The Menus ..................................................................... 10
Shortcuts ................................................................. 11

Setting Up

12

Power Supply ................................................................. 12
Using An Optional AC Power Adaptor ......................... 12
Using Batteries ............................................................ 12
Connections .................................................................. 13
PHONES Jack ............................................................. 13
SUSTAIN Pedal Jack ................................................... 13
FOOT VOLUME Jack .................................................. 13
AUX OUT R and L/L+R Jacks ..................................... 13
MIDI IN/OUT and TO HOST Connectors .................... 13

The Demonstration

14

Playing the PSR-730/630

16

A Word About the “R1”, “R2”, and “L” Voices ............. 16
Selecting & Playing R1 Voices ..................................... 17
Keyboard Percussion ................................................ 19
The Dual Voice Mode ..................................................... 19
The Split Voice Mode ..................................................... 20
Changing the SPLIT VOICE Split Point ....................... 21

Auto Accompaniment

42

Reverb ...........................................................................43
Selecting a Reverb Type .............................................. 43
Reverb Return Level ....................................................43
Chorus ...........................................................................44
Selecting a Chorus Type ............................................. 44
Chorus Return Level ...................................................44
DSP
...........................................................................45
Select the DSP Type ...................................................45
DSP Return Level ........................................................46
Harmony .........................................................................47
Selecting a Harmony Type .......................................... 47
Adjusting the Harmony Volume ................................... 48
Multi Effect (PSR-730) ...................................................48
How Multi Effect Works ............................................... 48
Applying Multi Effect (PSR-730) .................................. 49
Setting Parts for Effect 1/2 .......................................... 49
Select the Effect Type for Effect 1/2 ............................. 50
Adjust the Dry/Wet Settings for Effect 1/2 ................... 50
The Digital Equalizer (PSR-730) ................................... 51
Using the Digital Equalizer (PSR-730) ......................... 51
Selecting a Digital EQ Type. ........................................ 52
Setting the Gain (User Setting) ................................... 53

The Pitch Bend Wheel

54

Setting the Pitch Bend Range ...................................... 54

The Modulation Wheel (PSR-730)

55

Changing the Modulation Wheel Function ................. 55

Transpose
22

What is Auto Accompaniment? ................................... 22
Using Auto Accompaniment ........................................ 22
Changing Tempo ...................................................... 26
The Beat Indicator .................................................... 26
Accompaniment Sections .......................................... 27
Accompaniment Track Muting .................................. 28
The Synchro Stop Function ....................................... 28
Using Virtual Arranger .................................................. 29
Accompaniment Volume Control ................................. 29
Changing the Accompaniment Split Point .................. 30
Interaction Between the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
and SPLIT VOICE Split Points .............................. 31
The Auto Accompaniment Fingering Modes .............. 31
The Stop Accompaniment Function ........................... 35
Groove and Dynamics (PSR-730) ................................ 35
Applying Groove & Dynamics ...................................... 36
Arranging the Groove & Dynamics Effect
(User Settings) ....................................................... 36
One Touch Setting ......................................................... 40

4

Digital Effects

56

Setting Transposition ....................................................56

Registration Memory

57

Registering the Panel Settings .................................... 57
Naming the Registration Banks ................................... 58
Recall the Registered Panel Settings .......................... 60
The Accompanient Freeze Function ........................... 60

The Multi Pads

61

Selecting a MULTI PAD Set ........................................... 61
Playing the MULTI PADs ............................................... 62
Turning the CHORD MATCH Function On/Off ............ 63

Disk Operations

64

Floppy Disk Handling Precautions ............................. 64
User Song Data ...........................................................65
User Style/User Pad/Registration Memory Data ......... 65
Data that Can be Saved or Loaded with the
PSR-730/630 ........................................................65

Using Commercially Available Music Collections
(Sold Separately) ................................................... 66
The Sample Disk ........................................................... 66
Format ........................................................................... 67
Save
........................................................................... 68
Load
........................................................................... 70
Disk Copy ....................................................................... 72
Song Copy ..................................................................... 73
Delete File ...................................................................... 75

Song Playback

76

Song Playback Procedure ............................................ 76
Song Volume Control ................................................... 78
Play from a Specified Measure ................................... 78
Minus-one Practice ....................................................... 79
Repeat Play .................................................................... 80
Song Repeat .................................................................. 81
Next Song ...................................................................... 82

Song Recording

83

Quick Recording Procedure ......................................... 84
Rehearsal Mode ....................................................... 86
Multi Recording Procedure .......................................... 88
About the Recording with the Digital Effects Applied . 90
Punch In/Punch Out .................................................... 92
Quantize ...................................................................... 93
Naming User Songs .................................................... 94
Clearing Song Data ..................................................... 94
Song Edit ..................................................................... 96

Style Recording

106

Multi Pad Recording Procedure ................................. 106
Naming Pads ............................................................. 109
Clearing User Pad Data ............................................ 109

Revoicing

114

Touch Sensitivity ........................................................ 115
Pitch Bend Range ..................................................... 115
Modulation Wheel ...................................................... 115
Master Tuning ............................................................ 115
Scale Tuning .............................................................. 115
Song Transpose ......................................................... 116
Metronome ................................................................ 116
Split Voice Split Point ................................................. 116
Accompaniment Split Point ....................................... 116
Fingering Mode ......................................................... 116
Voice Set ................................................................... 116
Pedal ......................................................................... 117

MIDI Functions

119

What’s MIDI? ................................................................ 119
MIDI Terminal/TO HOST Terminal ......................... 121
What You Can Do with MIDI ........................................ 121
Connecting to a Personal Computer
(TO HOST Terminal/HOST SELECT Switch) .................... 122
Connect using the PSR-730/630 MIDI terminals ...... 122
Connect using the TO HOST terminal ....................... 124
The PSR-730/630 MIDI Functions .............................. 125
Transmit Channel & Transmit Track ........................... 125
Receive Channel & Receive Mode ........................... 126
Local Control ............................................................. 127
Clock ......................................................................... 128
Initial Data Send ........................................................ 128
MIDI Template ........................................................... 129

98

Style Recording Procedure .......................................... 98
Rehearsal Mode ..................................................... 101
Drum Cancel ............................................................. 103
Quantize .................................................................... 103
Naming Styles ........................................................... 104
Clearing User Style Data ........................................... 105

Multi Pad Recording

Overall Functions

110

Revoicing the R1, R2, and L Voices ........................... 110
Revoicing a Style ......................................................... 112

Appendix

130

PSR-730/630 Display MENU/SUB MENU Structure .. 130
Voice List ..................................................................... 133
Maximum Polyphony ................................................. 133
Drum Kit List ................................................................ 140
Style List ...................................................................... 142
About Digital Effects (Reverb/Chorus/DSP) ............. 143
When DSP type Is Selected as a System Effect ....... 143
When DSP type Is Selected as a Insertion Effect ..... 144
Harmony Type List ...................................................... 147
Refining User Styles with Style File Format ............. 148
Style File (Auto Accompaniment) Format .................. 148
About the Source Chord Type ................................... 150
Troubleshooting .......................................................... 151
Data Backup & Initialization ....................................... 152
Data Backup .............................................................. 152
Data Initialization ....................................................... 152
MIDI Data Format ......................................................... 153
MIDI Implementation Chart ........................................ 168
Specifications .............................................................. 171
Index ............................................................................. 172

5

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
Panel Controls
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
PSR-730

STYLE
001
012
020
023
031
035

~
~
~
~
~
~

PANEL VOICE

011
019
022
030
034
041

042
048
052
061
066
071

8BEAT
16BEAT
6/8 BALLAD
DANCE
DISCO
ROCK

~
~
~
~
~
~

047
051
060
065
070
081

STAND BY
ON

082
084
088
092
096

RHYTHM&BLUES
ROCK&ROLL
COUNTRY&WESTERN
TRADITIONAL JAZZ
CONTEMPORARY JAZZ
LATIN

~
~
~
~
~

083
087
091
095
100

0

DIGITAL MULTI EFFECT

1

DIGITAL EQ

MULTI EFFECT

REVERB

HARMONY

MENU

001

DISK

4
5
6

MASTER
VOLUME

2
DEMO

1

89

RECORD

A

100

1

REVERB

3

2

3

4

!

VARIATION

DSP

5

MEASURE

BEAT

FREEZE

4

1

2

REGISTRATION MEMORY

CHORUS

6

8

3

RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

119
513

dim 6

9

m M 7aug sus 4

FINGERING

10

11

12

14

ACMP

15

INTRO

START

VOICE

R1

SPLIT

SONG TRACK

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

SONG

DUAL

R2

L

^

R1

A

B

B

557
613
634
657
665
707

SYNTH PAD
SYNTH EFFECTS
ETHNIC
PERCUSSIVE
SOUND EFFECTS
SFX

PSR-730
2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

– / NO

0

+ / YES

KEYBOARD
SPLIT VOICE

A

~
~
~
~
~
~

1

&

SONG

START / STOP

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

ENDING

BANK

10

11

12

13

14

15

1

2

ONE TOUCH SETTING

3

4

FREEZE

1

STOP

#

@

DUAL VOICE

*

$

16

REGISTRATION MEMORY

MEMORY

7
PITCH BEND

STYLE

STYLE

VOICE

R2

MAIN / AUTO FILL
STOP

529
558
614
635
658
666

STRINGS
ENSEMBLE
BRASS
REED
PIPE
SYNTH LEAD

%

16

VOICE

L

GROOVE&DYNAMICS

REVOICE
SYNC

405
439
471
484
492
528

VOICE

GROOVE & DYNAMICS

13

PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY
1
2
3
4
1
2

PAD

~
~
~
~
~
~

VOICE

VOICE

4

VARIATION

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

394
406
440
472
485
493

MULTI PAD

HARMONY SYNC STOP

7

228 ~ 266 PIANO
267 ~ 286 CHROMATIC
PERCUSSION
287 ~ 322 ORGAN
323 ~ 351 GUITAR
352 ~ 393 BASS

001

001

ONE TOUCH
SETTING

2

169 ~ 176 PIPE
177 ~ 194 SYNTH LEAD
195 ~ 215 SYNTH PAD
216 ~ 227 DRUM KITS

BASS
SOLO STRINGS
ENSEMBLE
SOLO BRASS
BRASS ENSEMBLE
REED

Gra nd Piano

B

REPEAT

ACMP/SONG
VOLUME

096
108
128
137
153
168

001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001

DIGITAL EFFECT

DSP

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE
MULTI
EFFECT

DIGITAL EQ

OVERALL

ACMP / SONG
VOLUME

116
000

DISK

MIDI

CHORUS

ACCOMPANIMENT
ON / OFF

3

STYLE
SONG

REGIST MEMORY

MENU

MAX

MIN

MULTI PAD

TRANSPOSE

~
~
~
~
~
~

8Beat Po p1

SUB MENU

RESET

TEMPO

XG VOICE
082
097
109
129
138
154

001 ~ 019 PIANO
020 ~ 031 CHROMATIC
PERCUSSION
032 ~ 054 ORGAN
055 ~ 061 ACCORDION
062 ~ 081 GUITAR

CARIBBEAN
BALLROOM LATIN
BALLROOM STANDARD
MARCH
WALTZ

2

3

MULTI PAD

4

(

MODULATION

MAX

MIN

q w
PHONES

e

)
36

T 37

F1

E1

D1

C1
CLICK

38

S 39

40

R 41

G1
42

1 43

B1

A1
44

1 45

46

C2

2 47

D2

3 48

49

F2

E2

2 50

51

3 52

G2

L 53

54

A2

H 55

56

B2

L 57

C3

M 59
L

58

D3

M 60
H

C 61
1

E3
R 63
1

H 62

F3
64

G3

R 65

66

A3

S 67

B3

C 69
2

68

C4

R 71
2

70

D4

H 72

L 73

E4
74

H 75

F4

L 76

G4

H 77

L 78

H 79

A4
L 80

B4
81

82

C5

H 83

D5

L 84

S 85

E5

L 86

87

H 88

F5
L 89

G5
M 90

O 91

A5
92

B5
93

94

93

94

95

r
PSR-630

STYLE
001
012
020
023
031
035

~
~
~
~
~
~

PANEL VOICE
011
019
022
030
034
041

042
048
052
061
066
071

8BEAT
16BEAT
6/8 BALLAD
DANCE
DISCO
ROCK

~
~
~
~
~
~

047
051
060
065
070
081

RHYTHM&BLUES
ROCK&ROLL
COUNTRY&WESTERN
TRADITIONAL JAZZ
CONTEMPORARY JAZZ
LATIN

STAND BY
ON

0

1
2

4
5
6

MAX

MIN

DEMO

3

~
~
~
~
~

083
087
091
095
100

TEMPO

REVERB

XG VOICE

8Beat Po p1

SUB MENU

MENU

001

DISK
MULTI PAD

HARMONY

STYLE
SONG

116
TEMPO

1

2

3

RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

89

RECORD

DSP

4

5

6

7

156 ~ 163 PIPE
164 ~ 181 SYNTH LEAD
182 ~ 200 SYNTH PAD
201 ~ 212 DRUM KITS

BASS
SOLO STRINGS
ENSEMBLE
SOLO BRASS
BRASS ENSEMBLE
REED

3

4

BEAT

1

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

PAD

!

2

8

3

dim 6

HARMONY SYNC STOP

INTRO

START

390
424
456
469
477
513

9

A

B

B

~
~
~
~
~
~

542
598
619
642
650
692

VOICE

SYNTH PAD
SYNTH EFFECTS
ETHNIC
PERCUSSIVE
SOUND EFFECTS
SFX

PSR-630

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

– / NO

0

+ / YES

VOICE

VOICE

4

10

11

119
513

12

13

14

15

STYLE

ACMP

STYLE

16

VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

&

SPLIT

SONG TRACK

SONG

SONG

DUAL

R2

L

^

R1

KEYBOARD

START / STOP

SPLIT VOICE

A

514
543
599
620
643
651

STRINGS
ENSEMBLE
BRASS
REED
PIPE
SYNTH LEAD

m M 7aug sus 4

FINGERING

PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY
1
2
3
4
1
2

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

1

REVOICE
STOP

~
~
~
~
~
~

MULTI PAD

VARIATION

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

379
391
425
457
470
478

%

001

001
MEASURE

FREEZE

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

ENDING

ONE TOUCH SETTING

MEMORY

REGISTRATION MEMORY

1

2

3

7

4

FREEZE

1

STOP

#

@

DUAL VOICE

*

16

MAIN / AUTO FILL
SYNC

213 ~ 251 PIANO
252 ~ 271 CHROMATIC
PERCUSSION
272 ~ 307 ORGAN
308 ~ 336 GUITAR
337 ~ 378 BASS

001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001

DIGITAL EFFECT
OVERALL

ACCOMPANIMENT
ON / OFF

ONE TOUCH
SETTING

2

VARIATION

CHORUS

088
100
118
126
140
155

REGISTRATION MEMORY

MIDI

CHORUS

DSP

1

~
~
~
~
~
~

Gra nd Piano

B

REPEAT

ACMP/SONG
VOLUME

TRANSPOSE

REVERB

ACMP / SONG
VOLUME

A

100

000

DISK

REGIST MEMORY

MENU
TRANSPOSE

074
089
101
119
127
141

001 ~ 018 PIANO
019 ~ 030 CHROMATIC
PERCUSSION
031 ~ 051 ORGAN
052 ~ 057 ACCORDION
058 ~ 073 GUITAR

CARIBBEAN
BALLROOM LATIN
BALLROOM STANDARD
MARCH
WALTZ

DIGITAL EFFECT

RESET

MASTER
VOLUME

082
084
088
092
096

2

3

MULTI PAD

4

(

PITCH BEND

q
PHONES

)
e

36

T 37

F1

E1

D1

C1
CLICK

38

S 39

40

R 41

G1
42

1 43

B1

A1
44

1 45

46

2 47

C2
3 48

D2
49

2 50

E2
51

3 52

F2
L 53

G2
54

H 55

A2
56

L 57

B2
58

M 59
L

C3
M 60
H

D3
C 61
1

H 62

E3
R 63
1

F3
64

G3

R 65

66

S 67

A3
68

C 69
2

B3
70

R 71
2

C4
H 72

D4
L 73

E4
74

H 75

F4

L 76

H 77

G4
L 78

H 79

A4
L 80

r
PSR-730/630

MAC PC1 PC2 MIDI
FOOT VOL

TO HOST

t y u

6

MIDI
IN

OUT

i

SUSTAIN

o

R

AUX OUT
L / L+ R

p

DC IN 10-12V

Q

B4
81

82

H 83

C5
L 84

D5
S 85

L 86

E5
87

H 88

F5
L 89

G5
M 90

O 91

A5
92

B5
95

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Panel Controls

■ Top Panel Controls

q STAND BY/ON Switch ......................... page 14

e DEMO Button ....................................... page 14
r TEMPO Buttons ................................... page 26

!8 KEYBOARD SECTION

t TRANSPOSE Buttons .......................... page 56
y ACCOMPANIMENT/SONG VOLUME

Buttons .......................................... pages 29,78

u AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SECTION

96

• AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
ON/OFF Button ................................. page 23
• SYNC STOP Button .......................... page 28
• SYNC START Button ........................ page 24
• INTRO Button ................................... page 24
• MAIN/AUTO FILL A & B Buttons ....... page 24
• ENDING Button ................................. page 25

i RECORD Button .................... pagse 84,99,106
o START/STOP Button ................ pages 15,23,25
!0 DIGITAL MULTI EFFECT SECTION (PSR-730)

DIGITAL EFFECT SECTION (PSR-630)
• DIGITAL EQ Button (PSR-730) ......... page 51
• REVERB Button ................................ page 43
• CHORUS Button ............................... page 44
• DSP Button ....................................... page 45
• VARIATION Button ............................ page 46
• MULTI EFFECT Button (PSR-730) ... page 49
• HARMONY Button ............................ page 47

!1 DISPLAY & RELATED CONTROLS

C6
96

(PSR-730) ......................................... page 36

!5 NUMBER Buttons ................................ page 10
!6 + and – Buttons .................................... page 10
!7 Data Dial .............................................. page 10

w MASTER VOLUME Control.................. page 14

C6

!4 GROOVE & DYNAMICS Button

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

DISPLAY ............................................. page 8
MENU Buttons .................................. page 10
SUB MENU Buttons .......................... page 10
VOICE Button.................................... page 10
STYLE Button ................................... page 10
SONG Button .................................... page 10
REVOICE Button............................. page 110
TRACK Buttons ......... pages 19,20,28,86,111

• DUAL VOICE Button ......................... page 19
• SPLIT VOICE Button ......................... page 20

!9 MULTI PAD SECTION
• STOP Button ..................................... page 62
• 1, 2, 3, 4 Buttons ............................... page 62

@0 Keyboard .............................................. page 18
@1 PITCH BEND Wheel ............................ page 54
@2 MODULATION Wheel (PSR-730) ........ page 55
@3 PHONES Jack...................................... page 13
@4 Disk Drive ............................................. page 64

■ Rear Panel Controls
@5 FOOT VOL Jack ................................... page 13
@6 TO HOST Connector .......................... page 121
@7 HOST SELECT Switch ...................... page 122
@8 MIDI IN and OUT Connectors ............ page 121
@9 SUSTAIN Jack ...................................... page 13
#0 AUX OUT R, L/L+R Jacks .................... page 13
#1 DC IN 10-12V Jack .............................. page 12

◆ The Music Stand

!2 REGISTRATION MEMORY SECTION
•
•
•
•

BANK [+], [ –] Buttons (PSR-730) ..... page 58
MEMORY Button ............................... page 58
1, 2, 3, 4 Buttons ............................... page 58
FREEZE Button ................................ page 60

!3 ONE TOUCH SETTING Button ............ page 41

The PSR-730/630 is supplied with a music
stand that can be attached to the instrument
by inserting it into the slot at the rear of the
control panel.

7

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
Basic Display Operation
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
The PSR-730/630 LCD panel is a large multi-function type that simultaneously displays and
provides access to a number of important parameters. Basic operation of the display as well
as the MENU and SUB MENU buttons, and the meaning of the icons which appear in the
display, are summarized briefly below.

The Display Icons
Style/Song Number
The style number or song number is displayed here when in the Song/Style Mode.

001

001

XG
Appears when one of the PSR-730/
630’s XG voices is selected (page
16).

Disk
Appears when a floppy disk song is selected
(page 76).

DISK

Voice Number (R1 Voice)
The currently selected R1 voice number (page 17) appears here.

XG
Appears when XG voices are used in a
floppy disk song.

8Beat Po p1

001
STYLE
SONG
DIGITAL EQ

1

116
TEMPO

000

DISK

TRANSPOSE
MULTI
EFFECT

REVERB

2

3

A

100

4

B

ONE TOUCH
SETTING

REPEAT

1

ACMP/SONG
VOLUME

2

3

4

DSP

FREEZE

6

7

BEAT

1

2

3

8

9

VOICE

4

MULTI PAD

dim 6

HARMONY SYNC STOP

001

001
MEASURE

REGISTRATION MEMORY
VARIATION

CHORUS

5

Gra nd Piano

10

11

119
513

m M 7aug sus 4

FINGERING

12

GROOVE & DYNAMICS

13

14

15

16

001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001
RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY
1
2
3
4
1
2

ACMP

VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

219 219 340 322 324 407 324 347
RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

9

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

10

11

PAD

12

PHRASE PHRASE
1
2

8

L

R2

R1

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACKS
These icons display the on/off status and volume/velocity settings
for each of the 8 accompaniment tracks. They are also used to
specify tracks when using the REVOICE function (page 110). When
doing Multi recording/playback of songs, the on/off status and
volume settings are shown for tracks 1-8 (page 89).

13

471 201 252 213 213
MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY
1
2
3
4

SONG TRACK

DUAL

ACMP

MELODY TRACKS 1 … 4, ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK
In Song Quick Record mode, the recording track is indicated(page
86). When doing Multi recording/playback of songs, the on/off
status and volume settings are shown for tracks 9-13 (page 89).

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Basic Display Operation

116

TEMPO
Shows the current tempo of accompaniment/song playback (page 26).

DIGITAL EQ (PSR-730)
Appears when the DIGITAL EQUALIZER is
turned on (page 51).

0

TRANSPOSE
The current transpose value (page 56).

MULTI EFFECT (PSR-730)
Appears when the MULTI EFFECT is turned
on (page 49).

ACMP/SONG VOLUME
In Song/Style Mode (page 11), the accompaniment or song volume is displayed
(pagse 29,78).

100
A

REPEAT
Indicates the “A” and “B” repeat points
when programming a repeat section, and
whether REPEAT PLAY is on or off (page
80).

B

2

3

CHORUS
Appears when the CHORUS effect is turned
on (page 44).
DSP
Appears when the DSP effect is turned on
(page 45).

ONE TOUCH SETTING
Appears when the ONE TOUCH SETTING feature is engaged (page 41).

ONE TOUCH
SETTING

1

REVERB
Appears when the PSR-730/630 REVERB
effect is turned on (page 43).

REGISTRATION 1 … 4
(Registration Memory)
Indicates the currently selected REGISTRATION MEMORY or ONE TOUCH
SETTING number (page 57).

4

VARIATION

HARMONY
Appears when the HARMONY effect is
turned on (page 47).

FREEZE
Appears when the REGISTRATION
MEMORY “FREEZE” function is on (page
60).

FREEZE

SYNC STOP
Appears when AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
SYNC STOP function is engaged (page
28).

MEASURE
Indicates the current measure number
during song recording and playback (page
78).

1

FINGERING
Shows the currently selected fingering
mode (page 32).

BEAT
Flashes at the current tempo and indicates the current beat during accompaniment and song playback. (page 26)
mM 7
1

2

14

3

MULTI PAD 1 … 4
Indicates the currently playing MULTI PAD
numbers (page 62).

4

15

16

064 048 001
VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

DUAL

DSP VARIATION
Appears when the DSP VARIATION effect
is turned on (page 46).

CHORD
Displays the current chord name during
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT playback or
SONG recording/playback (page 25).
GROOVE & DYNAMICS (PSR-730)
Appears when the GROOVE & DYNAMICS
function is engaged (page 36).

Keyboard Settings (VOICE R1/VOICE R2/VOICE L)
These icons indicate the on/off status and volume settings for the L, R2, and
R1 voices when the DUAL VOICE and/or SPLIT VOICE functions are used
(pages 19,20). They are also used to specify tracks when using the REVOICE
function (page 110).
During Multi recording/playback of songs, they indicate the on/off status,
volume/velocity and voice settings for tracks 14-16 (page 86).

9

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Basic Display Operation

The Menus
MENU
Main Menu Selection (VOICE/STYLE/SONG Buttons)
You can select one of the three main VOICE/STYLE/SONG menus by pressing the appropriate
button to the right of the display. The menu icon will move to indicate the menu you have
selected.
Selecting Other Menus (MENU [▲], [▼] Buttons)
You can select one of the seven “DISK” “MULTI PAD” “REGIST MEMORY” “MIDI” “DIGITAL
EFFECT” “OVERALL” “GROOVE & DYNAMICS” menus on the left of the display by pressing
the [▲], [▼] MENU buttons at the lower left. The menu icon will move to indicate the menu
you have selected.

SUB MENU

8Beat Po p1
MENU

001

DISK
MULTI PAD

STYLE
SONG

REGIST MEMORY

DIGITAL EQ

MENU

116
TEMPO

100

000

DISK

REVERB

Gra nd Piano

B

ONE TOUCH
SETTING

REPEAT

1

ACMP/SONG
VOLUME

TRANSPOSE
MULTI
EFFECT

A

2

4

DSP

001

001
MEASURE

FREEZE

BEAT

1

REGISTRATION MEMORY
VARIATION

CHORUS

3

2

3

VOICE

4

dim 6

HARMONY SYNC STOP

119
513

m M 7aug sus 4

FINGERING

GROOVE & DYNAMICS

MIDI
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

VOICE
VOICE

MULTI PAD

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

STYLE

STYLE

001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001

DIGITAL EFFECT
OVERALL

RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY
1
2
3
4
1
2

ACMP

VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

GROOVE&DYNAMICS
ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

SONG TRACK

L

SONG

DUAL

R2

SONG

R1

SUB MENU Selection (SUB MENU [▲], [▼] Buttons)
You can select one of the sub menus within the selected menu by pressing the [▲], [▼] SUB
MENU buttons at the upper left of the display. At the top of the display, the MENU/SUB MENU
you selected will displayed on the left and the current setting or value for that item on the right.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

– / NO

0

+ / YES

Dial
Like the number buttons [1]-[0], [+],[–], the
dial is used to change settings and values.
Rotating it to the right (clockwise) increases
the value, while rotating it to the left (counterclockwise) decreases it. The dial can also be
used to toggle on/off settings.

10

Number Buttons [1]-[0], [+] (YES), [–] (NO) Buttons
The number buttons [1] – [0], [+],[–], are used to change
settings (values). Pressing the [+] button increases the displayed value by 1. Pressing the [–] button decreases it by 1.
Pressing and holding either button causes a continuous increase or decrease. Pressing the [+] (YES) or [–] (NO) buttons
also switches between on and off settings. For items that have
initial default values, pressing the [+] and [–] buttons together
at the same time will return the setting to the initial value.

• When the value displayed is a number like a style number, pressing and holding either the [+] or [–] button will cause the number to
continue to the lowest value after the highest is reached or viceversa (...99m100 m1 m2..., ...2m1 m100m 99...). If the number displayed is a value like a transpose value, it will stop changing when
the maximum or minimum value is reached.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Basic Display Operation

There are two modes in the PSR-730/630: Style Mode and Song Mode, and normally one of them is selected. Pressing
the STYLE button selects Style Mode, lighting the STYLE icon, while pressing the Song button selects Song Mode and
lights the SONG icon, displaying the current mode.

Style Mode * Pressing the START/STOP button will start accompaniment playback.

STYLE

Currently selected
style name and style
number

8Beat Po p1

001
STYLE
SONG

Accompaniment
volume

DIGITAL EQ

1

116
TEMPO

100

000

DISK

REVERB

2

3

1

ONE TOUCH
SETTING

2

4

FREEZE

DSP

6

HARMONY SYNC STOP

7

8

9

001

BEAT

1

2

3

VOICE

4

MULTI PAD

dim 6

VARIATION

5

3

001
MEASURE

REGISTRATION MEMORY

CHORUS

4

Gra nd Piano

B

REPEAT

ACMP/SONG
VOLUME

TRANSPOSE
MULTI
EFFECT

A

m M 7aug sus 4

FINGERING

10

11

119
513

12

GROOVE & DYNAMICS

13

14

15

16

219 219 355 337 339 407 324 362 888 888 888 888 888 084 109 001
RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY
1
2
3
4
1
2

ACMP

VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

SONG TRACK

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

L

DUAL

R2

R1

Information for accompaniment tracks 1-8

Song Mode * Pressing the START/STOP button will start song playback.

SONG

Currently selected
song name and song
number

London B rid Gra nd Piano

001
STYLE
SONG
DIGITAL EQ

Song volume

1

116
TEMPO

000

DISK

TRANSPOSE
MULTI
EFFECT

2

REVERB

3

A

100

4

1

ACMP/SONG
VOLUME

ONE TOUCH
SETTING

2

3

4

DSP

FREEZE

6

7

BEAT

1

2

3

8

9

VOICE

4

MULTI PAD

dim 6

HARMONY SYNC STOP

001

001
MEASURE

REGISTRATION MEMORY
VARIATION

CHORUS

5

B

REPEAT

m M 7aug sus 4

FINGERING

10

11

119
513

12

GROOVE & DYNAMICS

13

14

15

16

213 213 337 391 259 434 468 442 471 219 252 213 213 213 213 213
RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY
1
2
3
4
1
2

ACMP

VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

SONG TRACK

L

DUAL

R2

R1

Information for song tracks 1-16
• When in Song Mode, AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT ON/OFF , SYNC START,
SYNC STOP and other buttons connected with accompaniment will not
function.

Shortcuts
To make operation as easy and as efficient as possible, the PSR-730/630 features a number of
“shortcuts” which allow you to jump directly to certain functions without having to use the MENU
and SUB MENU buttons. All of these shortcuts work in the same way: press and hold a panel
button for a few seconds to go to the related function. For example, if you press and hold the
[REVERB] button for a few seconds, you will go directly to the REVERB type selection function.
The shorcuts will also be described where appropriate throughout this manual.

11

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
Setting Up
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
This section contains information about setting up your PSR-730/630 and preparing to play.
Be sure to go through this section carefully before using your PSR-730/630.

Power Supply
Although the PSR-730/630 will run either from an optional AC adaptor or
batteries, Yamaha recommends use of the more environmentally safe AC adaptor.
Follow the instructions below according to the power source you intend to use.

• Never interrupt the power
supply (e.g. remove the
batteries or unplug the
AC adaptor) during any
PSR-730/630 record operation! Doing so can result in a loss of data.

■ Using An Optional AC Power Adaptor
z Plug an optional Yamaha PA-6 Power Adaptor into a wall AC outlet.
x Then plug the DC output cable from the PA-6 into the DC IN 10-12V jack on
the rear panel of the PSR-730/630. The internal batteries are automatically
disconnected when an AC Power Adaptor is used.
DC IN 10-12V

PA-6

When turning the power OFF, simply reverse the procedure.

• Use ONLY a Yamaha PA-6 AC
Power Adaptor (or other
adaptor specifically recommended by Yamaha) to power
your instrument from the AC
mains. The use of other adaptors may result in irreparable
damage to both the adaptor
and the PSR-730/630.
• Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the PSR730/630, or during electrical
storms.

■ Using Batteries
For battery operation the PSR-730/630 requires six 1.5V SUM-1, “D” size, R20 or equivalent batteries.
When the batteries need to be replaced “Lo Battery!!” may appear on top of the
display, the volume may be reduced, the sound may be distorted, and other problems
may occur. When this happens, turn the power off and replace the batteries.
Replace the batteries as follows:
z Open the battery compartment cover located on the instrument’s bottom panel.
x Insert the six new batteries, being careful to follow the polarity markings on
the inside of the compartment.
c Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it locks firmly in place.

• When the batteries run
down, replace them with a
complete set of six new
batteries. NEVER mix old
and new batteries.
• Do not use different kinds
of batteries (e.g. alkaline
and manganese) at the
same time.
• If the instrument is not to
be in use for a long time,
remove the batteries from
it, in order to prevent possible fluid leakage from
the battery.
• Plugging or unplugging
the AC power adaptor
while the batteries are installed will reset the PSR730/630 to the defaults.

◆ Important Notes on Battery Use
• Since the PSR-730 and PSR-630 consume a considerable
amount of power, Yamaha recommends the use of an AC power
adaptor rather than batteries. The batteries should be considered an auxiliary power source for data backup.
• The floppy disk drive, in particular, uses a large amount of
power, so it is important to always use an AC power adaptor
when performing disk-intensive operations such as song recording/playback or data load/save. If you attempt to use
battery power for these operations and the batteries do fail, you
will lose not only the data you’re recording or saving, but also

12

other data in internal memory including user styles, user pads,
registration memory, etc.
• Taking the above precautions into consideration, always use an
AC power adaptor when using the PSR-630/730 for an important performance or when creating important data.
• When using batteries and the “Lo Battery!!” warning initially
appears on the display, the volume will drop a little but you will
be able to use the instrument for a while longer. When the “Lo
Battery!!” warning begins to appear every few seconds, replace the batteries as soon as possible.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Setting Up

Connections
■ PHONES Jack
A standard pair of stereo headphones can be
plugged in here for private practice or late-night
playing. The internal stereo speaker system is
automatically shut off when a pair of headphones is plugged into the PHONES jack.
Do not listen with the headphones at high volume for long periods of time. Doing so may
cause hearing loss.

■ SUSTAIN Pedal Jack
The sustain function causes the sound from a
depressed key to continue, even after the key is
released. Plug an optional Yamaha FC4 or FC5
footswitch into the sustain jack and use it to
switch sustain on and off. The footswitch connected to this jack can also be set to replicate the
functions of some panel buttons, doing things
like starting and stopping accompaniment (page
117).

SUSTAIN

■ FOOT VOLUME Jack
Connecting an optional Yamaha FC7 foot controller lets you use your foot to change the
volume as you play the PSR-730/630 (expression function). The foot controller connected to
this jack can also be set to replicate the functions
of the main volume controls, such as accompaniment or song volume (page 117).

FOOT VOL

• Be sure that you do not
press the footswitch while
turning the power on. If
you do, the ON/OFF status of the footswitch will
be reversed.
• When the sustain or
sostenuto pedal functions are being used
(page 117), some
voices may sound continuously or have a long
decay after the notes
have been released
while the pedal is held.

■ AUX OUT R and L/L+R Jacks
•••••••••

R

AUX OUT • • • • • • • • •
L/L+R

Stereo
System

The rear-panel AUX OUT R and L/L+R jacks
deliver the output of the PSR-730/630 for connection to a keyboard amplifier, stereo sound
system, a mixing console, or tape recorder. If
you will be connecting the PSR-730/630 to a
monaural sound system, use only the L/L+R
jack. When a plug is inserted into the L/L+R jack
only, the left- and right-channel signals are combined and delivered via the L/L+R jack so you
don’t lose any of the PSR-730/630 sound. (Use
phone plugs).

• Connecting PSR730/630 to external
equipment only after
turning off power for
all devices. To prevent damage to the
speakers, set the
volume of the external devices at the
minimum setting before connecting
them. Failure to observe these cautions
may result in electric shock or equipment damage.

■ MIDI IN/OUT and TO HOST Connectors
See page 121.

13

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
The Demonstration
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Once you’ve set up your PSR-730/630, try listening to the pre-programmed demonstration
songs. A total of 15 demo songs are provided.

1 Switch ON
Turn the power ON by pressing the [STAND BY/ON] switch.
• Even when the switch is in
the “STAND BY” position,
electricity is still flowing to
the instrument at the minimum level. When you are
not using the PSR-730/630
for a long time, make sure
you unplug the AC power
adoptor from the wall AC
outlet, and/or remove the
batteries from the instrument.

STAND BY
ON

2 Set an Initial Volume Level
Turn the [MASTER VOLUME] control up (clockwise) about a quarter-turn
from its minimum position. You can re-adjust the [MASTER VOLUME]
control for the most comfortable overall volume level after playback begins.
MASTER
VOLUME

MIN

• If you play the PSR-730/630
with the volume at its maximum level when the batteries
are used, the life of the batteries will be shorter.

MAX

3 Press the [DEMO] Button
Press the [DEMO] button to start demo playback. The PSR-730/630 SONG
menu will automatically be selected and the number and name of the first demo
song will appear on the top line of the display. The demo will begin playing
automatically. The demo songs will play in sequence, and the sequence will
repeat until stopped.
DEMO

Trumpet

14

t

• You can either have all the
demo songs played continuously, or have only one song
play (page 77).

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
The Demonstration

4 Skip to the Beginning Of a Different Demo Song

While the demonstration is playing you can select any of the demo songs by
using the [–] and [+] buttons. Playback will skip to the beginning of the selected
song.

R&B

d

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

– / NO

0

+ / YES

5 Stop When Done
Press the [DEMO] button or the [START/STOP] button to stop demo playback.

DEMO

START / STOP

• Stopping demo song
playback, then starting it again by pressing the [START/
STOP] button will
cause demo song
playback to automatically stop at the end
of that song.
• If the [DEMO] button
is pressed in Style
Mode (page 11), the
instrument will automatically switch to
Song Mode (page 11).

15

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
Playing the PSR-730/630
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
The PSR-730/630 actually includes two voice sets: the “panel” voices and percussion kits,
and the XG voices. The panel voices include 215 “pitched” voices (200 “pitched” voices for
PSR-630) and 12 drum kits, while the XG voice set includes 480 voices.
is displayed under the voice number at the top
When an XG voice is selected, an XG icon
of the display.
PSR-730

PSR-630

Panel Voices

Voice numbers 1-215

Voice numbers 1-200

Drum Kits

Voice numbers 216-227

Voice numbers 201-212

XG Voices

Voice numbers 228-707

Voice numbers 213-692

Choose a voice you like, and try it out!

• Refer to the panel voice list or XG voice list when selecting voices (page 133).
• See page 3 for information about XG.

A Word About the “R1”, “R2”, and “L” Voices
The PSR-730/630 allows up to three voices to be selected at the same time: “R1”
(Right-hand 1), “R2”, (Right-hand 2) and “L” (Left-hand). The “R1” voice is the basic
voice of the PSR-730/630 and it’s used when you’re playing a single voice over the
entire range of the keyboard as with an acoustic piano. You can also have two voices
play together at the same time (R1 voice and R2 voice) or play different voices with
the right and left hands (R1 voice and L voice) (pages 19, 20). The numbers of the
currently selected R1, R2, and L voices are all shown at the lower right of on the
display panel. Normally, the R1 voice number is also shown at the upper right of the
display panel.
084 109 001
VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

The R1 (Right-hand 1), the R2 (Right-hand 2) and the L
(Left hand) voices are shown.

DUAL

● Playing with a Single Voice
VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

DUAL

R1 Voice

● Playing with Two Voices (Dual Voice Mode m page 19).
VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

DUAL

R1 Voice + R2 Voice

● Playing Separate Voices with the Right and Left Hands (Split Voice Mode m page 20)
VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

L Voice

R1 Voice
VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

R1 Voice + R2 Voice
L Voice
(Split Voice Mode + Dual Voice Mode)

16

DUAL

DUAL

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Playing the PSR-730/630

Selecting & Playing R1 Voices

1 Select the VOICE Menu
Press the [VOICE] button so that the triangular indicator appears in the display next
to “VOICE” to the right of the display. The number and name of the currently selected
“R1” voice appears on the top right of the display panel when the VOICE menu is
selected.

p1

Gra nd Piano

001
VOICE

VOICE
VOICE

2 Select a Panel Voice
The PSR-730/630 voices can be selected by using the [–] and [+] buttons, the
number buttons, the data dial, or the [VOICE] button.
● The [–] and [+] Buttons
When the VOICE menu is selected these buttons step up or down through the PSR730/630’s voices. Press either button briefly to step to the next voice in the
corresponding direction, or hold the button to scroll rapidly through the voices in
the corresponding direction.

p1

Bri ghtPiano

002

7

8

9

– / NO

0

+ / YES

● The Number Buttons
The number buttons can be used to directly enter the number of the desired voice,
thereby immediately selecting that voice without having to step through a number
of other voices. To select voice number 109, for example, press the [1], [0], and [9]
number buttons in sequence.

p1

Str ings

109

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

– / NO

0

+ / YES

* The above illustration shows the display of the PSR-730.

17

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Playing the PSR-730/630

One- or two-digit voice numbers can be entered without leading zeros. To select
voice number “23”, for example, simply press the [2] button and then the [3] button.
The bars below the voice number on the display will flash for a few seconds, and
then disappear when the selected voice number has been recognized by the PSR730/630.

p1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

– / NO

0

+ / YES

Xyl ophone

023
* The above illustration shows the display of
the PSR-730.

One- or two-digit voice numbers can also be entered with leading zeroes: e.g. “23”
can be entered as “023” by pressing the [0], [2], and [3] buttons. In this case the
specified voice number will be immediately recognized by the PSR-730/630.
● The Data Dial
Simply rotate the dial clockwise to increment the voice number, or counterclockwise to decrement the voice number.

● The [VOICE] Button
Pressing the [VOICE] button increments the voice number. Press briefly to
increment by one, or hold for continuous incrementing.
VOICE

3 Play & Adjust Volume
You can now play the selected voice on the PSR-730/630 keyboard. Use the
[MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the overall volume level.
If the Voice Set function (page 116) is turned “on”, whenever a panel voice is
selected appropriate “R2” and “L” voices (i.e. DUAL VOICE and SPLIT VOICE
modes) as well as digital effects, etc., will be automatically selected at the same time.
MASTER
VOLUME

MIN

18

MAX

• When a XG voice is
selected the XG icon
will appear below the
voice number.
• Refer to page 133 for
a complete list of the
panel and XG voices.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Playing the PSR-730/630

◆ Keyboard Percussion
When one of the 12 panel DRUM KIT voices are selected you can play different
drums and percussion instruments on the keyboard. The drums and percussion
instruments played by the various keys are marked by symbols below the keys.

p1

Std .Kit1

216
VOICE

* The above illustration shows the display of the PSR-730.

● The Drum Kits
PSR-730

PSR-630 Kit Name

PSR-730

PSR-630 Kit Name

216

201

Standard Kit1

222

207

Dance Kit

217

202

Standard Kit2

223

208

Jazz Kit

218

203

Room Kit

224

209

Brush Kit

219

204

Rock Kit

225

210

Classic Kit

220

205

Electronic Kit

226

211

SFX Kit 1

221

206

Analog Kit

227

212

SFX Kit 2

• The HARMONY effect
(page 47) cannot be
turned on while a
drum kit is selected
for the “R1” voice, and
will automatically be
turned off if a drum kit
is selected while
HARMONY is on.
• The TRANSPOSE parameter (page 56) has
no effect on the drum
kit voices.
• See page 140 for a
complete listing of the
keyboard percussion
drum instrument assignments.

The Dual Voice Mode
When the DUAL VOICE mode is engaged you can play two voices (the R1 and R2
voices) simultaneously across the entire keyboard.
The DUAL VOICE mode is turned on and off by pressing the [DUAL VOICE]
button. When the DUAL VOICE mode is turned on both R1 and R2 icons in the display
will light. Press the [DUAL VOICE] button a second time to turn the DUAL VOICE
mode off: the R2 icon in the display will go out leaving only the R1 icon lit.
084 109 001
VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

DUAL VOICE

DUAL

In the Syle mode, the R2 TRACK button below the display (second from the right)
can also be used to turn the R2 voice on or off as required.
084 109 001
VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

DUAL

L

R2

R1

14

15

16

• The R1/R2 voice settings (voice parameters) can be changed
as required by using
the REVOICE function,
described on page
110.
• The R1 voice cannot
be turned off.
• The DUAL VOICE
mode can be used at
the same time as the
SPLIT VOICE mode,
described below. In
this case the L voice is
played on the left-hand
section of the keyboard while both the
R1 and R2 voices are
played on the righthand section of the
keyboard. See the
“The Split Voice Mode”
section, below, for
more information.

19

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Playing the PSR-730/630

The Split Voice Mode
The SPLIT VOICE mode lets you play different voices with the left and right hands.
The “split point” forms a boundary on the keyboard with the R voice playing on the
right side, and the L voice on the left.

Split Point

The SPLIT VOICE mode is engaged by pressing the [SPLIT VOICE] button.
When turned on, the L icon in the display will light in addition to the R1 or R1 and R2
icons. Press the [SPLIT VOICE] button a second time to disengage the SPLIT VOICE
mode: the L icon will go out leaving only the R voice.
084 109 001
VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

SPLIT VOICE

DUAL

In the Syle mode, the L TRACK button below the display (third from the right) can
also be used to turn the L voice on or off as required.

084 109 001
VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

20

DUAL

L

R2

R1

14

15

16

• The L voice settings
(voice parameters)
can be changed as
required by using the
REVOICE function,
described on page
110.
• The split point can be
changed as required
as described below.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Playing the PSR-730/630

Changing the SPLIT VOICE Split Point

The SPLIT VOICE split point can be set to any key on the PSR-730/630 keyboard
to match your individual playing requirements.

1 Select the SPLIT VOICE Split Point Function
Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to the left of the display to move the triangular
indicator next to “OVERALL” on the left side of the display.
MENU

MIDI
DIGITAL EFFECT
OVERALL
GROOVE&DYNAMICS

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “Split Point” function
from within the OVERALL menu . The MIDI note number (see the bottom of the
keyboard) corresponding to the current split point will appear to the right of “Split
Point” on the top line of the display.

SplitPoi nt:

59 [ B2 ]

2 Set As Required
Simply press the key you want to assign as the split point. The key number of the
key you press will appear to the right of “SplitPoint” on the top line of the display. You
can also use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial to enter the split point
key number. The lowest key on the keyboard (C1) is key number “36”, middle C (C3)
is “60”, and the highest key (C5) is 96. The split point can be set at any key number
from 0 through 127, allowing the split point to be set outside the range of the PSR-730/
630 keyboard for MIDI applications.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

– / NO

0

+ / YES

• The split point key becomes the highest
key in the left-hand
section of the keyboard.
• The default split point
(54 for PSR-730 and
59 for PSR-630) can
be instantly recalled
by pressing the [–]
and [+] buttons at the
same time.
• For the relationship
between the SPLIT
VOICE split point and
the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split
point, see page 31.
• When setting the split
point, that is, the sub
menu “SplitPoint” is
shown on the display,
pressing the key on
the keyboard doesn’t
either produce notes
or detect chords in the
accompaniment section, but only designates the split point.

21

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
Auto Accompaniment
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
The PSR-730/630 has 100 different accompaniment “styles” from every musical type that can
be used to provide fully-orchestrated or rhythm-only accompaniment. Just select one of the
many styles available and play along.

What is Auto Accompaniment?
With the Auto Accompaniment feature, all you have to do is play the chords in your
song and the accompaniment style that matches your music will automatically play
along following the same chord progression. Using Auto Accompaniment, even a
solo performer can enjoy playing with an entire band or orchestra backing them up.
● When Auto Accompaniment is turned on...
The specified left-hand section of the keyboard becomes the “Auto Accompaniment” section, and chords played in this section are automatically detected
and used as a basis for fully automatic accompaniment with the selected style.
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
split point (54)

• The default setting for
the Auto Accompaniment split point is [54]
(the Auto Accompaniment sections extends to the left of key
[54]). To change the
Auto Accompaniment
split point, see page
30.

“auto accompaniment”
section

Using Auto Accompaniment

1 Select a Style
Press the [STYLE] button to select the STYLE menu (the triangular indicator will
appear next to “STYLE” to the right of the display). The number and name of the
currently selected style will appear on the top left of the display, and the STYLE
icon will light, indicating that the PSR-730/630 is in Style Mode.

8Beat Po p1

001
STYLE
SONG
DIGITAL EQ

1

116
TEMPO

A

100

000

DISK

TRANSPOSE
MULTI
EFFECT

2

REVERB

3

4

B

ONE TOUCH
SETTING

REPEAT

1

ACMP/SONG
VOLUME

2

3

4

DSP

FREEZE

6

7

BEAT

1

2

8

9

VOICE

3

VOICE

VOICE

4

MULTI PAD

dim 6

HARMONY SYNC STOP

001

001
MEASURE

REGISTRATION MEMORY
VARIATION

CHORUS

5

Gra nd Piano

10

11

119
513

m M 7aug sus 4

FINGERING

12

GROOVE & DYNAMICS

13

14

15

16

STYLE

STYLE

219 219 355 337 339 407 324 362 888 888 888 888 888 084 109 001
RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY
1
2
3
4
1
2

ACMP

VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

22

SONG TRACK

L

DUAL

R2

R1

SONG

SONG

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment

Find the style you want by referring to the style list (page 142), then pressing the [1]–
[0] number buttons, enter the 1-3 digits of its style number.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

– / NO

0

+ / YES

Example: Select style number “24” (Dance Pop 2)
Press number buttons [2], [4] in sequence.

Dance Po p2

• Just like the voice
numbers, when selecting 1 or 2 digit
style numbers, if you
add [0] at the beginning and enter a 3
digit number, it will be
immediately recognized. For example, to
select style number
“95” (Polka) press
buttons [0], [9], [5] in
sequence.

024

You can also change style numbers using the [+], [–] buttons or the Data Dial. Also you
can increment the style number by pressing the [STYLE] button. Press briefly to
increment by one, or hold for continuous incrementing.

7

8

9

– / NO

0

+ / YES

STYLE

2 Turn AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT On
Press the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT [ON/OFF] so that its indicator lights.
• If AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT is off (not lit),
only rhythm (drums
and percussion) accompaniment will be
produced.

ACCOMPANIMENT
ON / OFF

• For information about
the accompaniment
tracks, see page 28.

3 Start the Accompaniment
There are several ways to start the accompaniment:
● Straight start
Press the [START/STOP] button. The rhythm will begin playing immediately
without bass and chord accompaniment. The currently selected MAIN [A] or [B]
section will play.
START / STOP

MAIN / AUTO FILL
SYNC

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

STOP

START

INTRO

A

B

A

B

ENDING

• It is possible to select
the MAIN A or B section prior to a straight
start — refer to “7.
Select the MAIN A
and B Sections as
Required,” below.

23

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment

● Start with an introduction followed by the MAIN A section
Press the [INTRO] button so that its indicator lights, press the MAIN/AUTO
FILL [A] button (not necessary if its indicator is already flashing), then press
[START/STOP].

START / STOP

MAIN / AUTO FILL
SYNC

STOP

START

INTRO

IMENT

A

B

A

B

ENDING

● Start with an introduction followed by the MAIN B section
Press the [INTRO] button so that its indicator lights, press the MAIN/AUTO
FILL [B] button (not necessary if its indicator is already flashing), then press
[START/STOP].
START / STOP

MAIN / AUTO FILL
SYNC

STOP

START

INTRO

IMENT

A

B

A

B

ENDING

● Synchronized start
Any of the above start types can be synchronized to the first note or chord
played on the left-hand section of the keyboard (i.e. keys to the left of and
including the split-point key — normally 54) by first pressing the [SYNC
START] button.
MAIN / AUTO FILL
SYNC

STOP

START

INTRO

IMENT

A

B

A

B

ENDING

• If you press the [SYNC
START] button while the
accompaniment is playing,
the accompaniment will
stop and the synchro start
mode will be engaged.
• The [INTRO] button can be
used to select the INTRO
section even while the accompaniment is playing.
• The accompaniment split
point can be changed via
the “Accompaniment Split
Point” function in the
OVERALL menu — see
page 30.

Pressing the [SYNC START] button alone causes a straight start to occur
when the first note or chord is played. Press the [SYNC START] button and
then the appropriate [INTRO] and [MAIN/AUTO FILL] buttons for a
synchronized introduction start. The BEAT indicator will flash at the current
tempo when a synchronized start mode has been selected. The synchro start
mode can be disengaged prior to actually starting the accompaniment by
pressing the [SYNC START] button a second time.
MAIN / AUTO FILL
SYNC

NIMENT

24

STOP

START

INTRO

A

B

A

B

ENDING

• When the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point and
SPLIT VOICE split point are
set at different keys, the L
voice can be played between the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point and
SPLIT VOICE split point
when the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT function is on.
• When the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point and
SPLIT VOICE split point are
set to the same key, the L
voice can be played anywhere to the left of the
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
split point and SPLIT
VOICE split point while
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
is not playing.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment

4 Play the Melody with the Accompaniment

As soon as you play any chord that the PSR-730/630 can “recognize” on the lefthand section of the keyboard, the PSR-730/630 will automatically begin to play the
chord along with the selected rhythm and an appropriate bass line. The name of the
current chord will appear on the display.

1

2

3

VOICE

4

MULTI PAD

dim 6

FINGERING

119
513

m M 7aug sus 4

GROOVE & DYNAMICS

The chord will be recognized according to the rules set in the Fingering Mode.
• For the method for entering chords, see page 32 “Auto Accompaniment Fingering Modes.”

• When the Fingering Mode
is set for “Single Finger,”
“Fingered 1,” “Fingered 2,”
or “Multi-Finger,” playing a
chord in the auto accompaniment section while
the rhythm is stopped will
cause Bass + Chord to be
played (for all styles).
However, when the Auto
Accompaniment split point
and the Split Voice split
point are the same key,
playing a chord in the accompaniment section with
the rhythm stopped will
cause Bass + L voice to
be played.

The Auto Accompaniment will continue playing even if the left hand releases the
keys. As you press each chord in the song, you can play the melody along with the
accompaniment.

5 Changing Accompaniment Sections
You can vary the song by pressing [INTRO], MAIN/AUTO FILL [A]/[B] or
[ENDING] buttons and changing to a different accompaniment section (page 27).
Try pressing the different buttons and see what happens.
MAIN / AUTO FILL
INTRO

A

B

A

B

ENDING

6 Stop the Accompaniment
Press the [START/STOP] button to stop the accompaniment.
START / STOP

If you want to stop after playing the ending, press the [ENDING] button.
The accompaniment will stop after playing the ending .
ENDING

• The ending will begin
playing immediately when
you press the ENDING
button while the accompaniment is playing the first
beat of the measure.
The ending will begin
playing from the next
measure when you press
the button while the accompaniment is playing
the second or larger numbered beat.
• If you press the INTRO
button while the ending is
playing, the intro section
will begin playing after the
ending is finished.
• If you press a MAIN/
AUTO FILL (A,B) button
while the ending is playing, fill-in accompaniment
will immediately start playing, continuing with the
main section.
• If you press the SYNC
START while an accompaniment is playing, the
accompaniment will stop
and the PSR-730/630 will
enter Synchronized Start
standby status.

25

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment

◆ Changing Tempo
You can change the tempo for accompaniment or song playback.
When you select a different style while the accompaniment is not playing, the
“default” tempo for that style is also selected, and the tempo is displayed immediately
above “TEMPO” in the display in quarter-note beats per minute. If the accompaniment
is playing, the same tempo is maintained even if you select a different style.
You can change the tempo to any value between 32 and 280 beats per minute,
however, by using the TEMPO [▼] and [▲] buttons. Press either button briefly to
decrement or increment the tempo value by one, or hold the button for continuous
decrementing or incrementing.

Tempo:

TEMPO

001

116
TEMPO

116
A

100

B

REPEAT

ONE TOUCH
SETTING

When either of the TEMPO buttons is pressed the current tempo value will appear
on the top line of the display for a few seconds — during this time the [–] and [+]
buttons, number buttons, or data dial can also be used to set the tempo. The default
tempo for the selected style can be recalled at any time by pressing both the TEMPO
[▼] and [▲] buttons simultaneously (or by pressing the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously while the tempo value is showing on the top line of the display).

◆ The Beat Indicator
When Auto Accompaniment or song playback is started, the four dots of the BEAT
indicator provide a visual indication of the selected tempo as shown below.
4/4 time
1st beat
2nd beat
3rd beat
4th beat

26

3/4 time

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment

◆ Accompaniment Sections
There are 8 types of Auto Accompaniment sections that allow you to vary the
arrangement of the accompaniment to match the song you are playing. They are:
Intro, Main A and B, Fill-in (AA, AB, BA, BB) and Ending. By switching between
them while playing you can put together a single song.
MAIN / AUTO FILL
INTRO

A

B

A

B

ENDING

● INTRO Section
This is the beginning of the song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main section.
● MAIN Section
There are two variations that can play in the main section of the song: A and
B. The Auto Accompaniment will automatically play following along with the
chords that you play.
● FILL-IN Section
Fill-in livens up pauses in the song. Whenever you press the MAIN/AUTO
FILL [A] or [B] button during accompaniment, the PSR-730/630 will generate
an appropriate “fill-in” (one of four types: AA, AB, BA, and BB) which will
smoothly connect the current section to the selected section — even if it is the
same section.

• The MAIN A section is
automatically selected
whenever the PSR-730/
630 power is initially
turned on.
• The indicator of the destination section (MAIN A
or B) will flash while the
corresponding fill-in is
playing. During this time
you can change the destination section by pressing the appropriate
MAIN/AUTO FILL [A] or
[B] button.
• You can use the intro
section even in the
middle of the song by
pressing the INTRO button during the song.
• If the MAIN/AUTO FILL
A/B button is pressed after the final half beat
(eighth note) of the measure, fill-in will begin from
the next measure.
• You can begin the accompaniment by using
the ending instead of the
intro section.

● ENDING Section
This is the ending portion of the song. When the ending is finished, Auto
Accompaniment will stop.

27

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment

◆ Accompaniment Track Muting
The PSR-730/630 has eight accompaniment tracks — RHYTHM 1, RHYTHM 2,
BASS, CHORD 1, CHORD 2, PAD, PHRASE 1, and PHRASE 2 — that you can
control to modify the “orchestration” and therefore the overall sound of the accompaniment. When a style is selected the icons corresponding to the tracks which contain
data for any section of that style will light.
Individual accompaniment tracks can be turned OFF (muted) or ON by pressing the
TRACK buttons corresponding to the target tracks. The track icon will disappear
when a track is muted. By turning the tracks OFF and ON in different combinations,
you can create various arrangements from a single accompaniment style.

• Individual track voices, volume, and
other parameters
can be changed by
using the REVOICE
function — page
112.

● What’s in the Tracks
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

219 219 340 322 324 407 324 347
RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

PAD

2

3

4

5

6

These are the main rhythm tracks. The RHYTHM
tracks produce the drum and percussion sounds.

BASS

The BASS track always plays a bass line, but the
voice will change to fit the selected style … acoustic
bass, synth bass, tuba, etc.

CHORD 1 & 2

These tracks provide the rhythmic chordal accompaniment required by each style. You’ll find guitar,
piano, and other chordal instruments here.

PAD

This track plays long chords where necessary, using
sustained instruments such as strings, organ, choir.

PHRASE 1 & 2

This is where the musical embellishments reside.
The PHRASE tracks are used for punchy brass
stabs, arpeggiated chords, and other extras that
make the accompaniment more interesting.

PHRASE PHRASE
1
2

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

1

RHYTHM 1 & 2
8

7

8

◆ The Synchro Stop Function
When the Synchro Stop function is engaged, accompaniment playback will stop
completely when all keys in the auto-accompaniment section of the keyboard are
released. Accompaniment playback will start again as soon as a chord is played.
The BEAT indicators in the display will flash while the accompaneiment is
stopped.
The Synchro Stop function is engaged by pressing the [SYNC STOP] button
so that the SYNC STOP icon in the display appears. Press the [SYNC STOP]
button again so that the icon disappears to turn the Synchro Stop function off.

SYNC

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

STOP

p1

START

Gra nd Piano
ONE TOUCH
SETTING

FREEZE

BEAT

1

MEMORY

2

28

3

4

VOICE

MULTI PAD

dim 6

SYNC STOP

001

001
MEASURE

FINGERING

119
513

m M 7aug sus 4

GROOVE & DYNAMICS

• The Synchro Stop
function can not be
turned on when the
FULL KEYBOARD
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT fingering mode
is selected. The Synchro Stop function will
be automatically
turned off if the FULL
KEYBOARD fingering
mode is selected while
the Synchro Stop function is on.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment

Using Virtual Arranger
When the Virtual Arranger function is turned on while Auto Accompaniment is
active, simply pressing chords in the auto accompaniment section causes the Auto
Accompaniment to automatically play slightly different chord variations, which
creates a livelier and more melodic accompaniment. Turning the Virtual Arranger
function off returns to normal Auto Accompaniment.
Press the [STYLE] button to select the STYLE menu. The triangular indicator will
appear next to “STYLE” to the right of the display, and the PSR-730/630 will enter
Style Mode (the STYLE icon will light).
STYLE

STYLE

When Style Mode is selected with the Style Menu (the STYLE icon is lit), the
on/off setting of the Virtual Arranger can be changed with the Sub Menu. Select the
“V.Arranger” sub menu using the SUB MENU [▼], [▲] keys. The current on/off
status will be shown at the top right of the display.

• Simultaneously pressing the [SYNC STOP]
and [SYNC START]
buttons causes the
Virtual Arranger to
switch between off
and on. The current
on/off status will be
shown at the top right
of the display. (The
on/off display will return to its original condition after a few seconds.)

SUB MENU

V.Arrang er: Off
Change the on/off status using the [+], [–] buttons or the Data Dial.

Accompaniment Volume Control
The volume of the accompaniment in relation to the keyboard can be adjusted for
the best overall balance by using the ACMP/SONG VOLUME [▼] and [▲] buttons.
When either button is pressed the current accompaniment volume setting will appear
on the top line of the display for a few seconds.
The accompaniment volume range is from “0” (no sound) to “127” (maximum
volume). The default setting is “100”. Press the ACMP/SONG VOLUME [▼] button
to decrease the volume or the [▲] button to increase the volume. Press the button
briefly to single step, or hold to continuously decrement or increment.
ACMP / SONG
VOLUME

• While the accompaniment volume setting
appears on the top
line of the display the
[–] and [+] buttons,
number buttons, or
Data Dial can also be
used to set the accompaniment volume.

AcmpVolu me: 100

001
STYLE

116
TEMPO

000
TRANSPOSE

A

100

B

REPEAT

ONE TOUCH
SETTING

ACMP/SONG
VOLUME

29

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment

Changing the Accompaniment Split Point
The AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point (the boundary point between the
melody section and accompaniment section) can be set to any key on the PSR-730/630
keyboard to match your individual playing requirements.

1 Select the Accompaniment Split Point Function
Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to the left of the display to move the triangular
indicator next to “OVERALL” on the left side of the display.
MENU

MIDI
DIGITAL EFFECT
OVERALL
GROOVE&DYNAMICS

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “AcmpSplit” function
from within the OVERALL menu . The MIDI note number corresponding to the
current split point will appear to the right of “AcmpSplit” on the top line of the display.

AcmpSpli t:

54 [F#2 ]

2 Set As Required
Simply press the key you want to assign as the split point. The key number of the
key you press will appear to the right of “AcmpSplit” on the top line of the display. You
can also use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or Data Dial to enter the split point
key number. The split point can be set at any key number from 0 through 127.

30

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

– / NO

0

+ / YES

• The split point key becomes the highest
key in the Auto Accompaniment section
of the keyboard.
• When setting the split
point, that is, the sub
menu “AcmpSplit” is
shown on the display,
pressing the key on
the keyboard doesn’t
either produce notes
or detect chords in the
accompaniment section, but only designates the split point.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment

◆ Interaction Between the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT and
SPLIT VOICE Split Points
The SPLIT VOICE split point (page 21) and AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point
can be independently specified, with the following limitations. The SPLIT VOICE
split point cannot be set at a lower key than the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point
(if you attempt to do this the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point will be set to the
same key as the SPLIT VOICE split point). Conversely, the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point cannot be set at a higher key than the SPLIT VOICE split point (if
you attempt to do this the SPLIT VOICE split point will be set to the same key as the
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point).
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
split point

Accompaniment

SPLIT VOICE
split point

R Voice

L Voice

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point/
SPLIT VOICE split point

R Voice

Accompaniment/
L Voice

The Auto Accompaniment Fingering Modes
The PSR-730/630 AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT feature has five different fingering
modes which can be selected as follows.

1 Select the Fingering Mode Function
Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to the left of the display to move the triangular
indicator next to “OVERALL” on the left side of the display.
MENU

MIDI
DIGITAL EFFECT
OVERALL
GROOVE&DYNAMICS

• You can jump directly
to the “FingerMode”
function by pressing
and holding the AUTO
ACCOMPANIMENT
[ON/OFF] button for a
few seconds.

31

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “FingerMode” function
from within the OVERALL menu. The abbreviated name of the current fingering
mode will appear to the right of “FingerMode” on the top line of the display.

• The default Fingering
Mode is “Multi”.

FingerMo de: Mul ti

2 Select the Required Fingering Mode
Use the [–] and [+] buttons or Data Dial to select the desired fingering mode:
● Single (Single Finger)
● Fingered 1
● Fingered 2
● Full Key (Full Keyboard)
● Multi (Multi-finger)

● The SINGLE FINGER Mode

FingerMo de: Sin gle
Single-finger accompaniment makes it simple to produce beautifully orchestrated
accompaniment using major, seventh, minor and minor-seventh chords by pressing
a minimum number of keys on the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT section of the
keyboard. The abbreviated chord fingerings described below are used:
C

■ For a major chord, press the root key only.
Root Key Diagram
Cm

C7

Cm 7

32

Auto Accompaniment
Split Point [54]

■ For a minor chord, simultaneously press the root key
and a black key to its left.
C# E b

■ For a seventh chord, simultaneously press the root
key and a white key to its left.
■ For a minor-seventh chord, simultaneously press the
root key and both a white and black key to its left.

F# A b Bb

C# E b

F#

C D E F G A B C D E F
Accompaniment
Section

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment

● The FINGERED 1 Mode

FingerMo de: Fin gered 1
The Fingered 1 mode lets you finger your own chords on the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT section of the keyboard (i.e. all keys to the left of and including the splitpoint key — normally 54) while the PSR-730/630 supplies appropriately orchestrated rhythm, bass, and chord accompaniment in the selected style.
The FINGERED 1 mode recognizes the following chords:
Chord Name/[Abbreviation]

Normal Voicing

Chord (C)

Display

Major [M]

1-3-5

C

C

Add ninth [(9)]

1-2-3-5

C(9)

C(9)

Sixth [6]

1 - (3) - 5 - 6

C6

C6

Sixth ninth [6(9)]

1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6

C6(9)

C6(9)

Major seventh [M7]

1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or
1 - (3) - 5 - 7

CM7

CM7

Major seventh ninth [M7(9)]

1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7

CM7(9)

CM7(9)

Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)]

1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or
1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7

CM7(#11)

CM7(#11)

Flatted fifth [(b5)]

1 - 3 - b5

C(b5)

C(b5)

Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5]

1 - 3 - b5 - 7

CM7b5

CM7(b5)

Suspended fourth [sus4]

1-4-5

Csus4

Csus4

Augmented [aug]

1 - 3 - #5

Caug

Caug

Major seventh augmented [M7aug]

1 - (3) - #5 - 7

CM7aug

CM7aug

Minor [m]

1 - b3 - 5

Cm

Cm

Minor add ninth [m(9)]

1 - 2 - b3 - 5

Cm(9)

Cm(9)

Minor sixth [m6]

1 - b3 - 5 - 6

Cm6

Cm6

Minor seventh [m7]

1 - b3 - (5) - b7

Cm7

Cm7

Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)]

1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7

Cm7(9)

Cm7(9)

Minor seventh eleventh [m7(11)]

1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7)

Cm7(11)

Cm7(11)

Minor major seventh [mM7]

1 - b3 - (5) - 7

CmM7

CmM7

Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)]

1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7

CmM7(9)

CmM7(9)

Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5]

1 - b3 - b5 - b7

Cm7b5

Cm7(b5)

Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7b5]

1 - b3 - b5 - 7

CmM7b5

CmM7(b5)

Diminished [dim]

1 - b3 - b5

Cdim

Cdim

Diminished seventh [dim7]

1 - b3 - b5 - 6

Cdim7

Cdim7

Seventh [7]

1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or
1 - (3) - 5 - b7

C7

C7

Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)]

1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7

C7(b9)

C7(b9)

Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7(b13)]

1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7

C7(b13)

C7(b13)

Seventh ninth [7(9)]

1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7

C7(9)

C7(9)

Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)]

1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or
1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7

C7(#11)

C7(#11)

Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)]

1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7

C7(13)

C7(13)

Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)]

1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7

C7(#9)

C7(#9)

Seventh flatted fifth [7b5]

1 - 3 - b5 - b7

C7b5

C7b5

Seventh augmented [7aug]

1 - 3 - #5 - b7

C7aug

C7aug

Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4]

1 - 4 - (5) - b7

C7sus4

C7sus4

One plus two plus five [1+2+5]

1-2-5

C1+2+5

C

• Notes in parentheses
can be omitted.
• If you play any three
adjacent keys (including black keys), the
chord sound will be
canceled and only the
rhythm instruments
will continue playing
(CHORD CANCEL
function).
• Playing a single key
or two same root keys
in the adjacent octaves produces accompaniment based
only on the root.
• A perfect fifth (1 + 5)
produces accompaniment based only on
the root and fifth
which can be used
with both major and
minor chords.
• The chord fingerings
listed are all in “root”
position, but other inversions can be used
— with the following
exceptions:
m7, m7b 5, 6, m6,
sus4, aug, dim7,
7b 5, 6(9), m7(11),
1+2+5.
• Inversion of the 7sus4
chord is not recognized if the 5th is
omitted.
• The AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT will sometimes not change
when related chords
are played in sequence (e.g. some
minor chords followed
by the minor seventh).
• Two-note fingerings
will produce a chord
based on the previously played chord.

33

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment
Example for “C” chords

CmM 7

CmM 7 (9)

(

)
(

(

CM7 b5

Cm 7 (9)

Cm 7 (11)

)

CM 7 aug

C (b5)

(

Caug

CM7 (#11)

)

Csus 4

CM 7 (9)

CM 7

)

C6

)

C (9)

(

C 6 (9)

C

Cm (9)

Cm 6

Cm 7

Cm 7 b5

CmM 7 b5

Cdim

Cdim 7

C7

C 7 (13)

C 7 (#9)

C 7 b5

C 7 aug

C 7 sus4

(

)
(

)
)

C 1+2+5

)

)

(

(

)

)
(

(

)
(

C 7 (#11)

C 7 (b13)

(

)

)

C 7 (b9)

(

)
(

C 7 (9)

(

(

(

)

)

(

)

Cm

● The FINGERED 2 Mode

FingerMo de: Fin gered 2
This is essentially the same as the FINGERED 1 mode, described above, except
that the FINGERED 2 mode additionally allows you to specify the lowest note
of each chord — simply, the lowest note played in the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT section of the keyboard is used as the accompaniment bass note. This
means you can specify “on-bass” chords in which the main bass note for the
chord is not the root of the chord. For a C major chord, for example, you could
use E (the third) or G (the fifth) as the bass note rather than C.
C

C on E

C on G

● The FULL KEYBOARD Mode (Full Key)

FingerMo de: Ful l Key
When the FULL KEYBOARD Mode is selected, the PSR-730/630 will automatically create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about anything
using both hands, anywhere on the keyboard. You do not have to worry about
specifying the accompaniment chords. The name of the detected chord will
appear in the display.

• When the FULL KEYBOARD mode is selected, the split point setting (see page 30) for the
auto accompaniment will
be ignored.
• Chord detection occurs
at approximately 8th-note
intervals. Extremely short
chords — less than an
8th note in length — may
not be detected.

34

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment

● The MULTI-FINGER Mode (Multi)

FingerMo de: Mul ti
This is the default accompaniment mode. The MULTI-FINGER mode automatically detects SINGLE FINGER or FINGERED 1 chord fingerings, so you
can use either type of fingering without having to switch fingering modes.

• If you want to play minor,
seventh or minor seventh
chords using the SINGLE
FINGER operation in the
MULTI-FINGER Mode, always press the closest
white/black key(s) to the
root of the chord.

◆ The Stop Accompaniment Function
While the SINGLE FINGER, FINGERED 1, FINGERED 2, or MULTI-FINGER mode is selected chords played in the AUTO ACCOMPNIMENT section of
the keyboard are also detected and played by the PSR-730/630 Auto Accompaniment system when the accompaniment is stopped (except when the FULL KEYBOARD mode is engaged). In this case the bass note and chord voices are selected
automatically.

• When the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split
point and SPLIT
VOICE split point are
set to the same key,
the L voice and the
automatically selected
bass note will sound.

Groove and Dynamics (PSR-730)
The PSR-730 Groove & Dynamics function lets you temporarily change the
timing, velocity and gate time of notes during playback of any of the preset
accompaniment styles (style numbers 1-100).
● Groove .......... Lets you play the music with some swing or put a little groove
in the beat by making subtle shifts in the timing (clock) of the
accompaniment.
● Dynamics ...... Changes the impression of the accompaniment by varying the
velocity of the notes in relation to the timing.
The Groove & Dynamics function is composed of the four items below. When you
choose an accompaniment style, the most appropriate template or value for each
item will be automatically set.
• Beat Groove Template (Automatically selected from 49 types)
• Measure Groove Template (Automatically selected from 25 types)
• Dynamics Template (Automatically selected from 17 types)
• Dynamics Rate (Automatically set within a range of 0-100%)
• Expand Rate (Automatically set within a range of 0-400%)
• Boost Rate (Automatically set within a range of 0-400%)

35

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment

■ Applying Groove & Dynamics

When you press the [GROOVE & DYNAMICS] button, the GROOVE & DYNAMICS icon will light, and the Groove & Dynamics effect will be applied to the
accompaniment.

p1

Gra nd Piano

001
VOICE
GROOVE & DYNAMICS

■ Arranging the Groove & Dynamics Effect (User Settings)
You can arrange any of the Groove & Dynamics settings (Beat Groove Template,
Measure Groove Template, Dynamics Template, Dynamics Rate, Expand Rate or
Boost Rate) that have been preset for each accompaniment style, and apply any kind
of effect you want.
Use the MENU [s] and [t] buttons to the left of the display to move the triangular
indicator next to “GROOVE & DYNAMICS” on the left side of the display.
MENU

MIDI
DIGITAL EFFECT
OVERALL
GROOVE&DYNAMICS

● Select the Beat Groove Template
Use the SUB MENU [s] and [t] buttons to select the “BeatGroove” function from
within the GROOVE & DYNAMICS menu. The name of the currently selected
Beat Groove Template will appear on the right of the top line of the display.

SUB MENU

BeatGroo ve: Thru

Referring to the “Beat Groove Template List” below, use the [+], [–] buttons or the
Data Dial to select one of the 49 template types.

36

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment

Beat Groove Template List

The templates in this list shift the timing of the accompaniments by beats.
These templates add lifelike effect to your accompaniments by converting a specific beat to
another and slightly shifting the converted beat.
Name: Indicates each template name.
No.1"Thru” (No.1) adds no effect as its name implies.
Targeted Beat: Beats to be converted.
8 = Eighth note
12 = Eighth note triplet
16 = 16th note
24 = 16th note triplet
Converted Beat: Converted results.
For example, selecting one of the templates, 12-17 (16 as Targeted Beat and 8 as Converted
Beat), indicates every 16th note will be converted to eighth notes.
Swing: Delays the timing of the converted beat. There are six types: A
(Min.), B, C, D, E (Max.) and off (no effect).
No. Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Targeted Converted
Beat
Beat
Thru
8
off
8_off_A
8
off
8_off_B
8
off
8_off_C
8
off
8_off_D
8
off
8_off_E
8
off
16_off_A
16
off
16_off_B
16
off
16_off_C
16
off
16_off_D
16
off
16_off_E
16
off
16_16to8_off
16
8
16_16to8_A
16
8
16_16to8_B
16
8
16_16to8_C
16
8
16_16to8_D
16
8
16_16to8_E
16
8
16_16to12_off
16
12
12_12to8_off
12
8
12_12to8_A
12
8
12_12to8_B
12
8
12_12to8_C
12
8
12_12to8_D
12
8
12_12to8_E
12
8
12_12to16A_off
12
16A

Swing
off
A
B
C
D
E
A
B
C
D
E
off
A
B
C
D
E
off
off
A
B
C
D
E
off

No. Name

Targeted Converted
Beat
Beat
26 12_12to16A_A
12
16A
27 12_12to16A_B
12
16A
28 12_12to16A_C
12
16A
29 12_12to16A_D
12
16A
30 12_12to16A_E
12
16A
31 12_12to16B_off
12
16B
32 12_12to16B_A
12
16B
33 12_12to16B_B
12
16B
34 12_12to16B_C
12
16B
35 12_12to16B_D
12
16B
36 12_12to16B_E
12
16B
37 24_24to8_off
24
8
38 24_24to8_A
24
8
39 24_24to8_B
24
8
40 24_24to8_C
24
8
41 24_24to8_D
24
8
42 24_24to8_E
24
8
43 24_24to16_off
24
16
44 24_24to16_A
24
16
45 24_24to16_B
24
16
46 24_24to16_C
24
16
47 24_24to16_D
24
16
48 24_24to16_E
24
16
49 24_24to12_off
24
12

Swing
A
B
C
D
E
off
A
B
C
D
E
off
A
B
C
D
E
off
A
B
C
D
E
off

● Select the Measure Groove Template
Use the SUB MENU [s] and [t] buttons to select the “MeasGroove” function
from within the GROOVE & DYNAMICS menu. The name of the currently
selected Measure Groove Template will appear on the right of the top line of the
display.

MeasGroo ve: Thru
Referring to the “Measure Groove Template List” below, use the [+], [–] buttons
or the Data Dial to select one of the 25 template types.

37

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment

Measure Groove Template List

The templates in this list shift the timing of the accompaniments by measures. These
templates add lifelike effect to your accompaniments by hastening or delaying the timing of
the first beat of every measure.
Name: Indicates each template name and content.
No.1"Thru” (No.1) adds no effect as its name implies.
“Push” in the template names indicates those templates hasten the timing.
“Heavy” indicates the templates delay the timing. The suffixes “A”, “B” and
“C” indicate min., med. and max., respectively.
Time Signature: Indicates the appropriate time signatures for you to use.
Be sure to match the time signature here to your song.

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Name
Thru
2_PushA
2_PushB
2_PushC
2_HeavyA
2_HeavyB
2_HeavyC
3_PushA
3_PushB

Time Signature
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3

No.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

Name
3_PushC
3_HeavyA
3_HeavyB
3_HeavyC
4_PushA
4_PushB
4_PushC
4_HeavyA

Time Signature
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4

No.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Name
4_HeavyB
4_HeavyC
5_PushA
5_PushB
5_PushC
5_HeavyA
5_HeavyB
5_HeavyC

● Select the Dynamics Template
Use the SUB MENU [s] and [t] buttons to select the “Dynamics” function from
within the GROOVE & DYNAMICS menu. The name of the currently selected
Dynamics Template will appear on the right of the top line of the display.

Dynamics :

Thru

Referring to the “Dynamics Template List” below, use the [+], [–] buttons or the
Data Dial to select one of the 17 template types.
Dynamics Template List
The templates in this list strengthen or weaken the notes on a specific timing. The stress
degree can be determined by changing the Dynamics Rate.
Name: Indicates each template name.
No.1"Thru” (No.1) adds no effect as its name implies.
The templates from No.7 to No.17 are programmed to put an emphasis on a specific timing.

38

Time Signature
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

Name
Thru
8beat_on
8beat_off
16beat_on
16beat_off
2nd Beat_Off
Dance
Disco
Techno
Fusion
Reggae
BossaNova
Tango
Rhumba Bass
Rhumba Chord
Latin
Samba

● Set the Dynamics Rate
The Dynamics Rate sets the amount of the Dynamics template applied to the PSR730/630 within the range, 0-100%.
Use the SUB MENU [s] and [t] buttons to select the “DynamcsRate” function
from within the GROOVE & DYNAMICS menu. The currently set Dynamics Rate
value will appear on the right of the top line of the display.

DynamcsR ate:100%
Use the [1]–[0] number buttons, the [+], [–] buttons or the Data Dial to set the
Dynamics Rate value within a range of 0-100%.

● Set the Expand Rate
The Expand Rate widens or narrows the dynamic range of the Accompaniment
within the range, 0-100 (original)-400%.
Use the SUB MENU [s] and [t] buttons to select the “ExpandRate” function
from within the GROOVE & DYNAMICS menu. The currently set Expand Rate
value will appear on the right of the top line of the display.

ExpandRa te: 100%
Use the [1]–[0] number buttons, the [+], [–] buttons or the Data Dial to set the
Expand Rate value within a range of 0-400%.

• Though Expand Rate
can be adjusted by a
rate of 1 in 100, the
rate actually applied
will be rounded down
to nearest 10. For example, the rates 1
through 9 result in 0,
no effect. The rates
29 and 53 result in 20
and 50, respectively.
When using the Registration Memory function, the result rate
will be memorized.

39

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment
● Set the Boost Rate

The Boost Rate strengthens or weakens the Accompaniment by offsetting the velocity
value of the Style data, within the range, 0-100 (original)-400%.
Use the SUB MENU [s] and [t] buttons to select the “BoostRate” function from
within the GROOVE & DYNAMICS menu. The currently set Boost Rate value will
appear on the right of the top line of the display.

BoostRat e:

100%

Use the [1]–[0] number buttons, the [+], [–] buttons or the Data Dial to set the Boost
Rate value within a range of 0-400%.

• You can jump directly
to the “BeatGroove”
sub menu of the
GROOVE & DYNAMICS menu (Beat
Groove Template selection screen) by
pressing and holding
the GROOVE & DYNAMICS button for a
few seconds.

• User settings will be
lost when another accompaniment style is
selected. To be able
to recall your original
settings anytime, save
them using the Registration Memory function (page 57).
• Though Boost Rate
can be adjusted by a
rate of 1 in 100, the
rate actually applied
will be rounded down
to nearest 10. For example, the rates 1
through 9 result in 0,
no effect. The rates
29 and 53 result in 20
and 50, respectively.
When using the Registration Memory function, the result rate
will be memorized.

One Touch Setting
The PSR-730/630’s 100 internal styles each have four recommended “panel setups”
that can be instantly selected via the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] and REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] … [4] buttons. The One Touch Setting feature automatically sets
the following parameters:
● One Touch Setting Parameter List
• R1 Voice
(Voice number, volume, octave, pan, reverb depth,
chorus depth, DSP depth)
• Dual Voice ON/OFF
• R2 Voice
(Voice number, volume, octave, pan, reverb depth,
chorus depth, DSP depth)

40

• Auto Accompaniment=ON
• Main A/B section
• Accompaniment Track=ON
• Synchro start=ON
• Accompaniment volume=100
• Harmony ON/OFF, type, volume

• Split Voice ON/OFF

• Reverb ON/OFF

• L Voice
(Voice number, volume, octave, pan, reverb depth,
chorus depth, DSP depth)

• Chorus ON/OFF

• Split Point : Split Voice=54
: Auto Accompaniment=54

• Multi Pad Set number

• DSP ON/OFF, type, variation ON/OFF
• Chord Match ON/OFF=Default (Multi Pad1…4)

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment

1 Select a Style

Select the STYLE menu and select an accompaniment style as described on page
22.

2 Press the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] Button
Press the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button. The ONE TOUCH SETTING and
REGIST [1] icons will appear in the display, and the One Touch Setting type 1 panel
settings will be recalled. At the same, Auto Accompaniment will automatically be
turned on if it was off, and the Sync Start mode will be engaged.
ONE TOUCH SETTING
A

B

ONE TOUCH
SETTING

REPEAT

1

2

3

4

FREEZE

REGISTRATION MEMORY

3 Select a ONE TOUCH SETTING Type, as Required
If you want to select a different REGISTRATION MEMORY, use the REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons to select the desired ONE TOUCH SETTING type. The
corresponding number will appear in the display, and all setting will change according
to the recalled data.
REGISTRATION MEMORY

1

2

3

A

4

B

ONE TOUCH
SETTING

REPEAT

1

2

3

4

FREEZE

REGISTRATION MEMORY

4 Turn ONE TOUCH SETTING Off When Done
Press the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button again and the ONE TOUCH SETTING icon in the display will disappear and the One Touch Setting feature will turn
off.

• If the style is changed
when One Touch Setting is on, the panel
settings appropriate to
the selected style that
have the same One
Touch Setting number
will immediately be
set.
• You can also try
changing the established One Touch
Setting data, making
your own original settings. To be able to
recall your original
settings anytime, save
them using the Registration Memory function (page 57).
• If you press ONE
TOUCH SETTING
buttons [1]–[4] when a
user style is selected,
the voice data won’t
be changed, but the
style data will change
to the user style settings (values).

41

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
Digital Effects
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
With the digital effects built into the PSR-730/630 you can add ambiance and depth to your
music in a variety of ways—such as adding reverb that makes you sound like you are playing
in a concert hall or adding harmony notes for a full, rich sound
With the PSR-730, you can take advantage of even more sophisticated features like the Multi
Effect function that lets apply several effects together or the Digital Equalizer that lets you
adjust volume for each of 5 frequency bands.

Digital Effects

REVERB Button
REVERB

CHORUS Button
CHORUS

DSP Button
DSP

You can create a reverb effect that makes you sound like
you are playing in places like a concert hall, or live in a
club.
You can add a chorus effect that makes your playing
sound as though multiple parts were being played together at the same time.
In addition to the reverb and chorus types, the effects
usually used to a specific part, such as the distortion and
tremolo, can be selected.

VARIATION

PSR-730

MULTI-EFFECT Button
MULTI EFFECT

You can apply reverb, chorus or DSP effects to particular
parts, or combine them together.

PSR-730

DIGITAL EQ Button
DIGITAL EQ

HARMONY Button
HARMONY

You can apply volume adjustments to the output of the
PSR-730, to five different frequency bands, enhancing
the impression your music gives.

You can add a variety of harmony notes to the R1 voice,
or to your playing in the right-hand section, as well as
adding an tremolo or other effect.

• For details about using Digital Effects (Reverb, Chorus, DSP, Multi-Effect, Digital Equalizer) see page 143.

42

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Digital Effects

Reverb
If you press the [REVERB] button, the REVERB icon will light up, and the
Reverb effect will be turned on. After setting the Reverb type, the effect will be
applied to the R1 voice from the keyboard.
REVERB
REVERB

• The REVERB ON/OFF
status will be set automatically according to the
selected R1 panel voice.

VARIATION

CHORUS

DSP

■ Selecting a Reverb Type
Select one of the 13 Reverb types.
Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the
display next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”.
MENU

MIDI
DIGITAL EFFECT

• You can also jump directly
to the DIGITAL EFFECT
REVERB TYPE function
by pressing and holding
the [REVERB] button for a
few seconds.

OVERALL
GROOVE&DYNAMICS

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “Reverb”. The name of
the currently selected Reverb type will appear on the right of the top line of the
display.
Referring to the Reverb Type List on page 145, use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–[0]
number buttons, or Data Dial to select the desired Reverb effect from 1-13.
SUB MENU

Reverb:

8 Roo m 4

■ Reverb Return Level
The Rev.Return (Reverb Return Level) parameter sets the amount of reverb
effect returned from the reverb effect stage, thus making it possible to adjust the
degree of reverb effect applied to the overall sound.

• When you select a different Style, the appropriate
Reverb type will be selected accordingly. Some
of the Styles contain Reverb types which cannot
be selected on the PSR730/630. In this case “XG
Reverb” will be displayed
when you select the SUB
MENU Reverb of the
DIGITAL EFFECT.
• If you don’t want to apply
the Reverb effect to Styles
or Songs, select “13:
OFF” from the Reverb
types, or set the Reverb
Return Level to [0]. In either case no Reverb will
be applied to the entire
system. If you use the
Revoice function, you can
set the Reverb Depth for
each track of the Style independently (see page
110).

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the
display next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”, then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼]
buttons to select “Rev.Return”. The currently set return level will be displayed on
the right of the top line of the display.

Rev.Retu rn:

64

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the [1]–[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to set the
desired reverb return level (the current return level value appears to the right of
“Rev.Return” on the display). The range is from “0” to “127”. The higher the value
the greater the return level.

43

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Digital Effects

Chorus
If you press the [CHORUS] button, the CHORUS icon will light up, and
the Chorus effect will be turned on. After setting the Chorus type, the effect
will be applied to the R1 voice from the keyboard.

• The CHORUS ON/OFF status
will be set automatically according to the selected R1 panel
voice.

CHORUS
REVERB

CHORUS

VARIATION

DSP

■ Selecting a Chorus Type
Select one of the 10 Chorus types.
Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the
display next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”.
MENU

MIDI
DIGITAL EFFECT
OVERALL
GROOVE&DYNAMICS

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “Chorus”. The
name of the currently selected Chorus type will appear on the right of the top
line of the display.
Referring to the Chorus Type List on page 145, use the [–] and [+] buttons, the
[1]–[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to select the desired Chorus effect from
1-10.
SUB MENU

Chorus:

1 Cho rus 1

■ Chorus Return Level
The Cho.Return (Chorus Return Level) parameter sets the amount of
chorus effect returned from the chorus effect stage, thus making it possible to
adjust the degree of chorus effect applied to the overall sound.
Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the
display next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”, then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼]
buttons to select “Cho.Return”.

Cho.Retu rn:

64

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the [1]–[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to set
the desired chorus return level (the current return level value appears to the
right of “Cho.Return” on the display). The range is from “0” to “127”. The
higher the value the greater the return level.

44

• You can also jump directly to the
DIGITAL EFFECT Chorus function by pressing and holding the
[CHORUS] button for a few seconds.

• When you select a different
Style, the appropriate Chorus
type will be selected accordingly.
Some of the Styles contain Chorus types which cannot be selected on the PSR-730/630. In
this case “XG Chorus” will be
displayed when you select the
SUB MENU Chorus of the DIGITAL EFFECT.
• If you don’t want to apply the
Chorus effect to Styles or Songs,
select “10: OFF” from the Chorus
types, or set the Chorus Return
Level to [0]. In either case no
Chorus will be applied to the entire system. If you use the
Revoice function, you can set
the Chorus Depth for each track
of the Style independently (see
page 110).

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Digital Effects

DSP
If you press the [DSP] button, the DSP icon will light up, and the DSP effect will
be turned on. After setting the DSP type, the effect will be applied when you play the
R1, R2 and L voice from the keyboard.
DSP

VARIATION

REVERB

CHORUS

VARIATION

DSP

■ Select the DSP Type
The PSR-730/630 features an extensive range of 46 DSP (Digital Signal Processor)
effects. There are two types of digital effects, system effects and insertion effects. The
illustration below will give you an idea of how DSP effects work, centering on the
mixer.

Insertion Effect

• The DSP effect and
variation settings may
change according to
the selected R1 panel
voice.

System Effect

SEND

• You can also jump directly to the DIGITAL
EFFECT DSP function by pressing and
holding the [DSP] button for a few seconds.

RETURN

(Depth)
Amp

Mixer
Speaker

● System Effect:
Applies to all of the parts input to the mixer. You can set the DSP Depth and DSP
Return Level. The System Effect includes Reverb and Chorus types.
● Insertion Effect:
Applies only to a designated part before inputting the signal to the mixer. You can
effectively use the digital effects by applying the effect to the specific part. With
the Insertion Effect, you can only designate the DSP Depth. The Insertion Effect
includes Distortion and Tremolo.

• DSP Depth cannot be
modified for some Insertion effects. In this
case the display
shows “- - -”, indicating that it’s not accessible.

(See page 143, “About Digital Effects” and the Type List)

45

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Digital Effects

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display
next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”.

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “DSP”. After a few seconds
the name of the currently selected DSP effect will appear on the right of the top line
of the display.
SUB MENU

DSP:

10 Sta ge 2

Referring to the DSP Type List on page 145, use the [–] and [+] buttons, the [1]–
[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to select the desired DSP effect from 1-46
For each DSP type, there is a variation. Pressing the DSP VARIATION button will
cause the VARIATION icon to display, and the variation type will be applied.
DSP

VARIATION

REVERB

CHORUS

VARIATION

DSP

■ DSP Return Level
The DSP Return (DSP Return Level) parameter sets the amount of DSP effect
returned from the DSP effect stage, thus making it possible to adjust the degree of DSP
effect applied to the overall sound.
Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display
next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”, then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select
“DSP Return” (the current return level value appears to the right of “DSP Return” on
the display).

DSP Retu rn:

64

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the [1]–[0]number buttons, or Data Dial to set the
desired DSP return level. The range is from “0” to “127”. The higher the value the
greater the return level.

46

• If DSP Insertion Effect
is selected (page
145), you won’t be
able to set the DSP
Return Level. In this
case, “- - -” will be
shown on the display.
• When the Voice Set
function is ON (page
116), selecting the
panel voice for the R1
voice will reset the
DSP Return level to
64 (fixed at 64).

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Digital Effects

Harmony
If you press the [HARMONY] button, the HARMONY icon will light up, and
the Harmony effect will be turned on. After setting the Harmony type, it will be
applied to the R1 voice.

HARMONY
CHORUS

VARIATION

DSP

HARMONY

The Harmonies except for the types 6, 7 and 9 are applied to the R1 voice
according to the chords detected in the Accompaniment section.

• Harmony can not be
turned on when a drum kit
is selected for the R1
voice.
• Harmony can not be
turned on when the Full
Keyboard Auto accompaniment fingering mode is
selected even if Auto Accompaniment is on. Harmony will be automatically
turned off if the Full Keyboard fingering mode is
selected while the Harmony effect is on.
• If a drum kit voice is selected for R1 when Harmony is turned on, Harmony will be automatically
be turned off.

■ Selecting a Harmony Type
Select one of the 16 Harmony types. There are various harmony effects,
depending on the Harmony type, with some adding a number of higher notes to the
note of the pressed key, and some adding a number of lower notes.
Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the
display next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”.
MENU

MIDI
DIGITAL EFFECT
OVERALL

• You can also jump directly
to the DIGITAL EFFECT
HARMONY TYPE function
by pressing and holding
the [HARMONY] button
for a few seconds.

GROOVE&DYNAMICS

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “Harmony”. The name
of the currently selected Harmony type will appear on the right of the top line of
the display.

• When the Voice Set function is ON (see page 116),
the HARMONY type may
change according to the
selected R1 panel voice.

SUB MENU

Harmony:

1 Due t

Referring to the Harmony Type List on page 147, use the [–] and [+] buttons, the
[1]–[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to select the desired Harmony effect from 116.

47

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Digital Effects

■ Adjusting the Harmony Volume

The volume of the harmony sound in relation to the keyboard sound can be adjusted
for Harmony types 1 through 16 as follows:
Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display
next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”, then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select
“Harm.Vol”. The current harmony volume setting will appear to the right of “Harm.Vol”
on the display.

Harm.Vol :

127

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the [1]–[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to adjust the
harmony volume as required. The range is from “0” to “127”.

• When the Voice Set
function is ON (see
page 116), the Harmony Volume may
change according to
the selected R1 panel
voice.
• Changing the volume
of the harmony sound
may not produce audible effect for some
R1 voices (ex. organ
sounds) when you select Harmony types 1
through 6.

Multi Effect (PSR-730)
Multi Effect allows you to apply three types of effects (reverb, chorus and DSP) more
powerfully and effectively.

■ How Multi Effect Works
With Multi Effect, you can combine 2 effects (Effect 1/2) and apply them to the output
from the keyboard (R1/R2/L parts).
There are 2 ways to combine the effects; in series or in parallel.
Example 1) Applying Effects 1 and 2 to separate parts (parallel)
Part

Effect1

Right1

Dist. Hard

Effect1 In

Effect1

Part

Effect 2

Left

Rotary SP.4

Effect2 In

Effect2

Example 2) Applying Effects 1 and 2 to a single part (series)
Part

Effect1

Right1

Auto Pan

Effect1 In

Effect1

Effect1

Auto Wah

Effect2 In

Effect2

Effect 2

48

• By adding Multi-Effect
to Reverb, Chorus
and DSP, the PSR730 can have up to 5
system effects.
• Since Multi-Effect is
installed closer to the
tone generator than
Reverb, Chorus or
DSP, it can function
as an insertion effect.
See page 143, “About
Digital Effects.”

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Digital Effects

Applying Multi Effect (PSR-730)
Pressing the [MULTI EFFECT] button will cause the Multi Effect icon to light on the
display. After making part settings for Effect 1/2 and type settings, the Multi Effect
will be applied.
MULTI EFFECT
DIGITAL EQ

• The MULTI EFFECT
ON/OFF status will be
set automatically according to the selected R1 panel voice.
• Some of the song files
may contain Multi Effect settings. When
you play back such
songs, Multi Effect
button on the panel
will automatically be
turned off.

MULTI
EFFECT

■ Setting Parts for Effect 1/2
Select a part each for Effect 1 and Effect 2
● Effect 1 ...... Select Right 1 (R1 part), Right 2 (R2 part), Left (L part) .
● Effect 2 ...... Right 1 (R1 part), Right 2 (R2 part), Left (L part) or Effect 1
(Effect 1 in series).
Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display
next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”.
MENU

MIDI
DIGITAL EFFECT
OVERALL
GROOVE&DYNAMICS

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “Effect1 In” or “Effect2
In”. The name of the currently selected part will appear on the right of the top line of
the display.
Use the [–] and [+] buttons or Data Dial to select the part you want to apply the effect
to.

Effect1

In; Rig ht 1

Effect2

In; Lef t

• You can jump directly
to the “Effect1 IN” sub
menu of the DIGITAL
EFFECTS menu by
pressing and holding
the MULTI-EFFECT
button for a few seconds.

• The Effect 1/2 part
settings may automatically change according to the selected R1 panel voice.
• “- - -” may appear on
the display if you play
back the songs containing Multi Effect
settings.

49

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Digital Effects

■ Select the Effect Type for Effect 1/2

Select one of the 42 effect types for Effect 1 and Effect 2
Use the MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display
next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”. The icon for “DIGITAL EFFECT” will light.
Then use the SUB MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to select “Effect1” or “Effect2”. The
name of the currently selected type will appear on the right of the top line of the
display.
Referring to the Multi-Effect Type List on page 146, use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–
[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to select the desired effect type.

Effect1:

01 Hal l 1

Effect2:

18 Fla nger 1

• The Effect 1/2 type
settings may automatically change when a
panel voice is selected
for R1.
• “** XG Ins Eff” may appear on the display if
you play back the
songs containing Multi
Effect settings.

■ Adjust the Dry/Wet Settings for Effect 1/2
Set the Dry/Wet settings for Effect 1 and Effect 2
Dry refers to an original sound that has no effects applied to it, while Wet means that
effects are applied to a sound. Dry/Wet is a setting value that regulates the level of
effects that are applied.
● Dry/Wet [0] ............ Only dry sound is output.
● Dry/Wet [64] ......... Output with the same amount of the dry/wet sounds.
● Dry/Wet [127] ....... Only wet sound is output.
Use the MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display
next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”. The icon for “DIGITAL EFFECT” will light.
Then use the SUB MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to select “Eff1 Dry/Wet” or “Eff2
Dry/Wet”. The currently set Dry/Wet value will appear on the right of the top line of
the display.
Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the [1]–[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to select the
Dry/Wet value within a range of 0-127.

Eff1Dry/ Wet: 64
Eff2Dry/ Wet: 48

50

• The dry/wet settings
cannot be done for
some of the Effect 1/2
types. In that case, “- -” will be displayed.
• The Dry/Wet settings
for Effect 1/2 may automatically change
when a panel voice is
selected for R1.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Digital Effects

The Digital Equalizer (PSR-730)
Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to
match the special character of the room. The sound is divided into several frequency
bands, then by raising or lowering the level for each band, the correction is made.
Adjusting the sound you play according to the genre—classical music more refined,
pops music more crisp, and rock music more dynamic—can also serve to draw out the
special characteristics of the music and make your performance more enjoyable.
The PSR-730 possesses a high grade 5 band digital equalizer function. With this
function, a final effect—tone control—can be added to the output of your instrument.
Example) 04 (Bright)
+12
0
-12

+7
LowGain

-2
LowMidGain

0
MidGain

+2
HighMidGain

+7
HighGain

Frequency Bands (5 bands)
LowGain

80 Hz

LowMidGain

500 Hz

MidGain

1.0 kHz

HighMidGain

4.0 kHz

HighGain

8.0 kHz

• The range of each frequency band can be
changed by transmitting the system exclusive message from an
external MIDI device
to the PSR-730/630
(see page 156).

The digital equalizer adjusts the gain (amplitude change) in each of the 5 frequency
bands within a range of -12 to 0 to +12 decibels [dB]. Try listening to each of the five
preset equalizer settings and compare them.

Using the Digital Equalizer (PSR-730)
If you press the [DIGITAL EQ] button, the DIGITAL EQ icon will light up, and
the Digital EQ effect will be turned on. After setting the Digital EQ type, the equalizer
effect will be applied to the overall output of the PSR-730.

DIGITAL EQ
DIGITAL EQ

MULTI
EFFECT

51

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Digital Effects

■ Selecting a Digital EQ Type.
Select one of the 5 Digital EQ types.

Use the MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display
next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”.
MENU

MIDI
DIGITAL EFFECT
OVERALL
GROOVE&DYNAMICS

Then use the SUB MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to select “EQ Type”. The name of
the currently selected Digital EQ type will appear on the right of the top line of the
display.
Referring to the Equalizer Type List below, use the [–] and [+] buttons, the [1]–[5]
number buttons, or Data Dial to select the desired equalizer type.
SUB MENU

EQ Type:

04 Bri ght

● Equalizer Type List
01 Standard
+12
0
-12

+3
LowGain

0
LowMidGain

-1
MidGain

0
HighMidGain

+5
HighGain

+7
LowGain

-2
LowMidGain

-1
MidGain

+2
HighMidGain

+7
HighGain

+2
LowGain

+2
LowMidGain

-2
MidGain

-5
HighMidGain

0
HighGain

+7
LowGain

-2
LowMidGain

0
MidGain

+2
HighMidGain

+7
HighGain

-3
LowMidGain

+10
MidGain

-2
HighMidGain

02 Disco
+12
0
-12

03 Mild
+12
0
-12

04 Bright
+12
0
-12

05 Lo Fi
+12
0
-12

-12
LowGain

52

-10
HighGain

• You can jump directly
to the “Digital EQ” sub
menu of the DIGITAL
EFFECTS menu by
pressing and holding
the DIGITAL EQ button for a few seconds.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Digital Effects

■ Setting the Gain (User Setting)

You can change the settings for any of the 5 preset equalizer types, adjusting the output
to meet your own needs.
Select the equalizer type you wish to use as a base for your settings, then use the
SUB MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to select “LowGain”.The current LowGain value for
the type you selected will be shown on the right of the upper line of the display.

LowGain:

+ 4

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the [1]–[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to set the
LowGain amplitude change within a range of -12 to 0 to +12 decibels [dB].
Switch to each of the other bands: “LowMidGain,” “MidGain,” “HighMidGain,”
and “HighGain”, and set them in the same way as the “LowGain.”
After finishing the gain settings, use the SUB MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to select
“EQ Type”. “** User” will appear on the right of the top line of the display.

EQ Type:

** Use r

53

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
The Pitch Bend Wheel
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Use the PSR-730/630 pitch bend wheel to bend notes up (roll the wheel away from you) or
down (roll the wheel toward you) while playing the keyboard. The pitch bend wheel is selfcentering and will automatically return to nornal pitch when released.

PITCH BEND

Setting the Pitch Bend Range
The maximum pitch bend range can be set via the PITCH BEND RANGE function
in the OVERALL function group. Use the MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to move the
triangular indicator in the display next to “OVERALL”.
MENU

MIDI
DIGITAL EFFECT
OVERALL
GROOVE&DYNAMICS

Then use the SUB MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to select “PB Range”. The current
pitch bend range setting will appear to the right of the function name on the top line
of the display. Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the [1]–[0] number buttons, or Data Dial
to set the pitch bend range from “01” to “12” as required. Each increment corresponds
to one semitone.

PB Range :

54

2

• When the Voice Set
function is ON (page
116), the Pitch Bend
Range will be
changed according to
the selected R1 panel
voice.
• The default pitch bend
range can be instantly
recalled by pressing
the [+] and [–] buttons
simultaneously.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
The Modulation Wheel
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
(PSR-730)

The Modulation function applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard (R1, R2, L
voices). Rolling the MODULATION wheel all the way towards yourself minimizes the depth
of the effect, while rotating it away from yourself increases it.

MODULATION

MAX

MIN

• In order to avoid accidentally applying
modulation when you
don’t intend to, set the
depth at its minimum
setting.
• You can also assign
other functions to the
MODULATION Wheel
(see below).

Changing the Modulation Wheel Function
It’s possible to change the effect that is applied when you rotate the MODULATION Wheel. You can select from 3 types: modulation, brightness or resonance
● Modulation ........... Applies vibrato effects to the voices from the keyboard.
● Brightness ........... Adjusts the brightness of the R1 voice played on the keyboard.
Increasing the depth makes the sound brighter, while decreasing it makes it softer.
● Resonance ........... Adds resonance to the R1 voices played on the keyboard.
Use the MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display
next to “OVERALL”.
Then use the SUB MENU [▼] and [▲] buttons to select “ModWheel”. The effect
currently set for the modulation wheel will appear to the right of the top line of the
display.

ModWheel :

Modulation

Referring to the information above, use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to
select one of the 3 effects.

55

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
Transpose
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
This functions allow the overall pitch of the PSR-730/630 to be transposed up or down by a
maximum of one octave in semitone increments.

Setting Transposition
Use the TRANSPOSE [▼] and [▲] buttons to set the desired degree of transposition. Press either button briefly to decrement or increment by one, or hold for
continuous decrementing or incrementing. The current transpose value will appear on
the top line of the display for a few seconds whenever one of the TRANSPOSE buttons
is pressed — during this time the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial can
also be used to set the transpose value (the transpose value also appears continuously
above “TRANSPOSE” in the display).

TRANSPOSE

Transpos e:

001
STYLE

116
TEMPO

000
TRANSPOSE

A

100

B

REPEAT

0
ONE TOUCH
SETTING

ACMP/SONG
VOLUME

The transpose range is from –12 to +12. Each step corresponds to one semitone,
allowing a maximum upward or downward transposition of 1-octave. A setting of “0”
produces the normal pitch.

56

• The Transpose function cannot be applied
when a drum kit is the
selected voice (page
19).
• Press the TRANSPOSE [▼ ] and [▲]
buttons simultaneously to instantly
reset the transpose
value to “0”.
• The new TRANSPOSE value will take
effect from the next
key played.
• When the Transpose
value is shown at the
top of the display, you
can use the [1]–[0]
number keys, the
[+],[–] buttons or the
Data Dial to change it.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
Registration Memory
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
The PSR-730/630 Registration Memory feature can be used to memorize 128 complete
control-panel setups (32 banks, 4 setups each) that you can recall whenever needed.

• The PSR-730/630’s initial Registration Memory [1]–[4] settings (when it shipped from the
factory) are the same panel settings as when the power switch is first turned on.

Registering the Panel Settings

1 Set Up the Controls as Required
Make the desired control settings. The following settings are memorized by the
Registration Memory function:
● Data Stored By the Registration Memory
VOICE PARAMETERS
• R1 Voice (Voice number,
volume, octave, pan, reverb
depth, chorus depth, DSP
depth)
• Dual Voice ON/OFF
• R2 Voice (Voice number,
volume, octave, pan, reverb
depth, chorus depth, DSP
depth)
• Split Voice ON/OFF
• L Voice (Voice number,
volume, octave, pan, reverb
depth, chorus depth, DSP
depth)
• Pedal 1 function
• Pedal 2 function

ACCOMPANIMENT PARAMETERS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•

Split Point (Split Voice)
Touch Sensitivity
Reverb ON/OFF
Chorus ON/OFF
DSP ON/OFF, variation
ON/OFF
DSP type
Multi Effect (ON/OFF,
Effect 1/2: part, type, dry/
wet)
Harmony ON/OFF, type,
volume
Pitch bend range
Modulation wheel
function
Scale Tuning

•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•

Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF
Fingering mode
Tempo
Split point
(Auto Accompaniment)
Accompaniment volume
Track data (Track ON/OFF,
voice, volume, pan, reverb
depth, chorus depth)
Accompaniment section (Main
A/B)
Multi Pad Set number
Chord Match ON/OFF (Multi
Pad1…4)

•
•
•
•

Transpose
Reverb type
Chorus type
Groove & Dynamics (ON/
OFF, templates, rates)
• Style number (Style
names [page 104] for the
user styles)

2 Select a Registration Bank (if necessary)
Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator next to
“REGIST MEMORY “ in the menu list to the left of the display — the currently
selected registration bank number and name will appear on the top line of the display.
Then use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to select the
desired bank (1 through 32).

Bank 01:

• Press and hold the
REGISTRATION
MEMORY [MEMORY]
button for a few seconds to go directly to
the REGIST
MEMORY display.

Reg ist1

57

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Registration Memory

On the PSR-730, there are BANK [▼] and [▲] buttons. Pressing these buttons will
directly bring up the registration bank sub menu (example: Bank 1) of the “Regist
Memory”, main menu item, and all you have to do is add the correct number.

BANK

REGISTRATION MEMORY

MEMORY

1

3 Register the Settings
While holding the [MEMORY] button, press one of the REGISTRATION
MEMORY buttons — [1] through [4]. The corresponding REGISTRATION MEMORY
number will appear below “REGISTRATION” in the display.
REGISTRATION MEMORY

MEMORY

1

2

3

Bank 01:

4

Reg ist1
A

B

ONE TOUCH
SETTING

REPEAT

1

2

3

4

FREEZE

REGISTRATION MEMORY

Naming the Registration Banks
You can give your own names (up to 8 characters) to the registration banks where
you have stored settings.
After recalling the registration settings you wish to name, use the MENU [▲] and
[▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator next to “REGIST MEMORY“ in the menu
list to the left of the display.
Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “Reg Naming”. The current
name will appear on the top right of the display.

Reg Nami ng: Reg ist1

58

• Any data that was
previously recorded in
the Registration
Memory location you
selected will be
erased and replaced
by the new settings.
• The Registration
Memory contents will
be retained even after
turning the power off.
See page 152 for the
details.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Registration Memory

Referring to the information below, use the [1]–[0] number buttons, the [+], [–]
buttons or the Data Dial to enter the name.
[+].................. Select letter (cursor moves right)
[–] .................. Select letter (cursor moves left)
Dial ............... Change Character
[1]–[0] ........... ”Jump” entry

[Character List]
• When entering letters with the Dial

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

• Lower case letters
can’t be entered with
the naming function.

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V
W X Y Z - –
• When doing “jump” entry with the [1]–[0] number buttons

[1] .......... 1 A B C
[2] .......... 2 D E F
[3] .......... 3 G H I
[4] .......... 4 J K L
[5] .......... 5 M N O
[6] .......... 6 P Q R
[7] .......... 7 S T U
[8] .......... 8 V W X
[9] .......... 9 Y Z @
[0] .......... 0 - –

R e g N a m i n g : L I V E 01
The same method can be used to give your own names to user songs (page 94), user
pads (page 109), or user styles (page 104).

59

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Registration Memory

Recall the Registered Panel Settings
Simply select the appropriate bank as described above, then press the desired
REGISTRATION MEMORY button at any time to recall the memorized settings. The
corresponding Registration Memory number will appear above “REGISTRATION”
in the display, and the appropriate setting changes will appear in the display.

• When power is turned
on, or the bank is
changed, all of the
numbers in the REGISTRATION
MEMORY section of
the display will be
blank.

REGISTRATION MEMORY

1

2

3

Bank 03:

• Registration data cannot be recalled when
the One Touch Setting function is on.

4

Reg ist3
A

B

ONE TOUCH
SETTING

REPEAT

1

2

3

4

FREEZE

REGISTRATION MEMORY

The Accompanient Freeze Function
When the FREEZE function is engaged, the accompaniment parameters listed
above will not be changed when a REGISTRATION MEMORY is recalled. This
allows you to recall different REGISTRATION MEMORY settings while using Auto
Accompaniment, without suddenly disturbing the flow of the accompaniment. The
FREEZE function is turned on and off by pressing the [FREEZE] button. The
“FREEZE” icon appears in the display when it is turned on.
EMORY
A

3

4

FREEZE

B

ONE TOUCH
SETTING

REPEAT

1

2

3

4

FREEZE

REGISTRATION MEMORY

60

• FREEZE remains on
even if a different registration bank is selected.
• The Freeze function
will automatically be
turned on when one
of the following
modes, Song, Record
or Style Revoice, is
engaged.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
The Multi Pads
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
The PSR-730/630 MULTI PADS can be used to play a number of short pre-recorded rhythmic
and melodic sequences that can be used to add impact and variety to your keyboard
performances.You can also record your own MULTI PAD phrases as described in “MULTI PAD
Recording” on page 106.
Some pad phrases simply play back as programmed, while others are “chord match” types
which, if the CHORD MATCH function is turned on, are automatically transposed to match
chords played using the PSR-730/630 Auto Accompaniment feature.

Selecting a MULTI PAD Set
The PSR-730/630 has 36 multi pad sets, each containing a complete set of 4 MULTI
PAD phrases — 144 phrases in all. Before using the MULTI PADS, select the MULTI
PAD set containing the phrases you want to use as follows:

1 Select the Multi Pad Function
To select a multi pad set first use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the
MULTI PAD function so that the triangular indicator in the display appears next to
“MULTI PAD” to the left of the display.
SUB MENU

MENU
DISK
MULTI PAD
REGIST MEMORY

MENU

MIDI
DIGITAL EFFECT
OVERALL
GROOVE&DYNAMICS

2 Select a Multi Pad Set Number
If necessary use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that the name of the
currently selected MULTI PAD set appears on the display (see list on page 62), then
use the [–] and [+], number buttons, or data dial to select the MULTI PAD set you want
to use.

Bank 01:

Fan fare1

• Press and hold the
MULTI PAD [STOP]
button for a few seconds to go directly to
the MULTI PAD SET
display.

61

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
The Multi Pads

Playing the MULTI PADs
Simply tap any of the MULTI PADs at any time to play back the corresponding
phrase at the currently set tempo. MULTI PAD playback begins as soon as the button
is pressed. You can even play two, three, or four MULTI PADs at the same time. Also,
you can create “retriggered sample” effects by repeatedly pressing a pad before its
contents are completely played back.
STOP

1

2

3

4

• Pressing the pad during its playback will
stop playing and begin playing from the
top again.

MULTI PAD

BEAT

1

2

3

4

MULTI PAD

The MULTI PAD voices are indepedent from the voices you have currently selected
for keyboard performance. You could, for example, play piano on the keyboard while
a MULTI PAD plays a brass chord stab.
When the CHORD MATCH function (page 63) for a pad is turned on, the
corresponding phrase will be automatically transposed to match chords played using
the PSR-730/630 Auto-accompaniment feature.
MULTI PAD playback can be terminated by pressing the MULTI PAD [STOP]
button.
STOP

1

2

3

4

MULTI PAD

● The Multi Pad Sets
Chord Match
Set

62

Chord Match

Pad 1

Pad 2

Pad 3

Pad 4

Pad 1

Pad 2

Pad 3

Pad 4

1 Fanfare1

O

O

O

–

19 Classic

O

O

O

O

2 Fanfare2

O

O

O

–

20 Jingle

O

O

O

O

3 Brassy1

O

O

O

O

21 Horror SE

–

–

–

–

4 Brassy2

O

O

O

O

22 Racing SE

–

–

–

–

5 Synth Brass

O

O

O

O

23 Stormy SE

–

–

–

–

6 Guitar Play1

O

O

O

O

24 Water SE

–

–

–

–

7 Guitar Play2

O

O

O

O

25 Animal SE

–

–

–

–

8 Guitar Play3

O

O

O

O

26 Haha SE

–

–

–

–

9 Guitar Play4

O

O

O

O

27 Rock Kit

–

–

–

–

10 Techno Synth1

O

O

O

O

28 Techno Kit

–

–

–

–

11 Techno Synth2

O

O

O

O

29 Analog Kit

–

–

–

–

12 Arpeggio

O

O

O

O

30 Tom Flam

–

–

–

–

13 Crystal

O

O

O

O

31 Latin Percusion1

–

–

–

–

14 Twinkle

O

O

O

O

32 Latin Percussion2

–

–

–

–

15 Magical

O

O

O

O

33 Timbales

–

–

–

–

16 Piano Sequence

O

O

O

O

34 Analog Sequence

–

–

–

–

17 Banjo Sequence

O

O

O

O

35 Conga Sequence

–

–

–

–

18 Gothic

O

O

O

O

36 Techno Sequence

–

–

–

–

Set

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
The Multi Pads

Turning the CHORD MATCH Function On/Off
The CHORD MATCH function can be individually turned on or off for each of the
MULTI PADs, as described below.

• The chord match
function has no effect
with pads that contain
percussion phrases.

1 Select the MULTI PAD Function
Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the MULTI PAD function so that the
triangular indicator in the display appears next to “MULTI PAD” to the left of the
display.
SUB MENU

MENU
DISK
MULTI PAD
REGIST MEMORY

MENU

MIDI
DIGITAL EFFECT
OVERALL
GROOVE&DYNAMICS

2 Select a CHORD MATCH Function
Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “P1ChdMatch”, “P2ChdMatch”,
“P3ChdMatch”, or “P4ChdMatch”, depending on the pad for which you want to turn
the CHORD MATCH function on or off.

• The chord match on/
off status depends on
the selected Multi
Pad.

P1ChdMat ch: On

3 Turn the CHORD MATCH Function On or Off
Use the [–] and [+] buttons or data dial to turn the CHORD MATCH function for
the selected pad “on” or “off” as required.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

– / NO

0

+ / YES

• The CHORD MATCH
ON/OFF setting is restored to its original
status whenever a
preset MULTI PAD
set is selected.
• When the CHORD
MATCH ON/OFF status of a user MULTI
PAD (see page 107)
set is changed, the
new status is recorded with the
MULTI PAD data.

63

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
Disk Operations
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
There is a disk drive installed in the PSR-730/630. By inserting a floppy disk into it, you can
do many things: record and playback user songs, save and load user styles (page 98), user
pads (page 106), or registration memory data (page 57).
You can save any number of user styles and registration data on floppy disks, make song
libraries or find many other ways to make playing the PSR-730/630 more efficient.
There is a sample disk packed with the PSR-730/630. It contains 20 XG songs and 8 style
files. To play back the songs see page 76. To load the styles see page 70.

◆ Floppy Disk Handling Precautions
Floppy disks are an inexpensive, convenient, and reliable way to
store your music data. They are not indestructable, however, and
should be handled with care. Observe the following points to
ensure the long-term safety of your disks and data.

Type of Disk
• Use the 3.5-inch 2DD or 2HD floppy disks with the PSR-730/
630.

Taking Care of Your Floppy Disks
• Never attempt to eject a disk during a read or write operation (i.e.
while the disk drive is operating). Doing so can damage both the
disk and the drive.
• Never turn the power ON or OFF while a disk is in the drive.
Always eject the disk before turning the power OFF.
• To eject a floppy disk from the disk drive press the eject button
slowly as far as it will go. Then when the disk is fully ejected,
remove it by hand. The disk may not be ejected properly if the
eject button is pressed too quickly or if it is not pressed in far
enough (the eject button may become stuck halfway with the
disk extending from the slot by only a few millimeters). If this is
the case, do not attempt to pull out the partially ejected disk.
Doing so may damage the disk drive mechanism and/or the
floppy disk. To remove a partially ejected disk, try pressing the
eject button once again or push the disk back into the slot, then
repeat the eject procedure carefully.

This lamp is always on when the
power is on, regardless of Disk
operation.

• Do not insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive. Other
objects can damage the disk drive or floppy disk.
• Never open the disk shutter by hand or touch the internal surface
of the disk. Dirt, dust, or grease on the disk’s magnetic surface
can cause data errors.

• Do not store disks in places exposed to direct sunlight or other
sources of heat. The acceptable storage temperature range is
approximately 4° to 53° C (39° to 127° F).
• Do not store disks in areas subject to extreme dryness or
humidity. The acceptable relative humidity range is approximately 8 to 90%.
• Do not store disks in areas contaminated with dust, sand, smoke,
etc.
• Do not place heavy objects such as books on top of a disk.
• Avoid getting floppy disks wet, particularly with oily or sticky
fluids. A disk that has been wet with water should be allowed to
dry naturally before use. Disks contaminated by other fluids can
cause damage to the disk drive and should be discarded.
• Be sure to apply the disk label at the proper position. When
changing the label never cover the old label with a new label;
always remove the old label first.

Head Cleaning
• With extended use the read/write head of the disk drive will pick
up dust and other particles that will eventually cause data errors.
If this occurs, clean the head with a 3.5 inch head cleaning disk
available from most computer supply stores.

Data Backup
• For maximum data security we strongly recommended that you
keep two copies of important data on separate floppy disks.
These disks should ideally be stored in separate locations. This
gives you a backup if one disk is lost or damaged.

Protecting Your Data (Write Protect Tab)
• To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the disk’s
write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab open). If you
attempt to modify the disk when the write-protect tab is set to ON
position, “Disk Write Protected!!” will appear on the display
indicating that the operation is not possible.

• Never leave disks near a speaker, TV, or other device that emits
a strong magnetic field. Strong magnetic fields can partially
erase the data on the disk.
Write protect tab ON
(locked-write protected)

64

Write protect tab OFF
(unlocked- write enabled)

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Disk Operations

■ User Song Data

User song data is saved directly to the disk without saving it in the PSR-730/630 itself.

Record

User Song

Floppy
Disk

(Direct save)

• It may not be possible
to record the full 60
files to a disk, depending on the legnth
of the recorded files.

Playback
(Direct read)
Maximum of 60 files can
be saved.

■ User Style/User Pad/Registration Memory Data
The PSR-730/630 has User Style, User Pad and Registration Memory functions
installed. The data recorded with these functions can also be saved individually or
gathered together to floppy disks and also the data (files) saved on disks can be loaded
individually or gathered together into the PSR-730/630.

User Style
Save

User Pad

Save or load individually
or gathered together

• The maximum number of files may vary
according to the type
and volume of the
saved files (page 68).

Floppy
Disk

Load

Registration Memory

Up to 43 “All” type files (page 68)
can be recorded on a 2HD disk.
Up to 21 “All” type files can be
recorded on a 2DD disk.

■ Data that Can be Saved or Loaded with the PSR-730/630
Data Type

Extension

Save

Load

User Style (101-104)
[Style File Format]

.USR

O

O

User Pad (bank 37-40)

.USR

O

O

Registration Memory (bank 01-32)

.USR

O

O

User Style + Registration Memory

.USR

O

O

User Pad + Registration Memory

.USR

O

O

User Style + User Pad

.USR

O

O

User Song

.MID

—

—

• When saving data,
use a floppy disk formatted on the PSR730/630.
• The three letters after
the file name (after
the period) are called
the extension. The extension shows the
type of file.
• Since the user songs
are directly recorded
to the disk as you play
during recording and
read from the disk
during playback, the
Save/Load functions
are not available. The
Disk Copy, Song
Copy and Delete File
operations related to
the user songs can be
executed.

65

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Disk Operations

■ Using Commercially Available Music Collections
(Sold Separately)

The PSR-730/630 can playback commercially available XG/GM music collection or
YAMAHA DOC collection (Disk Orchestra Collection) disk files. It can also load
styles collected on YAMAHA style file disks.
The PSR-730/630 can handle music disks (floppy disks) that bear the following
marks:
You can playback song files collected on these disks using the voices defined
in the GM standard.
You can playback songs using the XG format, an extension of the GM standard
that allows for much higher sound quality.
You can playback song files collected on these disks using the voices defined
in Yamaha’s DOC format.
You can load and play with the style files collected on these disks.

The Sample Disk
Try playing some of the songs on the included Sample Disk.

1 Insert the Sample Disk into the Disk Drive.
Once the disk is inserted, the menu icon on the display will automatically switch to
the song menu, and the currently selected song name and song number will appear at
the upper left of the display. The PSR-730/630 will switch into Song Mode. The
SONG icon will light along with the DISK (floppy disk) icon and the XG icon.

PSR-730X G

001
STYLE
SONG

DISK

116
TEMPO

000
TRANSPOSE

A

100
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME

B

ONE T
SET

REPEAT

1

2

3

4

REGISTRATION ME

2 Start and Stop the Song
Press the [START/STOP] button, and playback of the Sample Disk song will begin.
START / STOP

For details, see page 76 “Song Playback.”

66

• With song data software that includes lyrics, you can view the
lyrics in the display
during playback. Consult your Yamaha
dealer for information
on song data that is
compatible with the
Lyrics Display function of the PSR-730/
630.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Disk Operations

Format
Setting up commercially available floppy disks (3.5 inch, 2HD/2DD
type) for use with the PSR-730/630 is called formatting
Follow the steps below to format a disk.

• After formatting, the capacity of a
2HD disk will be 1 Mbyte, and of
a 2DD disk will be 720 Kbyte.

1 Insert the Disk into the Disk Drive
Insert a commercially available 3.5 inch floppy disk (unformatted) into
the disk drive, with the shutter on the disk towards the drive, and with the
label side facing upward.
The “DISK” menu will be automatically selected, and the Sub Menu
item “Format Disk? NO/YES” will appear on the top line of the display.

Format D isk?

NO/YES

• If you insert an unformatted disk
with the write protect tab in the
ON position into the drive, “Format Disk? NO/YES” will appear,
but when you try to format it,
“Disk Write Protected!!” will be
displayed. Eject the disk, move
the protect tab to the OFF position, and reinsert it in the drive.
• The “DISK” menu won’t be selected automatically when you insert the formatted disk. If you
want to format the formatted disk
to record from scratch, first insert
the disk you want to format, then
press the Menu button, next
press the Sub Menu button to
show the “Format Disk? YES” on
the display.

2 Press the [+] (YES) Button
When the [+] button is pressed, “Execute? NO/YES” will appear on the
display.

Execute? isk?

NO/YES

3 Start Formatting
Press the [+] (YES) button and disk formatting will begin. Once started,
formatting cannot be canceled. During formatting, the display will read “Now
Formatting... xx%.”

Now Form atting. ..

20%

When formatting is finished, the display will return to the one which was
selected before inserting the disk.
If you don’t want to format, press the [–] (NO) button before the step 3 or
simply eject the disk. The display will return to the one which was selected
before inserting the disk.

• If data is already saved on the
disk, be careful not to format it. If
you format the disk, all the previously recorded data will be deleted.
• While formatting is in progress
(while “Now Formatting” is displayed) , never eject the disk or
turn off the power to the PSR730/630.

• If a disk that cannot be read by
the PSR-730/630 is inserted into
the disk drive, it will be treated
the same as an unformatted
floppy disk. Take care not to
erase important data by accidentally formatting a disk.
• If you want to reformat a disk
that already has been formatted
for the PSR-730/630, insert the
disk in the drive, select the “Format Disk? YES” item from the
sub menu of the “DISK” menu,
then proceed as for a normal format.
• If you insert the formatted disk
and you press the [-] (NO) button
or eject the disk in the step 2, the
display will return to the “Format
Disk?”.

67

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Disk Operations

Save
You can save PSR-730/630 user styles, user pad (banks 37-40) and registration
memory data (banks 01-32) on floppy disks.

1 Insert a Formatted Floppy Disk.

• After formatting, the
capacity of a 2HD
disk will be 1 Mbyte,
and of a 2DD disk will
be 720 Kbyte.

If a disk has not been already inserted in the drive, insert a formatted floppy disk.

2 Select a Save Function
SUB MENU

MENU
DISK
MULTI PAD
REGIST MEMORY

MENU

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select
the Disk function so that the triangular indicator
in the display appears next to “DISK” to the left
of the display.

MIDI
DIGITAL EFFECT
OVERALL
GROOVE&DYNAMICS

Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so
that “Save To Disk? YES” appears on the display.

SUB MENU

Save To

Disk?

YES

3 Select the File Type
Press the [+] (YES) button, and the file type select screen “File Type: All” will
appear on the display.

File Typ e:

All

Use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select the file type for the data you
want to save. Refer to the file type list below:
All

68

Save all User Style (101-104), User Pad (bank 37-40), and Registration
Memory (bank 01-32) data into one single file.
Style

Save all User Style (101-104) data gathered together into one single file.

Pad

Save all User Pad (bank 37-40) data gathered together into one single file.

Regist

Save all Registration Memory (bank 01-32) data gathered together into
one single file.

Style + Reg.

Save all User Style (101-104) and Registration Memory (bank 01-32)
data gathered together into one single file.

Pad + Regist

Save all User Pad (bank 37-40), and Registration Memory (bank 01-32)
data gathered together into one single file.

Style + Pad

Save all User Style (101-104) and User Pad (bank 37-40) data gathered
together into one single file.

• If the DISK menu is
selected when there
is no floppy disk inserted into the disk
drive, “- - -” will be
displayed at the top of
the display, and disk
operations won’t be
possible.
• Although all User
Style (101-104), User
Pad (bank 37-40),
and Registration
Memory (bank 01-32)
data can be saved
gathered into one
single file, the data
can be recalled individually when loaded
back into the PSR730/630.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Disk Operations

4 Save File Confirmation

Use the SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Save File....” appears on the display,
showing the new file the data will be saved to.

Save Fil e: UF–0 0001.USR
To overwrite the data already saved to an existing file, use the [–] and [+] buttons
or the Data Dial to select the file you want to overwrite.

5 If Necessary Change the File Name
Use the SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Rename:.....” appears on the display, and
you can change the name of the file (the 8 characters before the extension).

Rename:

LIVE -001.USR

• Even if you chose a
file where data is already saved because
you want to overwrite
the data, renaming
the file will cause the
new data to be saved
in a different file, and
the old data won’t be
overwritten.
• While data is being
saved (“Now Saving”
is displayed), never
eject the floppy disk
or turn off power to
the PSR-730/630.

6 Execute the File Save
Use the SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Execute: NO/YES” appears on the display.

Execute? isk?

NO/YES

Press the [+] (YES) button and the save operation will begin. While it is in progress,
“Now Saving...” will appear at the top of the display.

Now Savi ng...E

-001.USR

When the save operation is finished, the sub menu will return to “Save To Disk?
YES.”

• If you press the SUB
MENU [s ] button the
sub menu display will
return to “Save To
Disk? YES.”
• If there isn’t enough
space on the disk,
“Disk Full” will be displayed, and you won’t
be able to save any
data. You can delete
unneeded files on the
disk (page 75), or exchange the disk for a
new one and repeat
the save operation.
• If a write error occurs
during a save operation, “Disk Error” will
be displayed. If the error reoccurs after repeating the save operation, there could
be something wrong
with the disk. Insert a
different disk in the
drive and repeat the
save operation.

69

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Disk Operations

Load
After saving User Style (101-104), User Pad (bank 37-40), and Registration
Memory (bank 01-32) data onto a floppy disk, you can reload them into the PSR-730/
630.
You can also load style data from the included Sample Disk or commercially
available Yamaha Style File disks.

1 Insert the Floppy Disk into the Disk Drive.
Insert the floppy disk that has the data you want to load into the floppy disk drive.

2 Select a Load Function
Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the Disk function so that the triangular
indicator in the display appears next to “DISK” to the left of the display.
Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Load To Disk? YES” appears
on the display.
SUB MENU

Load Fro m Disk?

YES

• If the DISK menu is
selected when there
is no floppy disk inserted into the disk
drive, “- - -” will be
displayed at the top of
the display, and disk
operations won’t be
possible.

3 Select the File to Load
Press the [+] (YES) button, and “Load File.....” file select screen will appear on the
display.

Load Fil e: UF–0 0001.USR
Use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select the file to load.

4 Select the File Type (Data Type) to Load
Press the SUB MENU [▼] button and the sub menu “File Type:....” will be
displayed.

File Typ e:

All

Use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select the file type (data type) to load.
The file types that you can load at this point will depend on the types of files that
were originally saved to this file.
File types that were saved
All
Style
Pad
Regist
Style+Reg.
Pad+Regist
Style+Pad

70

File types that can be loaded
All, Style, Pad, Regist
Style
Pad
Regist
Style, Regist, Style+Reg.
Pad, Regist, Pad+Regist
Style, Pad , Style+Pad

• If the disk contains no
file, the display shows
“File Not Found!!” indicating that the Load
function is not possible.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Disk Operations

5 Select the Data to Be Loaded If Necessary

If the file type selected in step 4 was “Style,” “Pad,” or “Regist,” press the SUB
MENU [▼] button so that the sub menu “Source:....” (load data selection screen) is
displayed.

Source:

All le 1

• When the selected file
type is “All,” “Style +
Reg,” “Pad + Regist,”
“Style + Pad,” step 5
is not necessary. Proceed from step 6.

By setting the “source” and “destination,” the data can be individually loaded (or
loaded as a group).
Style ....... A single Style can be extracted from the file 4 Styles saved together on the
disk and loaded into one of the PSR-730/630 User Style 101-104.
Pad ......... A single bank can be extracted from the file 4 banks saved together on the
disk and loaded into one of the PSR-730/630 User Pad banks 37-40.
Regist .... A single bank can be extracted from the file 32 banks saved together on the
disk and loaded into one of the PSR-730/630 Registration banks 1-32.
File Type

Source

Destination

Style

Style 1-4, All

Style 1-4 (User Style 101-104)

Pad

Pad bank 1-4, All

Pad bank 1-4 (User Pad 37-40)

Regist

Regist bank 1-32 All

Reg. bank 1-32

● Source Selection
Use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select the load source.
If “All” is selected, all the data will be loaded.

Source:

Sty le 2

● Select the Destination
Press the SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Destination:....” appears on the display.

Destinat ion:Sty le 4
Use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–[0] number buttons, or the Data Dial to select the
destination for the data.
Press the SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Execute NO/YES” (load execution
screen) appears on the display.

71

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Disk Operations

6 Execute the Load Operation

Execute? isk?

NO/YES

Press the [+] (YES) button, and the load operation will start. Once started, the
operation can’t be canceled.
As the file is loading, “Now Loading” will appear on the top line of the display.

Now Load ing...E -001.USR
When the load operation is finished, the display will return to the “Load From Disk?
YES” sub menu.
If you aren’t going to load, press the [–] (NO) button instead of the [+] (YES) button,
or eject the disk. The display will return back to the previous “Load From Disk? YES”.

• When data is loaded
from a floppy disk to
the PSR-730/630, the
data already in the
memory of the instrument will be replaced
by the data on the disk.
Save important data
into a disk file before
doing the load operation.
• While data is loading
(“Now Loading” is displayed), never eject
the floppy disk or turn
the power off.
• “Not Enough Memory!!”
may appear on the display, if a problem occurs that prevents the
data from being loaded
(the capacity of the
PSR-730/630 [RAM] is
exceeded, something
is wrong with the
floppy disk, or the data
from the disk is corrupted, etc.).

Disk Copy
You can copy the entire data saved on a floppy disk onto another one using the disk
copy feature. It’s a good idea to use disk copy to create backup disks of your important
data.

the Disk to Copy From (Source Disk) into the Disk
1 Insert
Drive
Insert the disk that you want to copy from (source disk) into the disk drive.

2 Select a Disk Copy Function
Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the Disk function so that the triangular
indicator in the display appears next to “DISK” to the left of the display.
Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Disk Copy? YES” appears on
the display.
SUB MENU

Disk Cop y?

72

Gra nd PiYES

• If the DISK menu is
selected when there
is no floppy disk inserted into the disk
drive, “- - -” will be
displayed at the top of
the display, and disk
operations won’t be
possible.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Disk Operations

3 Press the [+] (YES) Button

Make sure that the disk you wish to copy from (source disk) is inserted in the disk
drive, then press the [+] (YES) button. “Now Reading” will appear on the display.

Now Read ing...

nd PiYES

• While data is copying
(“Now Copying” or
“Now Reading” is displayed), never eject
the floppy disk or turn
the power off.

The contents of the disk will be copied to the PSR-730/630, and when reading is
finished, “Insert Copy Disk” will be displayed.

Insert C opy Dis kd PiYES

• If you want to cancel
the Disk Copy function in this step, press
the [–] (NO) button to
cancel the operation,
returning to “Disk
Copy? YES” display.

4 Insert the Destination Disk into the Floppy Drive
Insert the destination disk for the copy operation into the disk drive. “Now
Copying” will appear on the display.

Now Copy ing...

nd PiYES

Data will be copied from the PSR-730/630 to the destination disk, and when
copying is finished, the display will return to the “Disk Copy? YES”.
If the quantity of data is large, it may be necessary for the data to be copied in parts.
In such a case, “Insert Source Disk” will appear again on the display.

Insert S ource D iskPiYES
Eject the copy (destination) disk and insert the source disk. Follow the messages on
the display and repeat to change the disks. The number of times you repeat the disk
changes depend on the size of the data to be copied. Once all the data has been copied,
the display will return to the “Disk Copy? YES” .

• The disk type of both
source disk and destination disk must be
the same (2DD or
2HD). If the source
disk is 2HD type, use
2HD blank disk for the
destination. If you insert a wrong type,
“Disk Media Type Error!!” will be shown on
the display.
• If you insert a wrong
disk, different from the
source or destination
disk, during the disk
copy operation, “Disk
Type Error!!” will be
shown on the display.

Song Copy
The songs recorded on a floppy disk can be copied in file units to another location
on the same disk.

1 Insert the Floppy Disk into the Disk Drive
Insert the disk with the songs you want to copy into the disk drive.

73

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Disk Operations

2 Select a Song Copy Function

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the Disk function so that the triangular
indicator in the display appears next to “DISK” to the left of the display.
Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Song Copy? YES” appears on
the display.
SUB MENU

Song Cop y?

Gra nd PiYES

• If the DISK menu is
selected when there
is no floppy disk inserted into the disk
drive, “- - -” will be
displayed at the top of
the display, and disk
operations won’t be
possible.

3 Select the (Source) Song File to Be Copied
Press the [+] (YES) button, and the file select screen “File Name:.....” will appear
on the display.

File Nam e: SONG _001
Use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select the song file you wish to copy.

4 Confirm the Name of the (Destination) Song File to Copy
Use the SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Copy File....” appears on the display,
showing the name that will be given to the new song file being made.

Copy Fil e: SONG _002
To overwrite an already recorded song, use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial
to select the file you want to overwrite.
Use the SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Rename:.....” appears on the display, and
you can change the name of the file (8 characters before the extension).

Rename:

• When the floppy
disk’s write-protect
tab is set to ON (see
page 64) or the disk is
a “purposely copyprotected” disk, the
display shows “Disk
Write Protected!!” indicating that the Song
Copy function is not
possible.

COPY _002YES

5 Execute the Copy Operation
After changing the file name, or when you don’t want to change the name, use the
SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Execute: NO/YES” appears on the display.

Execute? isk?

NO/YES

Press the [+] (YES) button and the save operation will begin. While it is in progress,
“Now Copying...” will appear at the top of the display.
When the copy operation is finished, the sub menu will return to “Song Copy?
YES.”

74

• While the song is
copying (“Now Copying” is displayed),
never eject the floppy
disk or turn the power
off.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Disk Operations

Delete File
You can delete saved data (User Songs, User Styles, User Pads, or Registration
Memory) from the floppy disk in file units.

1 Insert the Floppy Disk into the Disk Drive
Insert the disk with the files you want to delete into the disk drive.

2 Select a Delete File Function
Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the Disk function so that the triangular
indicator in the display appears next to “DISK” to the left of the display.
Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Delete File? YES” appears on
the display.
SUB MENU

Delete F ile?

nd PiYES

• If the DISK menu is
selected when there
is no floppy disk inserted into the disk
drive, “- - -” will be
displayed at the top of
the display, and disk
operations won’t be
possible.

3 Select the File to Be Deleted
Press the [+] (YES) button, and the file select screen “File Name:.....” will appear
on the display.

File Nam e: UF_0 0001.USR
Use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select the file you wish to delete.

• When the floppy disk’s
write-protect tab is set
to ON (see page 64) or
the disk is a “purposely
copy-protected” disk,
the display shows
“Disk Write Protected!!” indicating that
the Delete File function
is not possible.

4 Execute the Delete Operation
Press the SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Execute: NO/YES” appears on the
display.

Execute? isk?

NO/YES

• While the file is being
deleted (“Now Deleting” is displayed),
never eject the floppy
disk or turn the power
off.

Press the [+] (YES) button and the delete operation will begin. While it is in
progress, “Now Deleting...” will appear at the top of the display.

Now Dele ting... _002
When the delete operation is finished, the sub menu will return to “Delete File?
YES.”

75

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
Song Playback
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
You can playback a wonderful variety of songs on the PSR-730/630, including the preset
demo songs, the songs on the included Sample Disk, the User Songs you record on a floppy
disk and the songs on commercially available XG/GM song collection disks. Except for the
preset demo songs, a floppy disk must be inserted in the disk drive to playback a song.

Song Playback Procedure

1 Select the Song Menu
Press the [SONG] button to select the SONG menu (the triangular indicator will
appear next to “SONG” to the right of the display). The name and number of the
currently selected song will appear on the left of the top line of the display, and the
PSR-730/630 will switch to Song Mode, lighting the SONG icon on the display.

Trumpet

001
STYLE
SONG

116
TEMPO

A

100

000

DISK

t

TRANSPOSE

B

ONE TOUCH
SETTING

REPEAT

1

ACMP/SONG
VOLUME

2

3

4

FREEZE

REGISTRATION MEMORY

• Entering the Song
Mode automatically
selects the following
settings: Auto Accompaniment Off, Synchro Start Off, Synchro Stop Off, and
Registration Memory
Freeze On. These
settings cannot be altered in Song Mode.

SONG

SONG

When playing back a song recorded on a floppy disk, insert the disk into the disk
drive.

PSR-730X G

001
STYLE
SONG

DISK

116
TEMPO

000
TRANSPOSE

A

100

B

ONE T
SET

REPEAT

1

ACMP/SONG
VOLUME

2

3

4

REGISTRATION ME

Inserting the disk will cause the PSR-730/630 to automatically change to the
“SONG” menu, and the name and number of the currently selected song will appear
on the left of the top line of the display. The PSR-730/630 will switch to Song Mode,
lighting the SONG icon on the display, and the (floppy disk icon) will be shown.
DISK

2 Enter the Song Number
Use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–[0] number buttons, or the Data Dial to select the
song to be played back. The SONG button can also be pushed to increment the song
number, and holding it down will cause the number to increment continuously.

Always

002
STYLE
SONG

76

DISK

116
TEMPO

000
TRANSPOSE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

– / NO

0

+ / YES

d
A

100
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME

B

ONE TOUCH
SETTING

REPEAT

1

2

3

4

FREEZE

REGISTRATION MEMORY

• Inserting the disk containing no song data
won’t automatically
select the “SONG”
menu.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Song Playback

The songs will be displayed in sequence, as follows:

Demo Song (001) m Disk Song (001) m Demo Song (001)....

● Selecting a Disk Song Quickly
When selecting a Demo Song, hold the [3] button down until the icon lights, then
enter the Disk Song number using the [1]–[0] number buttons.
DISK

Example) Selecting Disk Song number 2
Press [3] and hold until the DISK icon lights
Press [2]

Always

002
STYLE
SONG

DISK

116
TEMPO

000
TRANSPOSE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

– / NO

0

+ / YES

d
A

100
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME

B

ONE TOUCH
SETTING

REPEAT

1

2

3

4

FREEZE

REGISTRATION MEMORY

• Song data of a certain
commercially available song disk may
use the voices which
are not built in the
PSR-730/630. In this
case nothing will be
shown on the voice
number display of the
appropriate track.

3 Select Play Mode
Press the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Play Mode” appears on the
display. On the right of the top line of the display, the current play mode will be
displayed. Use the [–] and [+] buttons, or the Data Dial to select the play mode for
playback.

Play Mod e:

• Selecting “All” here
cancels the Next song
setting (see page 82).

Sin gle

Single............... Play through the selected song, then stop.
All ...................... Continue playback through all the songs on the floppy disk. If there
is no floppy disk inserted in the drive, this setting will be ignored.

4 Start/Stop the Song
Press the [START/STOP] button, and start playback of the song. To stop playback
part way through the song, press the [START/STOP] button one more time.

START / STOP

77

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Song Playback

■ Song Volume Control

The volume of song playback can be adjusted for the best balance in relation to notes
from the keyboard. While in Song Mode (the SONG icon is lit) press the ACMP/
SONG VOLUME [▲] and [▼] buttons. When either button is pressed the current song
volume setting will appear on the top line of the display for a few seconds. The song
volume is also shown on the display when in the Song Mode (the SONG icon is lit).

SongVolu me

ACMP / SONG
VOLUME

001
STYLE
SONG

116

A

100

TEMPO

000

DISK

TRANSPOSE

100

B

ONE TOUCH
SETTING

REPEAT

ACMP/SONG
VOLUME

1

2

3

4

FREEZE

REGISTRATION MEMORY

Press the ACMP/SONG VOLUME [▲] or [▼] buttons to button to decrease or
increase the volume within a range of 0-127. Press briefly to single step, or hold for
continuous decrementing/incrementing.

• While the song volume setting appears
on the top line of the
display the [–] and [+]
buttons, number buttons, or data dial can
also be used to set
the song volume.

■ Play from a Specified Measure
Press the [SONG] button to select the SONG menu (the triangular indicator will
appear next to “SONG” to the right of the display). Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼]
buttons to select the “Measure” parameter in the display. The current measure number
will appear to the right of “Measure” on the top line of the display (the current measure
number is also continuously displayed next to “MEASURE” in the display).

Measure:

001
STYLE
SONG

DISK

116
TEMPO

001
A

100

000

ONE TOUCH
SETTING

REPEAT

ACMP/SONG
VOLUME

TRANSPOSE

B

1

2

3

4

001
MEASURE

FREEZE

REGISTRATION MEMORY

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–[0] number buttons, or the Data Dial to specify the
measure from which to begin playback, then press the [START/STOP] button to start
from that measure.

Measure:

001
STYLE
SONG

78

DISK

116
TEMPO

000
TRANSPOSE

009
A

100
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME

B

ONE TOUCH
SETTING

REPEAT

1

2

3

4

FREEZE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

– / NO

0

+ / YES

009
MEASURE

REGISTRATION MEMORY

• You can move the
measure number for
playback back and
forth even during the
song playback.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Song Playback

Minus-one Practice
You can turn-off (mute) any of the parts of a song while it is playing, then practice
playing that part yourself along with the other tracks of the song. This is called Minusone playback.
Choose any one of the demo or sample disk songs, press one of the TRACK buttons
1-16 below the display, muting the part you want to play, and then try playing yourself.

1 Selecting the Song for Minus-one Playback
To select the song, see (page 76).

2 Select the track for Minus-one playback
Press one of the TRACK buttons below the display, and its number 1 – 16 will
disappear from the display. The track you selected will go OFF and the part will be
muted.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

213 213 337 391 259 434 468 442 471 219 252 213 213 213 213 213
RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY
1
2
3
4
1
2

ACMP

VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

SONG TRACK

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

R2

L

13

DUAL

14

15

R1

16

3 Select the R1 Voice
When you are going to play in place of the muted part, set the voice for the part you
muted (listed under the TRACK Number 1 – 16 ) as the R1 voice.
To select the R1 voice, see page (page 17).

4 START/STOP Minus-one Playback
Just like starting regular song playback, press the [START/STOP] button to start
and stop Minus-one playback. You can play the muted part yourself.
START / STOP

Pressing one of the TRACK buttons corresponding to the muted parts during song
playback turns on that track/part again.

79

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Song Playback

Repeat Play
This function allows you to specify any section of a Demo or Sample disk song for
continuous repeat playback.

1 Select the A-B Repeat Parameter
While the SONG menu is selected, but no recording is in progress, use the SUB
MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “A-B Repeat” parameter in the display. The
MAIN/AUTO FILL [A] and [B] button indicators will flash.
MAIN / AUTO FILL

A-B Repe at

A

B

A

B

2 Start Playback
Press the [START/STOP] button to start song playback.
START / STOP

3 Specify the Repeat “A” and “B” Points
While the song is playing, press the MAIN/AUTO FILL [A] button at the beginning
of the section to be repeated (the [A] button indicator will light continuously, and the
“A” repeat icon will appear in the display), then press the MAIN/AUTO FILL [B]
button at the end of the section to be repeated (the [B] button indicator will light
continuously, and the “B” repeat icon will appear in the display). Repeat playback will
begin automatically from the A point as soon as the B point has been specified, and
will continue until either the MAIN/AUTO FILL [A] button is pressed again to cancel
the repeat function, or until song playback is stopped.
MAIN / AUTO FILL
A

B

A

B

A

B

ONE TOUCH
SETTING

REPEAT

1

2

3

4

MAIN / AUTO FILL
B

A

B

A

B

ONE TOUCH
SETTING

REPEAT

1

2

3

4

FREEZE

REGISTRATION MEMORY

80

• If the MAIN/AUTO
FILL [B] button is
pressed during repeat
playback, the previously specified “B”
point will be cancelled
and a new “B” point
can be specified as
required.

FREEZE

REGISTRATION MEMORY

A

• If only the “A” repeat
point is specified, repeat playback will occur between the “A”
point and the end of
the song.

• Repeat playback will
continue even if a different menu is selected during repeat
playback.
• Repeat playback will
be cancelled if a different SONG number
selected or the record
mode is engaged.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Song Playback

Song Repeat
The Song Repeat feature is handy when you want to repeat playback of a particular
song.

1 Select a Song Number
To select the song, see (page 76).

2 Turn on the Song Repeat
After making sure that the “SONG” menu is selected, use the SUB MENU [▲] and
[▼] buttons so that “SongRepeat” appears on the display. The current SongRepeat
setting will be shown on the top line of the display.

SongRepe at: Off
Use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to set the on/off state to the Song Repeat
function.

SongRepe at: On

3 Start Playback
Playback will begin as soon as the [START/STOP] button is pressed. Until you
press the [START/STOP] button once again, Song Repeat playback will continue.

START / STOP

• If the Song Repeat
feature is ON, the
song will replay repeatedly regardless of
whether the play
mode is set for Single
or All.
• Doing any of the following operations will
automatically cause
the song repeat function to turn off.
• Changing the song
number.
• Specifying the Next
Song function (page
82).
• Setting the Play
Mode to “All” (page
77).

81

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Song Playback

Next Song
The Next Song feature is handy when the next song you want to play isn’t the one
with the next song number.

1 Select the first song you want to play
To select the song, see (page 76).

2 Select the next song
After making sure that the “SONG” menu is selected, use the SUB MENU [▲] and
[▼] buttons so that “NextSong” appears on the display. The current NextSong setting
will be shown on the top line of the display.

NextSong :01 Tru mpet

• When “All” is selected
in the Play mode (see
page 77), setting the
Next song will automatically change the
Play mode from “All”
to “Single”

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–[0] number buttons, or the Data Dial to select the
next song.

NextSong :04 E.P iano

3 Start Playback
Playback will begin as soon as the [START/STOP] button is pressed. When the first
song is finished, playback will continue with the next song.
If the [START/STOP] button is pressed once again, or when the next song finishes,
playback will automatically stop.
START / STOP

• If the Song Repeat
feature is ON, the
next song will play after the first song regardless of whether
the play mode is set
for Single or All.
• While the selected
next song is playing,
the song to play after
it finishes can be selected in the same
way using the Next
Song function.
• If the first song and
the next song are the
same, the Next Song
feature won’t work.
• Doing any of the following operations will
automatically cause
the song repeat function to turn off.
• Changing the song
number.
• Turning on the Song
Repeat function
(page 81).
• Setting the Play
Mode to “All” (page
77).

82

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
Song Recording
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
You can record your own music performance on a floppy disk as a user song.

• User Songs are recorded on floppy disks. They can’t be recorded unless a floppy disk is inserted into the disk drive.
• The Shortcut functions are not available when one of the Record modes is engaged.

● Quick Recording
You can easily record four tracks from the PSR-730/630 keyboard together with on
track of Auto Accompaniment.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

213 213 337 391 259 434 468 442 001 124 133 064 204 084 109 001
RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY
1
2
3
4
1
2

ACMP

VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

DUAL

• The quick recording
method is different
from the multi recording method but for
both of them, the recorded data is recorded on tracks 1–
16.

● Multi Recording
In Multi Recording, the different parts of the some are divided among tracks 1–16,
with keyboard playing on tracks 1–5, harmony notes on tracks 6–8, and auto
accompaniment (RHYTHM1-PHRASE2) on tracks 9–16. This lets you fine tune
the recording settings for each track, then carefully edit.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

001 213 337 391 259 434 468 442 471 216 252 213 213 213 213 213
RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY
1
2
3
4
1
2

ACMP

VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

DUAL

After finishing your recording of a user song, you can play it back in the same way
as one of the preset demo songs.

The data you can record in user songs using Quick Recording or Multi Recording are
as follows:
The accompaniment tracks record the following and data:
• Accompaniment style number*
• Accompaniment track changes*
(8 tracks: track on/off, voice number, volume, pan,
reverb depth, chorus depth)
• Section changes and their timing

• Chord changes and their timing.
• Accompaniment volume
• Reverb type.
• Chorus type.
• Tempo and time signature*

The keyboard (R1/R2/L) tracks record the following and data:
• Note on/off (key press and release)
• Velocity (strength of key press)
• R1/R2/L voice number, volume, octave*, pan, reverb
depth, chorus depth, DSP depth.
• Reverb on/off and type
• Chorus on/off and type
• DSP (including variation) on/off and type

• Multi effect on/off, type and settings (PSR-730)
• Harmony on/off, type
• Sustain pedal on/off
• Pitch bend, pitch bend range.
• Tempo

The maximum amount of song memory is 65,000 notes for 2DD disks and 130,000 notes for 2HD disks.
* Recorded only at the beginning of a song; changes cannot be made during recording.

• Being able to record
note on/off and velocity
means being able to
record forte or piano,
crescendo or diminuendo, and other subtle
elements of expression
from the keyboard as
you play them.
• Note ON (key press),
note OFF (key release),
and velocity (strength of
key press) are MIDI
data events (playing
information)(page 119).
• Be careful to avoid the
song data loss that will
occur during recording
if the power is turned
off, the AC adaptor is
unplugged from the outlet, or the batteries lose
power.

83

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Song Recording

Quick Recording Procedure
With quick recording, you can use 5 tracks for recording each song.
● ACMP track ....................... Used to record auto accompaniment notes (such
as chord change and section change data).
● MELODY 1–4 track ......... Used to record keyboard melody notes.

1 Insert Floppy Disk and Change to Record Mode
Insert the floppy disk you will use to record the user song into the floppy disk
drive.

Press the [RECORD] button to engage the Record Ready Mode. The [RECORD]
button indicator will light, and the SONG, STYLE, and MULTI PAD [1] … [4]
icons will flash, indicating that you must select one of the corresponding record
modes.

and Piano

001

001
RECORD

BEAT

1

2

3

VOICE

4

MULTI PAD

dim 6

m M 7aug sus 4

FINGERING

11

119
513

12

GROOVE & DYNAMICS

13

14

15

16

STYLE

252 213 213 213 213 213
2

MELODY MELODY
3
4

ACMP

VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

DUAL

SONG

The SONG icon will be lit on the display indicating that the Song mode is
engaged and the User song number will be shown above the icon.

8Beat Po p1

001
DISK

SONG

84

Gra nd Piano

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
2 Select the SONG Record Mode

Press the [SONG] button to select the SONG record mode. The SONG menu
icon will light.
The beat indicator dots will flash at the currently set tempo, indicating that
the record ready (Synchro Start) mode is engaged.
The track bars for MELODY 1–4 and ACMP tracks will flash at the bottom
of the display (Record Ready Mode).

• In Song Record Ready Mode,
the track numbers (9-13) for
corresponding to tracks where
data is already recorded will
light.
• If the [RECORD] button is
pressed, the lowest-numbered
user song which does not contain any recorded data will automatically be selected.
• The following panel setting
changes will occur when the
record ready mode is engaged:
• The measure number will be reset to “1”.
• If the Metronome function is on
(page 116), the metronome will
sound at the current tempo.
• The Registration Memory Freeze
function will be turned on (it
cannot be turned off while the
record mode is engaged).
• The SYNCHRO STOP function
wil be turned off.

3 If Necessary, Select a User Song Number
When you want to change the user song number selected in step two, use the
[–] and [+] buttons, [1]–[0] number buttons, or Data Dial to change it as
required.

4 Select the Track to be Recorded
● When recording a melody track.
Use the TRACK buttons to select a MELODY 1–4 track to record.
For example, if you press the track button below the MELODY 1 track, the
MELODY 1 track bar will stop flashing, and the track bars for the other tracks
will go out. This shows that you have selected the MELODY 1 track as the
track for recording.

85

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Song Recording

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

468 442 471 201 252 213 213 084 109 001
PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY
1
2
3
4
1
2

ACMP

VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

SONG TRACK

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

DUAL

R2

L

• If you start recording
without selecting a specific track while the
panel AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT button is
ON, the MELODY 1 and
ACMP tracks will automatically be selected for
recording.

14

R1

15

16

● Recording the ACMP track
If you press the TRACK button below the ACMP track, the ACMP track bar will
light and the ACMP track will be selected as the recording track. (If you do this
when AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT is off, AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT will
automatically be turned on.)
7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

• The ACMP track and
one MELODY track can
be recorded together at
the same time.
• If the ACMP track is
turned off, AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT on the
panel will also be turned
off.

16

468 442 471 201 252 213 213 084 109 001
PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY
1
2
3
4
1
2

ACMP

VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

SONG TRACK

7

8

9

10

11

R2

L

12

13

14

• If AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT is turned on, the
ACMP track will be automatically selected for recording.

DUAL

15

R1

• AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT cannot be turned
on or off during recording.

16

5 Record
Recording will begin as soon as you play a note on the keyboard or press the
[START/STOP] button, and the BEAT indicator dots will begin to indicate the
current beat as in the Auto Accompaniment mode. The MEASURE parameter will
also show the current measure number during recording.
START / STOP

009
MEASURE

BEAT

1

2

3

4

MULTI PAD

◆ Rehearsal Mode
If the SYNC START button is pressed while in Record Ready Mode, it will be
canceled (the beat indicator dots will go out) and the PSR-730/630 will enter
Rehearsal Mode. In this mode, you can try playing your song before actually
recording it. Pressing the SYNC START button will return to Record Ready Mode.

86

SYNC

NIMENT

STOP

START

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Song Recording

• Before actually starting to record you can try playing the
PSR-730/630 the way it is set up by using the “Rehearsal
Mode”: press the [SYNC START] button to temporarily disengage the record ready mode, rehearse as necessary, then
press the [SYNC START] button again to return to the record
ready mode.

• Recording is carried out in 1-measure increments. If you stop
recording in the middle of a measure, rests will automatically
be recorded until the end of that measure.

• Whenever you record using a SONG, any previously recorded material in the same track will be erased.

• If you start recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button,
nothing will be recording on a MELODY track until you begin
playing on the keyboard. Only rhythm accompaniment will be
recorded on the ACCOMPANIMENT track until you play a
chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard.

• If the SONG memory becomes full while recording, “Disk
FULL!!” will appear on the display and recording will stop (the
“Rehearsal Mode” will be engaged).

• During recording you can use the TRACK buttons to turn
playback of previously-recorded MELODY tracks or the ACCOMPANIMENT track on or off as required.

6 Stop Recording
Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button. If you press the [ENDING]
button while recording the ACCOMPANIMENT track, recording will stop automatically after the ending section has finished. When recording is stopped the MEASURE
number on the display will return to “1” and the record-ready mode will be engaged.
START / STOP

• You can also press
the [SYNC START]
button to stop recording and return to the
record ready mode.

ENDING

7 Record Additional Tracks as Required
By repeating steps 4 through 6, above, you can select and record additional tracks
as required.
● Recording from the Middle of the Song
It is possible to initiate recording from the middle of the song. If you want to change
the latter half of the song (track), select the Measure number from which you want
to record and start recording. When the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT is on, this
method is not available for the quick recording procedure.

• While the record
ready mode is engaged you can press
the [VOICE] button to
go to the VOICE
menu and change the
R1 voice as required.
The R2 voice, however, cannot be
changed (If the Voice
Set function is on —
page 116 — the R2
voice will automatically be changed
when an R1 panel
voice is selected).
The record-ready
mode must be disengaged in order to
change the R2 voice
and other settings.
• You can rerecord a
part of an already recorded track if desired, using the Punch
In/Punch Out feature
(page 92)

8 Exit From the Record Mode
When you’re finished recording a song, press the [RECORD] button so that its
indicator goes out, to exit from the record mode. The recorded user song can now be
played back in the same way as the demonstration songs.
RECORD

• You can edit the data
recorded in user
songs (page 96).
• You can edit the recorded accompaniment data recorded
on accompaniment
tracks (page 96).

87

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Song Recording

Multi Recording Procedure
With Multi Recording, you can record up to 16 tracks for a single song.
The default settings for the tracks are as follows:
Track 1 ............... For recording keyboard playing (R1 part).
Track 2 ............... For recording keyboard playing (R2 part).
Track 3 ............... For recording keyboard playing (L part).
Tracks 4,5 ......... For recording keyboard playing (R1 part).
Tracks 6–8 ........ For recording harmony notes (Harmony type 7–16).
Tracks 9–16 ...... For recording Auto Accompaniment notes (RHYTHM 1–
PHRASE 2)

1 Engage the Song Record Mode and Select the User Song
In the same way as steps 1–3 for Quick Recording, engage the Song Recording
Mode and select the user song number.

• Even though three tracks,
track 1, 4 and 5, are prepared for R1 part as the
default, the R1 part performance cannot be recorded to the multiple
tracks at the same time. In
such cases, the last track
you select is designated
for the R1 part recording.

• When you insert an commercially available song
disk and try to record and
overwrite one of the song
files which is not writeprotected, “Convert NO/
YES” will appear and the
recording will not be initiated. If you select “YES”
to execute recording,
“Don’t remove the disk”
appears and the PSR730/630 starts converting
the selected song’s format
to the PortaTone’s. After
completing the conversion, Record-ready mode
is engaged to indicate recording becomes possible.

2 Select the Record Method
Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Quick Record” or “Multi
Record” (record method selection screen) appears on the display.

Multi Re cord
Use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select Multi Record as the record
method.

3 Select the Track and Part to Record
Select the track and the part to be recorded on that track.. Default parts are
already set for recording, but you can change them as needed.
Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Part Select” (record part
selection screen) appears on the display.

Part Sel ect:Voi ce R1
88

• If you begin recording
without selecting the
record method, Quick
Record Mode will automatically be selected.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Song Recording

Press the TRACK button to select one of the tracks 1–16 for recording. For
example, if you press the Track button below the track 1, the track 1 bar will light,
showing that the track 1 is selected for recording. If you press the same TRACK button
once again, the track bar will go out and that track will not be recorded.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

001 213 337 391 259 434 468 442 471 216 252 213 213 213 213 213
RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY
1
2
3
4
1
2

ACMP

VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

SONG TRACK

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

DUAL

R2

L

12

13

14

15

R1

16

At this time, the part to be recorded for that track will be shown at the top of the
display. As needed, use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to change the part.
Track
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Default Part
R1
R2
L
R1
R1
Harmony 1
Harmony 2
Harmony 3
ACMP 1ch (RHYTHM2)
ACMP 2ch (RHYTHM1)
ACMP 3ch (BASS)
ACMP 4ch (CHORD1)
ACMP 5ch (CHORD2)
ACMP 6ch (PAD)
ACMP 7ch (PHRASE1)
ACMP 8ch (PHRASE2)

Other Parts that Can Be Set
R2, L
R1,L
R1, R2
R2, L
R2, L
R1, R2, L
R1, R2, L
R1, R2, L
R1, R2, L
—
R1, R2, L
R1, R2, L
R1, R2, L
R1, R2, L
R1, R2, L
R1, R2, L

When recording accompaniment tracks (9–16), first turn Auto Accompaniment on
and then press the TRACK buttons numbered 9–16 to select 9–16 tracks for recording.
Pressing any of the TRACK buttons under the tracks will let you select any tracks
(such as RHYTHM 1 track and BASS track only) for recording.
7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

468 442 471 216 252 213 213 213 213 213
ACCOMPANIMENT
ON / OFF

PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY
1
2
3
4
1
2

ACMP

VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

SONG TRACK

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

DUAL

R2

L

14

• If the part selected for
a track is the same
one as that being recorded, that track
cannot be set for recording at the same
time. Only one track
can be selected, with
the last chosen having priority.

15

• Auto Accompaniment
cannot be turned on
or off once recording
has started.

R1

16

89

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Song Recording

The harmony notes (type 7–16) can be recorded to the tracks 6–8. To record
harmony notes, first turn Harmony on and then press the TRACK buttons numbered
6–8 to select 6–8 tracks for recording.
1

HARMONY

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

001 213 337 391 259 434 468 442 471 216 252 213 213 213 213 213
RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY
1
2
3
4
1
2

ACMP

VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

SONG TRACK

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

DUAL

R2

L

R1

ACCOMPANIMENT
ON / OFF

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

4 Start/Stop Recording
Record the track(s) in the same way as steps 5-7 for Quick Recording.
Since the recorded accompaniment data is recorded on each accompaniment
track, it can be edited using the Song Edit function (page 97).

■ About the Recording with the Digital Effects Applied
Only one type of each of the Digital Effects, Reverb, Chorus, DSP and Multi Effect
(PSR-730) can be set at one time. Be aware of the following facts, especially when
recording a song with different effects applied to the different tracks.

A

Reverb type and Chorus type effects can be set and recorded independently for
each of the 16 tracks. However, only the latest settings made (one each) will be
effective if several effects are used in a song (the latest setting priority).
[EX.] While the panel REVERB button is turned on:
1. Select the Hall 1 (Reverb) for the Accompaniment track, and record the Accompaniment track for ten measures from the beginning.
2. Start recording the keyboard (R1) track with the Hall 1 (Reverb) selected from the
beginning and then change the effect type to Room 1 (Reverb) respectively from
the fifth measure through the end.

When you play back the song recorded as above, the first four measures will be
played back with the Hall 1 applied to both the Accompaniment track and
keyboard (R1) track, and the remaining six measures, from fifth through the end,
with the Room 1 applied to both tracks. The effect types set for the Accompaniment track are replaced with the latest settings. Only the Depth for each track
remains the same.

90

• You can also use Rehearsal Mode to practice before recording
when doing Multi Recording.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Song Recording

B

DSP type effects can be set and recorded for R1/R2/L part(s) when used as System
effect and for R1 part when used as Insertion effect. They can’t be recorded for the
track used as the Accompaniment and/or Harmony part. During playback, only the
latest setting will be effective if several types are used for the tracks in a song (the
latest setting priority).
[EX.]

1. Turn on the panel DSP button, and start recording on the track 1 with the Distortion
(DSP type: No.42 Dist.Hard) selected for ten measures from the beginning.
2. Turn off the panel DSP button, and start recording on the track 2 without any effect
from the beginning. Then turn on the panel DSP button again at the fifth measure,
and continue recording to the end with the Rotary Speaker (DSP type: No.28 Rotary
SP.1) selected.

When you play back the song recorded with the above condition, the first four
measures will be played back with the Distortion applied only to track 1, and the
remaining six measures, from the fifth through the end, with the Rotary Speaker
applied only to track 2. The DSP type set for track 1 is replaced by the one set for
the track 2.

C

(PSR-730)
Multi effects can be set and recorded for R1/R2/L part(s). They can’t be recorded
for the track used as the Accompaniment and/or Harmony part. During playback,
only the latest setting will be effective if several types are used for the tracks in a
song (the latest setting priority).
[EX.] Two Multi Effect types set in series for R1
1. Multi Effect is turned on and 10 measures are recorded for R1 on track 1.
2. Recording is started for R1 on track 2 with Multi effect off, and then it is turned on
at the fifth measure.

When you play back the song recorded with the above conditions, the first four
measures will be played back with the Multi Effect applied only to track 1, and the
remaining six measures, from the fifth through the end, with Multi Effect applied
only to track 2.

91

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Song Recording

Punch In/Punch Out

The data recorded on tracks for keyboard playing (R1/R2/L) can be re-recorded in
parts with the Punch In/Punch Out feature.

● Before re-recording
1

2

3

4

5

6

Recording start
(Punch In)

7

8

Recording stop
(Punch Out)

● After Re-recording
1

2

Previously
played data

3

4

5

6

7

8

Previously played
data

Newly played data

1 In the Record Ready Mode (page 88) for the track you will re-record or in the
Rehearsal Mode, use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Punch In:Off”
appears on the display.

Punch In :

2 Use the SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Punch Out:Off” appears on the display.
5

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–[0] number buttons, or the Data Dial to enter the
measure number for using the Punch Out feature.

3 Start and Stop Recording
Start recording as usual. Even though you start playing from the beginning, only the
data played within the Punch In/Punch Out range will be re-recorded.

92

• If you select the
tracks set as the Accompaniment or Harmony, “Punch In: - - -”
or “Punch Out: - - -”
appears on the display and Punch In/
Punch Out recording
is not accessible.

3

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–[0] number buttons, or the Data Dial to enter the
measure number for using the Punch In feature.

Punch Ou t:

• Punch In/Punch Out
recording is available
only when Multi
record mode is engaged. When in the
Quick record-ready
mode, “Punch In: - - -”
or “Punch Out: - - -”
appears on the display and Punch In/
Punch Out recording
is not accessible.

• You can use Punch
In/Punch Out to rerecord multiple tracks
at the same time.
• Punch In/Punch Out
cannot be used for
songs that have no
data recorded in
them. “Punch In: - - -”
will be shown on the
display.

• The Punch Out measure number cannot
be set lower than the
Punch In measure
number.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Song Recording

Quantize

With the Quantize feature, the timing of data recorded in a user songs can be
adjusted.

1 In the Record Ready Mode for the track you want to quantize (page 88) or in the
Rehearsal Mode, use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Quantize: YES”
appears on the display.

Quantize ?

YES

• Quantize setting is
available only when
Multi record-ready
mode is engaged.
When in the Quick
record-ready mode,
“Quantize? - - -” appears on the display
and Quantize setting
is not accessible.

2 Press the [+] YES button and “Quantize” will be displayed, with the value at the
upper right of the display.

Quantize :

32

2

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, or the Data Dial to select the Quantize value (4, 6, 8,
12, 16, 24, 32).
Set the Quantize value to correspond to the smallest notes in the track you are
working with. For example, if the data was recorded with quarter notes and eighth
notes, use 1/8 for the quantize value. If the quantize function is applied in this case
with the value set to 1/4, the eighth notes would be moved on top of the quarter notes.
Quantize Value

Note

4

Quarter note

6

Quarter note triplet

8

Eighth note

12

Eighth note triplet

16

Sixteenth note

24

Sixteenth note triplet

32

Thirty-second note

One measure of 8th notes before quantization

After quantization

3 After making the setting in step 2, use the SUB MENU [▼] button so that “Execute?
No/Yes” appears on the display.

Execute? :

1/3

NO/YES

Pressing the [+] YES button to execute the quantize function.
Press the [–] (NO) button, and the quantize function won’t execute. The display will
return to “Quantize?”.

4 When Quantize is finished, the display will return to “Quantize? YES”

93

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Song Recording

Naming User Songs

You can give your own name (8 characters or less) to user songs.
In the Record Ready Mode (pages 84, 88) for the song you want to name, or in the
Rehearsal Mode, use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Song Name”
appears on the display. The current name for the song will be displayed at the upper
right of the display.

_
SON G _001

SongName

The method of setting the characters is the same as for Registration Naming (page
58).

_
LES SON01

SongName

Clearing Song Data
You can clear unneeded song data in two different ways: Clearing Selected Tracks
or Clearing an Entire Song. In either Quick Record or Multi Record Mode, this
operation is done in Record Ready Mode or in Rehearsal Mode.
● Clearing Selected Tracks
While the Song record ready or rehearsal mode is engaged use the SUB MENU [▲]
and [▼] buttons to select the “Track Clear?” function. The track bars for tracks which
contain data will flash, showing that those tracks can be cleared.

Track Cl ear?

YES

● Quick Record
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

001 213 337 391 259 434 468 442 001 016 252 213 219 213 213 213
RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY
1
2
3
4
1
2

ACMP

VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

DUAL

● Multi Record
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

001 213 337 391 259 434 468 442 471 216 252 213 213 213 213 213
RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY
1
2
3
4
1
2

ACMP

VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

• When in Quick
Record Mode, Clear
Selected Track will
clear data as follows:
• If the ACMP track is
cleared, data that
would be in tracks 916 in the Multi Record
mode will be cleared
at the same time.
• If Melody tracks that
were recorded with
Dual Voice are
cleared, tracks recorded with Multi
Record Mode R1/R2
parts will be cleared at
the same time.

• The tracks recorded
by Quick recording
can be cleared using
the Multi recording
Track Clear function,
and vice versa.

DUAL

• Demo song tracks
cannot be cleared.

94

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Song Recording

Use the TRACK buttons to select the track you want to clear. The track bar for the
track you selected will light steadily and the track bars for the other tracks will be
turned off.
● Quick Record
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

001 213 337 391 259 434 468 442 001 016 252 213 219 213 213 213
RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY
1
2
3
4
1
2

ACMP

VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

SONG TRACK

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

7

8

9

10

11

12

R2

L

13

DUAL

14

R1

15

16

● Multi Record
1

2

3

4

5

6

11

12

13

14

15

16

001 213 337 391 259 434 468 442 471 216 252 213 213 213 213 213
RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY
1
2
3
4
1
2

ACMP

VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

SONG TRACK

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

R2

L

13

DUAL

14

15

R1

16

Once the desired track has been selected, “Are You Sure?” will appear on the
display.

Are You

Sure?

NO/YES

Press the [+] (YES) button to actually clear the currently selected track.
While the track is being cleared, “Now Deleting” will appear in the top of the
display.

Now Dele ting...

NO/YES

• While the track is
being cleared, (“Now
Deleting” is displayed) never eject
the floppy disk or
turn off the power to
the PSR-730/630.

When track clear is finished, the display will return to “Track Clear?”
If you press the [–] (NO) button, track clear will not be executed and the display will
return to “Track Clear?”

95

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Song Recording

● Clearing an Entire Song

Use the song selection sub menu (pages 85, 88) to be sure that you have selected the
song that you want to clear.
While the SONG record-ready or rehearsal mode (page 87) is engaged use the SUB
MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “Song Clear? YES” function.

Song Cle ar?

NO/YES

Press the [+] (YES) button and “Are You Sure? NO/YES” will appear on the display.
Press the [+] (YES) button a second time to actually clear the currently selected user
song.

Are You

Sure?

NO/YES

While the song is being cleared, “Now Deleting” will appear at the top of the
display.
When the operation is finished, the display will show “Song Clear? - - -”
Press [–] (NO) if you want to abort the clear operation. The display will return to
“Song Clear? YES”

Song Edit
The data in user songs can be edited in a way similar to using the Revoice function
for Voices and Styles (page 110). The edited data can be written into the user song data.

1 While the SONG record-ready or rehearsal mode (page 87) is engaged use the SUB
MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “Song Edit? YES” function.

Song Edi t?

NO/YES

2 When the [+] YES button is pressed, the track bar will flash under the lowest
numbered track that has data in it. This shows that this is the track that is selected
for editing. On the top line of the display, the current voice parameter and value for
the track will be displayed.

Voice:00 1
1

2

3

4

5

6

Gra nd Piano
7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

001 213 337 391 259 434 468 442 471 216 252 213 213 213 213 213
RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY
1
2
3
4
1
2

ACMP

VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

96

DUAL

• While the track is
being cleared, (“Now
Deleting” is displayed) never eject
the floppy disk or
turn off power to the
PSR-730/630.

• Demo Songs cannot
be cleared.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Song Recording

3 Press the TRACK button to select the track you will edit. The track bar for the
selected track will light.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

001 213 337 391 259 434 468 442 471 216 252 213 213 213 213 213
RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY
1
2
3
4
1
2

ACMP

VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

SONG TRACK

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

R2

L

13

DUAL

14

15

R1

16

4 Use the SUB MENU [▼] button so that the voice parameter you wish to change
appears on the display. The parameter and value will appear at the top of the display.

Voice:00 1

Gra nd Piano

Volume:

127 nd Piano

Pan;

0

ReverbDe pth:

0 nd Piano

ChorusDe pth:

0 nd Piano

DSPDepth :

26 nd Piano

Octave:

0

nd Piano

• When in Quick
Record Mode, if both
R1 and R2 voices are
recorded on one
track, only the R1
voice can be edited.
• When in Quick
Record Mode, you
cannot edit the ACMP
track.
• If a track with no data
is selected, [- - -] will
appear at the top of
the display and you
won’t be able to edit.
• Each parameter can
be recorded for one
track (one each for a
track). The parameter
changes done in the
middle of the song will
be lost.

In the same way as for the revoice function (page 111), use the [–] and [+] buttons,
[1]–[0] number buttons, or the Data Dial to change the setting.
See page 110 for information about each value.

5 Repeat steps 3–4 as needed.
6 When editing is finished, press the SUB MENU [▲] button so that “Disk Save?
YES” is shown on the display. Press the [+] YES button and the song data will be
replaced.

Disk Sav e?

NO/YES

7 Exit the Record Mode and try playing the song.

97

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
Style Recording
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
The PSR-730/630 lets you record up to three original “user styles” which can be used for autoaccompaniment in the same way as the preset styles. The user styles are recorded as style
numbers 101, 102, 103, and 104, and each style can be recorded with the full complement
of 8 tracks (RHYTHM 1, RHYTHM 2, BASS, CHORD 1, CHORD 2, PAD, PHRASE 1,
PHRASE 2) and 5 sections (INTRO, MAIN A, MAIN B, ENDING, FILL).

• Material recorded on the STYLE tracks will be retained even after turning the power
off. See page 152 for the details.
• The recorded data will be lost if the power is turned off, the AC adaptor is unplugged,
or the batteries fail during recording.
• The REGISTRATION MEMORY cannot be recalled during style recording.
• The Shortcut functions are not available when one of the Record modes is engaged.

● The STYLE tracks record the following operations and data:
•
•
•
•

Note on/off.
Velocity.
Voice number (drum kit number).*
Pitch bend.

• Up to approximately
1,980 notes for a section
(totally ca. 5,940 notes)
can be recorded in the
PSR-730/630 STYLE
tracks.

Only one event of the item marked with * can be recorded for each track of the sections.

Style Recording Procedure

1 Select a Style To Begin With
Select the style from one of the 100 presets that is closest to the type of style
you want to create. You will use this style as a starting point for the user style you
will create.
Example 1) When you want to create a user style with 8
beats in 4/4 time, select style number 001 “8 Beat Pop.”

8Beat Po p1

001
Example 2) When you want to create a user style with 3/4 waltz
time, select user style 099 “Vien. Waltz.”

Vien. Wa ltz

099
98

• If none of the preset styles
is appropriate, select one
that has the same time signature and number of measures as the one you want
to create, then use the “All
Clear” function (page 105)
to clear all preset data before entering your own.
• If you select a blank user
style to begin with (101 …
104), the style will be in 4/4
time and all sections except
FILL will be 2 measures
long. FILL will be 1 measure long.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Style Recording

2 Engage the Record Ready Mode

Press the [RECORD] button to engage the record ready mode. The [RECORD]
button indicator will light, and the SONG, STYLE, and MULTI PAD [1] … [4]
icons will flash, indicating that you must select one of the corresponding record
modes.

and Piano

001

001
RECORD

BEAT

1

2

3

VOICE

4

MULTI PAD

dim 6

m M 7aug sus 4

FINGERING

11

119
513

12

GROOVE & DYNAMICS

13

14

15

STYLE

16

252 213 213 213 213 213
2

MELODY MELODY
3
4

ACMP

VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

SONG

DUAL

3 Select the Style Record Mode
Press the [STYLE] button to select the Style record mode. The STYLE menu
will automatically be selected and a user style number will appear on the top line
of the display. The beat indicator dots will flash at the currently set tempo,
indicating that the record ready (synchro start) mode is engaged. Also, the
indicators for the auto-accompaniment section buttons (INTRO, MAIN A, MAIN
B, and ENDING) will flash, indicating that a section and track must be selected
before recording can begin.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

15

16

219 219 340 322 324 434 468 442 471

213 213

RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

VOICE

VOICE

R2

R1

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE PHRASE MELODY
1
1
2

STYLE

DUAL

MAIN / AUTO FILL
INTRO

A

B

A

B

ENDING

STYLE

• The icons of tracks which
already contain data will
appear continuously
rather than flashing when
the style record mode is
selected.
• If the style record mode is
selected while a preset
style is selected, a user
style which does not contain any recorded data will
automatically be selected.
If all user styles already
contain data, however,
user style number 101
(user style number 1) will
be selected.
• If the style record mode is
engaged when a user
style has already been selected, that user style
number will be used for
recording.
• The following panel setting changes will occur
when the style record
mode is engaged:
• The measure number will
be reset to “1”.
• If the Metronome function
is on (page 116), the metronome will sound at the
current tempo.
• The Synchro Stop function
will be turned off.

99

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Style Recording

4 If Necessary, Select a User Style Number

If the desired user style is not already selected, use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–[0]
number buttons, or the Data Dial to select it.

5 Select a Section to Record
Press the [INTRO], MAIN [A]/[B], [ENDING], or [FILL] button to select a
section for recording.
To select the INTRO section
Press the INTRO button ....................... the INTRO lamp will light
To select the MAIN A section
Press the MAIN A button ...................... the MAIN A lamp will light
To select the MAIN B section
Press the MAIN B button ...................... the MAIN B lamp will light
To select the ENDING section
Press the ENDING button .................... the ENDING lamp will light
To select the FILL section
Press the MAIN A/B button twice ......... the MAIN A /B lamp will light

• Multiple sections cannot be recorded at the
same time.
• If you don’t specifically select a section,
the MAIN A section
will automatically be
selected for recording.
• Although the preset
FILL sections have 4
variations (refer to
page 27), user-style
FILL sections can
have only 1. When
using a preset style
as a basis for a user
style, the AA FILL
variation is used.

For example, press the [INTRO] button, lighting the INTRO indicator. The
indicators for the other sections will go out. This shows that the INTRO section has
been selected as the section for recording.
MAIN / AUTO FILL
INTRO

A

B

A

B

ENDING

At the bottom of the display, the RHYTHM1 track bar will appear (not flashing).
This shows that RHYTHM1 has been selected as the recording track.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

219 219 340 322 324 434 468 442 471
RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE PHRASE MELODY
1
1
2

6 Select a Track to Record
When using a preset style as a basis for a user style, the BASS, CHORD 1, CHORD
2, PAD, PHRASE 1, and PHRASE 2 tracks must be cleared before they can be selected
for recording (see page 105). The RHYTHM 1 and RHYTHM 2 tracks can be
“overdubbed” — i.e. new notes can be added without erasing the original data.
Use the TRACK buttons to select RHYTHM 1, BASS, CHORD 1/2, PAD, or
PHRASE 1/2 as the style track you want to record.

100

• Only one track can be
recorded at a time.
• If you don’t specifically select a track,
the RHYTHM 1 track
will automatically be
selected when you
start recording.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Style Recording

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

219 219 340 322 324 434 468 442 471
RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE PHRASE MELODY
1
1
2

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

◆ Rehearsal Mode
If the [SYNC START] button is pressed while in Record Ready Mode, it
will be canceled (the beat lamps will go out) and the PSR-730/630 will enter
Rehearsal Mode. In this mode, you can try playing your song before actually
recording it. Pressing the [SYNC START] button will return to Record
Ready Mode.

SYNC

STOP

START

NIMENT

7 Select a Voice, If Necessary
If necessary, select a voice for the track to be recorded by pressing the
[VOICE] button and selecting in the normal way.

• The Registration Memory
buttons will be disabled in
the Style record mode.

8 Record
Recording will begin as soon as you play a note on the keyboard or press the
[START/STOP] button. The BEAT indicator dots will begin to indicate the
current beat, and the MEASURE parameter will show the current measure
number during recording.
START / STOP

009
MEASURE

BEAT

1

2

3

4

MULTI PAD

The style will repeat continuously when recording is started, so you can
continue to add (“overdub”) notes until the current track is complete. The style
should be recorded based on a CM7 chord (C Major Seven) in order for it to
function properly when used for auto-accompaniment.

C S C

C = chord tone

C S C C, S = scale tones

• Before actually starting to
record you can try playing
the PSR-730/630 the way it
is set up by using the “Rehearsal Mode”: press the
[SYNC START] button to
temporarily disengage the
record ready mode, rehearse as necessary, then
press the [SYNC START]
button again to return to the
record ready mode.
• If the memory becomes full
while recording, “Full” will
appear on the display and
recording will stop (the rehearsal mode will be engaged).
• Even though you can start
recording with the user style
memory space thoroughly
consumed, “Full” will be
shown on the display and
the recording will forcibly be
stopped. In this case, first
exit from the record mode,
next select the unnecessary
user style, and then enter
the record mode again and
execute the Clear function
(see page 105) to secure the
free space to record.

101

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Style Recording

Observe the following rules when recording the MAIN and FILL sections:

• Use only the CM7 scale tones when recording the BASS and PHRASE tracks (i.e.
C, D, E, G, A, and B).
• Use only the chord tones when recording the CHORD and PAD tracks (i.e. C, E,
G, and B).

Any appropriate chord or chord progression can be used for the INTRO and
ENDING sections.
The basic chord for the accompaniment is called the source chord. The default
source chord is set as CM7, but you can change it to whatever chord is easy for you
to play. For details, see “Refining User Styles with Style File Format” (page 148).

• During recording you
can use the TRACK
buttons to turn playback of previously-recorded tracks on or
off as required.
• For recording the
RHYTHM 1/2 tracks,
the instrument symbols printed on the
front edge of the
panel show you the
instrument assignments to each key.
See Keyboard Percussion on page 140
for playing each drum/
percussion sound.

9 Stop Recording
Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button. The PSR-730/630 will
return to Record Ready Mode.
When recording is stopped the MEASURE number on the display will return to “1”.
START / STOP

• You can also press
the [SYNC START]
button to stop recording and return to the
Record Ready Mode.

10 Record Additional Sections & Tracks as Required
By repeating steps 5 through 9, above, you can select and record additional sections
and tracks as required.

11 Exit From the Record Mode
When you’re finished recording a style, press the [RECORD] button so that its
indicator goes out to exit from the record mode. The recorded user style can now be
used in the same way as the preset styles (page 22).
RECORD

102

• The voice data in specific user style tracks
can be “revoiced” in
the same way as the
preset styles, as described on page 112.
This, however, does
not actually rewrite
the user style data. In
order to actually
change the user style
data first use the
revoice function, then
immediately engage
and disengage the
style record mode
without recording any
data.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Style Recording

Drum Cancel

This function makes it possible to erase specific drum instruments from the
RHYTHM 1 and RHYTHM 2 tracks. It’s handy, for example, when you want to erase
just the bass drum recorded on the RHYTHM 1 track.
While recording either the RHYTHM 1 or RHYTHM 2 track, use the SUB MENU
[▲] and [▼] buttons to select “Drum Cancel”.

• Drum Cancel cannot
be used for the BASS,
CHORD 1/2, PAD, or
PHRASE 1/2 tracks.

Drum Can cel
Then, press the key on the key board corresponding to the instrument you want to
cancel.

Quantize
Quantize can be used to align notes to the nearest specified beat to tighten up loose
timing.

1 With the style Record Ready Mode (or Rehearsal Mode) engaged and the target
style and its section selected, use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select
“Quantize? YES”.

Quantize ?

YES

2 Press the [+] (YES) button to engage the quantize function (or [–] to abort) . The
current quantize value will appear to the left of “Quantize:” on the top line of the
display. Use the [–] and [+] buttons, or the Data Dial to select the desired quantize
value (4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 24, 32). When the quantize function is executed, all notes in
the target track will be aligned with the nearest note of the corresponding value.

Quantize :

32

2

103

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Style Recording

Quantize Value

One measure of 8th notes before quantization

Note

4

Quarter note

6

Quarter note triplet

8

Eighth note

12

Eighth note triplet

16

Sixteenth note

24

Sixteenth note triplet

32

Thirty-second note

After quantization

3 Press the SUB MENU [▼] button once so that “Execute? NO/YES” appears on the
display. Then press the [+] (YES) button to execute the quantize function, or the
[–] (NO) button to cancel (the display will return to “Quantize? YES”).

4 After the quantize operation is completed, “Undo” will appear on the top line of the
display. Undo lets you undo the effect of applying the quantize function.

Undo?

nd PiYES

Pressing the [START/STOP] button will cause the quantized style to replay so that
you can check it.
Press the [+] (YES) button to undo the quantize operation.
Press the [–] (NO) button and the undo won’t be executed. The display will return
to “Quantize? YES.”

Naming Styles
You can give your own name (8 characters or less) to user styles.
With the Style Record Ready Mode (or Rehearsal Mode) engaged and the target
style selected, use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “UserStyle...” appears
on the display. The current name for the style will be displayed at the upper right of
the display.

UserStyl e:

Use rSty1

The method of setting the characters is the same as for Registration Naming (page
58).

UserStyl e:
104

ORI GINAL

• After exiting from the
“Undo” screen, the
undo function cannot
be applied.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Style Recording

Clearing User Style Data

This function makes it possible to clear unneeded data from the PSR-730/630 User
Style tracks.
● Clearing an Entire Style
While the STYLE record-ready or rehearsal mode is engaged use the SUB MENU
[▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “All Clear? YES” function, then press the [+] (YES)
button: “Are You Sure? NO/YES” will appear on the display. Press the [+] (YES)
button a second time to actually clear the currently selected user style (the preset styles
cannot be cleared). Press [–] (NO) if you want to abort the clear operation.

All Clea r?

Are You

Gra nd PiYES

Sure?

NO/YES

● Clearing Selected Style Tracks
While the STYLE record-ready or rehearsal mode is engaged and a section is
selected, use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “Track Clear?”
function. The style track icons corresponding to tracks which contain data will flash.
Use the TRACK buttons to select track(s) you want to clear (the selected tracks will
be bracketed by two horizontal bars).

Track Cl ear?
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

nd PiYES
9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

219 219 340 322 324 434 468 442 471 201 252 213 213 213 213 213
RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY
1
2
3
4
1
2

ACMP

VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

DUAL

9

219 219 340 322 324 434 468 442 471
RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE PHRASE MELODY
1
1
2

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Once the desired tracks have been selected, “Are You Sure? NO/YES” will appear
on the display. Press the [+] (YES) button to actually clear the currently selected
track(s). Press [–] (NO) if you want to abort the clear operation.

105

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
Multi Pad Recording
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
In addition to the preset MULTI PAD sets, the PSR-730/630 has 16 user-recordable sets that
you can use to store your own creations.

• Material recorded in the MULTI PADs will be retained even after turning the power
off. See page 152 for the details.
• The recorded data will be lost if the power is turned off, the AC adaptor is unplugged,
or the batteries fail during recording.
• The Shortcut functions are not available when one of the Record modes is engaged.

● The MULTI PADs record the following operations and data:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Note on/off.
Velocity.
R1 voice (voice number, volume, reverb depth, chorus depth, pan).
Chord match on/off.
Pitch bend, pitch bend range.
Modulation.
Sustain on/off.
Expression ( with Pedal2 ).
Brightness ( with Pedal2 ).
Resonance ( with Pedal2 ).

Multi Pad Recording Procedure

1 Engage the Record Ready Mode
Press the [RECORD] button to engage the record-ready mode. The [RECORD]
button indicator will light, and the SONG, STYLE, and MULTI PAD [1] … [4] icons
will flash, indicating that you must select one of the corresponding record modes.

and Piano

001

001
RECORD

BEAT

1

2

3

VOICE

4

MULTI PAD

dim 6

m M 7aug sus 4

FINGERING

11

119
513

12

GROOVE & DYNAMICS

13

14

15

16

STYLE

252 213 213 213 213 213
2

MELODY MELODY
3
4

ACMP

VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

106

DUAL

SONG

• Up to approximately
100 notes for each pad
can be recorded in the
PSR-730/630 MULTI
PADs.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Multi Pad Recording

2 Select the MULTI PAD Record Mode

Press any MULTI PAD button ([1] … [4]) to select the MULTI PAD record mode
(the MULTI PAD button you press will be selected for recording). The MULTI PAD
menu will automatically be selected and a user pad set number will appear on the top
line of the display. The beat indicator dots will flash at the currently set tempo,
indicating that the record ready (synchro-start) mode is engaged.

1

STOP

2

3

Bank 37:

MENU

007

DISK
MULTI PAD

STYLE
SONG

REGIST MEMORY

DISK

116
TEMPO

000
TRANSPOSE

MULTI PAD

4

Use rPad1
A

100

B

ONE TOUCH
SETTING

REPEAT

ACMP/SONG
VOLUME

1

2

3

4

FREEZE

REGISTRATION MEMORY

001

001
MEASURE

BEAT

1

2

3

VOICE

4

MULTI PAD

• If the [RECORD] button is pressed while a
preset pad set is selected, the lowestnumbered user pad
set which does not
contain any recorded
data will automatically
be selected. If other
user pad sets already
contain data, however, user pad number 1 will be selected.
• The DSP effect cannot be turned on during MULTI PAD recording or the MULTI
PAD record standby
mode. If the DSP effect is on when the
MULTI PAD record
mode is engaged, it
will automatically be
turned off.
• If the Metronome
function is on (page
116), the metronome
will sound at the current tempo.

3 If Necessary, Select a User Pad Set Number
If the desired user pad set is not already selected, use the [–] and [+] buttons, [1]–
[0] number buttons, or the Data Dial to select as required.

4 If Necessary, Select a MULTI PAD to Record
If the MULTI PAD you pressed in step 2, above, is not the one you want to record,
you can select any other pad at this point simply pressing the appropriate MULTI PAD
button. The selected MULTI PAD icon will appear in the display.

1

2

3

4

MULTI PAD
BEAT

1

2

3

4

MULTI PAD

5 Specify Chord Match if Required
If you record a MULTI PAD with a pitched voice, the Chord Match function (see
page 63) can be specified for that pad by using the SUB MENU buttons to select the
Chord Match function for the corresponding pad (“P1ChdMatch” … “P4ChdMatch”)
while in the record standby or rehearsal mode, and then using the [+] button to turn
it “On” or “Off” as you like.

P1ChdMat ch: On

• The Chord Match on/
off status can be
changed in the SUB
MENU “MULTI PAD”
even after exiting the
recording mode.

eggio
107

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Multi Pad Recording

6 Record

Recording will begin as soon as you play a note on the keyboard (synchro
start) or press the [START/STOP] button, and the BEAT indicator dots will
begin to indicate the current beat as in the Auto Accompaniment mode. If you
are recording a Chord Match phrase, be sure to base your phrase on a CM7 chord
to ensure proper Chord Match operation. See page 101 for more details on
recording around a CM7 chord.
START / STOP

• Before actually starting to
record you can try playing the
PSR-730/630 the way it is set
up by using the “Rehearsal
Mode”: press the [SYNC
START] button to temporarily
disengage the record ready
mode, rehearse as necessary,
then press the [SYNC START]
button again to return to the
record ready mode.
• Whenever you record a
MULTI PAD, any previously
recorded material in the same
MULTI PAD will be erased.

009
MEASURE

BEAT

1

2

3

4

MULTI PAD

7 Stop Recording
Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button. When recording is
stopped, the record-ready mode will be engaged.
START / STOP

8 Record Additional Pads as Required
By repeating steps 3 through 7, above, you can select and record additional
pads as required.

9 Exit From the Record Mode
When you’re finished recording pads, press the [RECORD] button so that its
indicator goes out to exit from the record mode. The recorded user pad can now
be played back in the same way as the preset pads (page 61).
RECORD

108

• If the memory becomes full
while recording, “Full” will appear on the display and recording will stop (the recordready mode will be engaged).

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Multi Pad Recording

Naming Pads

You can give your own name (8 characters or less) to user pad sets.
With the Pad Record Ready Mode (or Rehearsal Mode) engaged and the target Pad
set selected, use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Pad Naming...” appears
on the display. The current name for the Pad set will be displayed at the upper right
of the display.

_se rPad1
Pad Nami ng: U
The method of setting the characters is the same as for Registration Naming (page
58).

Pad Nami ng: LIV EPAD1

Clearing User Pad Data
This function makes it possible to clear unneeded data from the PSR-730/630
MULTI PADs.
● Clearing an Entire Pad Set
While the MULTI PAD record-ready or rehearsal mode is engaged use the SUB
MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “Bank Clear? YES” function, then press the
[+] (YES) button: “Are You Sure? NO/YES” will appear on the display. Press the [+]
(YES) button a second time to actually clear the currently selected pad set (the preset
pad sets cannot be cleared). Press [–] (NO) if you want to abort the clear operation.

Bank Cle ar?

• If the pad you selected has already
been cleared, “Bank
Clear? - - -” will appear on the display.

YES

● Clearing Selected MULTI PADs
While the MULTI PAD record-ready or rehearsal mode is engaged use the SUB
MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “Pad Clear?” function. The MULTI PAD
icons corresponding to pads which contain data will flash (preset pad set data cannot
be cleared).

Pad Clea r?

YES

Use the MULTI PAD buttons to select the pad you want to clear (the icon
corresponding to the selected pad will appear continuously on the display). “Are You
Sure? NO/YES” will appear on the display. Press the [+] (YES) button to actually clear
the currently selected pad. Press [–] (NO) if you want to abort the clear operation.

• If the pad you selected has already
been cleared, “Pad
Clear? - - -” will appear on the display.

109

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
Revoicing
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
The PSR-730/630 REVOICE function lets you change the following parameters for the R1,
R2 and L voices and the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT tracks.
● Revoice Parameters
Parameter

Display

Range

Voice

Voice Name

PSR-730:
1 … 707

Comments
Assigns a voice number to the specified
PSR-730/630 voice or track.

PSR-630:
1 … 692
Volume

Volume

0 … 127

Sets the volume of the specified PSR-730/
630 voice or track.

Octave

Octave

–2 … 2

Shifts the pitch of the specified voice or track
up or down by one or two octaves. A setting of
“0” produces normal pitch.

Pan

Pan

–7 … 7

Positions the sound of the specified voice or
track from left to right in the stereo sound field.
“–7” is full left, “7” is full right, “0” is center, and
all other settings are corresponding positions
in between.

Reverb Depth

RevDepth

0 … 127

Sets the reverb depth for the specified voice
or track, and thus the amount of reverb effect
applied to that voice or track.

Chorus Depth

ChoDepth

0 … 127

Sets the chorus depth for the specified voice
or track, and thus the amount of chorus effect
applied to that voice or track.

DSP Depth

DspDepth

0 … 127

Sets the DSP depth for the specified voice or
track, and thus the amount of DSP effect
applied to that voice or track.

• You cannot enter
Revoice Mode when
one of the Record
Modes is engaged.
• With Style Revoice,
the octave and the
DSP depth cannot be
changed.
• When using Style
Revoice for the
RHYTHM1 track, only
drum kit voices (see
page 19) can be selected.
• When using Style
Revoice for the
RHYTHM2 track, any
of the voices can be
selected but no chord
changes will occur
when using Auto Accompaniment.

Revoicing the R1, R2, and L Voices

1 Select the VOICE REVOICE Mode
While the VOICE menu is selected, press the [REVOICE] button (actually, the
order here is not important: you can also press the [VOICE] button after pressing the
[REVOICE] button). The [REVOICE] button indicator will light and the R1 voice
track will be bracketed by two horizontal bars (i.e. the R1 voice is initially selected for
revoicing).

Gra nd Piano

001
VOICE

14

15

16

VOICE

STYLE

STYLE

084 109 001
VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

110

DUAL

• The VOICE REVOICE
mode cannot be selected while one of
the record modes is
engaged.

VOICE

GROOVE & DYNAMICS

REVOICE

SONG

SONG

• The VOICE REVOICE
mode will automatically be selected if the
[REVOICE] button is
pressed while any
menu other than
STYLE or SONG is
selected.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Revoicing

2 If Necessary Select a Voice to Revoice

Use the three rightmost TRACK buttons to select the voice you want to
revoice: L, R2, or R1. The selected tracks will be bracketed by two horizontal bars.
14

15

16

084 109 001
VOICE

VOICE

VOICE

L

R2

R1

SPLIT

DUAL

L

R2

14

15

R1

• The TRACK button below
the selected voice can be
used to turn the voice on or
off. Make sure that the
voice is turned on if you
want to monitor the sound
while revoicing (the R1
voice cannot be turned off).

16

3 Select and Edit the Revoice Parameters
Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the desired parameter. The
name of the selected parameter will appear on the top line of the display to the
right of the parameter’s current value. Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the number
buttons, or the data dial to set the parameter’s value as required. Refer to the
“Revoice Parameters” chart on page 111.

R1Voice: 001 Gra nd Piano
R1Volume :

100

R1Octave :

0

R1Pan:

0

:

R1RevDep th:

28

R1ChoDep th:

70

R1DspDep th:

26

4 Repeat as Required and Exit When Done
Repeat steps 2 and 3, above, to revoice the voices as required, then press the
[REVOICE] button so that its indicator goes out to exit from the REVOICE
mode.

REVOICE

• You can jump directly to the
REVOICE R2 VOICE display by pressing and holding the [DUAL VOICE] button for a few seconds.
• You can jump directly to the
REVOICE L VOICE display
by pressing and holding the
[SPLIT VOICE] button for a
few seconds.

• Minus settings for the Octave and Pan parameters
can be directly entered by
pressing the appropriate
number button while holding the [–] button.
• When the DSP type is set
as insertion, the DSP depth
parameter cannot be
changed.
• The REVOICE mode will
automatically be exited if
the MENU [▲ ] and [▼ ] buttons are used to select any
of the menus to the left of
the display.
• Save any revoice settings
you want to keep to the
PSR-730/630 REGISTRATION MEMORY (page 57).
The revoice setting are temporary and will be lost if the
power is turned off, a different R1 panel voice is selected while the Voice Set
function is on, or a REGISTRATION MEMORY is recalled.

111

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Revoicing

Revoicing a Style

1 Select the STYLE REVOICE Mode
While the STYLE menu and the style you want to revoice are selected, press the
[REVOICE] button (actually, the order here is not important: you can also press
the [STYLE] button after pressing the [REVOICE] button). The [REVOICE]
button indicator will light and the RHYTHM 1 track will be bracketed by two
horizontal bars (i.e. the RHYTHM 1 track is initially selected for revoicing).

8Beat Po p1

001
STYLE
SONG
DIGITAL EQ

1

116
TEMPO

A

100

000

DISK

TRANSPOSE
MULTI
EFFECT

2

REVERB

3

4

1

2

3

VOICE

FREEZE

4

DSP

6

HARMONY SYNC STOP

7

8

STYLE

STYLE

9

219 219 355 337 339 406 228 362 888
RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

• The STYLE REVOICE
mode cannot be selected
while a voice is being
revoiced during song playback.

VOICE

REGISTRATION MEMORY
VARIATION

CHORUS

5

ONE TOUCH
SETTING

REPEAT

ACMP/SONG
VOLUME

• The STYLE REVOICE
mode cannot be selected
while one of the record
modes is engaged.

Sra

B

PAD

• The STYLE REVOICE
mode can even be selected by pressing the
[REVOICE] button while
an accompaniment is
playing.

REVOICE

PHRASE PHRASE MELODY
1
2
1

SONG

SONG

• The Registration Memory
Freeze function will automatically be turned on
when entering the Style
Revoice Mode.

2 Select the Section(s) to be Revoiced
Press INTRO, MAIN A/B or ENDING button(s) to select the section(s).
• Style revoicing affects all
sections of the selected
style.

3 If Necessary Select a Track to Revoice
Use the TRACK buttons to select the accompaniment track you want to revoice:
RHYTHM 1, RHYTHM 2, BASS, CHORD 1, CHORD 2, PAD, PHRASE 1, or
PHRASE 2. The selected tracks will be bracketed by two horizontal bars.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

• The TRACK button below
the selected track can be
used to turn the track on
or off. Make sure that the
track is turned on if you
want to monitor the sound
while revoicing.

219 219 355 337 339 406 228 362 888
RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE PHRASE MELODY
1
2
1

• Any voice can be selected
for the RHYTHM 2 track,
but please note that the
RHYTHM 2 track is not affected by the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT feature.

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

1

112

2

3

4

5

6

• Only drum kits (see page
19) can be selected for
the RHYTHM 1 track.

7

8

• The OCTAVE parameter
and the DSP depth cannot
be edited in the STYLE
REVOICE mode.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Revoicing

4 Select and Edit the Revoice Parameters

Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the desired parameter. The
name of the selected parameter will appear on the top line of the display to the right
of the parameter’s current value. Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the number buttons,
or the data dial to set the parameter’s value as required. Refer to the “Revoice
Parameters” chart on page 110.

• “- - -” will appear on the
top line of the display if
you select an accompaniment track which contains
no data for revoicing, and
revoicing will not be possible.
• Minus settings for the Octave and Pan parameters
can be directly entered by
pressing the appropriate
number button while holding the [–] button.
• When a voice (especially
bass voices) used for a
Style is changed from the
XG Voice to the Panel
Voice using the Revoice
function, the octave
played for the voice may
change.

5 Repeat as Required and Exit When Done
Repeat steps 2 and 4, above, to revoice the tracks as required, then press the
[REVOICE] button so that its indicator goes out to exit from the REVOICE mode.

REVOICE

• The REVOICE mode will
automatically be exited if
the MENU [ ▲] and [ ▼]
buttons are used to select
any of the menus to the
left of the display.
• Save any revoice settings
you want to keep to the
PSR-730/630 REGISTRATION MEMORY (page
57). The revoice setting
are temporary and will be
lost if the power is turned
off, a different style is selected, or a REGISTRATION MEMORY is recalled.

113

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
Overall Functions
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Some of the functions in the OVERALL function group have already been described in
appropriate sections of this manual. Others will be introduced for the first time in this section.
Refer to the chart below for the page numbers on which each function is described. The chart
also lists the full name of each function, the abbreviated name which appears on the display,
and the available settings or range of settings. Ranges are indicated by two or more values
separated by ellipsis (…).

Function
Touch Sensitivity
Pitch Bend Range
Master Tuning
Scale Tuning Note
Scale Tuning
Song Transpose
Metronome
Split Voice Split Point
Accompaniment Split Point
Fingering Mode

Voice Set
Pedal1

Display
TouchSense
PB Range
Tuning
S.TuneNote
S.TuneValue
SongTrans
Metronome
SplitPoint
AcmpSplit
FingerMode

VoiceSet
Pedal1

Pedal2

Pedal2

Pedal1 Polarity
Pedal2 Polarity
Modulation Wheel

P1 Polarity
P2 Polarity
ModWheel

Settings
0 … 127
01 … 12
–50 … +50
C…B
–64 … 63
–12 … +12
Off, On
0 … 127
0 … 127
Multi,Single,
Fingered1, Fingered2,
Full Key, Multi
Off, On
Sustain …
Groove&Dyn.
Expression …
Groove&Dyn.
Normal, Revers
Normal, Revers
Modulation,
Brightness,
Resonance

Page
115
54
115
115
115
116
116
21
30
31

116
117
117
118
118
55

To access an OVERALL function first use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move
the triangular indicator in the display next to “OVERALL”.
MENU

MIDI
DIGITAL EFFECT
OVERALL
GROOVE&DYNAMICS

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the desired function from
within the OVERALL menu. When a function is selected the current setting will
appear to the right of the function name on the top line of the display. Once the function
has been selected, use the [–] and [+] buttons or data dial (or number buttons, where
applicable) to set the function as required.
SUB MENU

114

TouchSen se: 100

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Overall Functions

■ Touch Sensitivity

This function sets the keyboard touch sensitivity. The range is from “0” to “127”.
The higher the value the higher the sensitivity. When the touch sensitivity value is set
to “0”, “Off” appears in the display and the same volume is produced no matter how
hard you play the keys. — this setting can produce a more realistic effect with voices
that normally do not have touch response: e.g. organ and harpsichord.

TouchSen se: 100

■ Pitch Bend Range
See page 54.

■ Modulation Wheel
See page 55.

■ Master Tuning
The Tuning function sets the overall pitch of the PSR-730/630 over a ±100 cent
range (from –100 to +100) in 1-cent increments. Since 1 cent is 1/100th of a semitone,
the total tuning range is from a semitone below normal pitch to a semitone above
normal pitch.

Tuning:

0

• The “normal” tuning
value (“0”) can be recalled by simultaneously pressing the
[–] and [+] buttons.
• Minus values can be
entered by using the
number buttons while
holding the [–] button.

■ Scale Tuning
Scale tuning allows each individual note of the octave to be tuned over range from
–64 to +63 cents in 1-cent increments (1 cent = 1/100th of a semitone). This makes it
possible to produce subtle tuning variations, or tune the instrument to totally different
scales (e.g. classic or Arabic scales).
First use the S.TuneNote function to select the note to be tuned. The range is from
C to B: C, C#, D, D#, E, F, F#, G, G#, A, A#, B.

S.TuneNo te: C
note

C# D#

F# G# A#

Db Eb
C# D#

Gb Ab Bb
F# G# A#

C
note

D

E

F

G

A

• The scale tuning settings are common to
each octave on the
keyboard.
• The Accompaniment
and Multi Pad sound
is affected by Scale
Tuning.
• The “normal” tuning
value (“0”) can be recalled by simultaneously pressing the
[–] and [+] buttons.
• Minus values can be
entered by using the
number buttons while
holding the [–] button.

B

C D E F G A B

Then use the S.TuneValue function to tune the selected note as required.

S.TuneVa lue:-50
115

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Overall Functions

■ Song Transpose

This function allows you to transpose only the song to be played back. That means
you can play along with your desired song (Minus-one function) in the desired key
without affecting your performance.

SongTran s.:

0

■ Metronome
When turned “on” the PSR-730/630 metronome will sound during AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT playback as well as SONG playback and recording.

Metronom e:

Off

• Since the Transpose
function (page 56)
sets the overall transpose value, if it is
changed, the Song
Transpose value will
be changed by the
same amount at the
same time.
• The “normal” transpose value (“00”) can
be recalled by simultaneously pressing
the [–] and [+] buttons.
• Minus values can be
entered by using the
number buttons while
holding the [–] button.
• The Song Transpose
value is automatically
set to “00” when the
user song record
mode is engaged.

■ Split Voice Split Point
See page 21.

■ Accompaniment Split Point
See page 30.

■ Fingering Mode
See page 31.

■ Voice Set
The VOICE SET feature brings out the best in each individual voice by automatically setting a range of important voice-related parameters whenever an R1 panel
voice is selected. The parameters that may be set by the VOICE SET feature are listed
below. This function lets you turn VOICE SET on or off, as required.

VoiceSet :

On

● Voice Set parameter list
• R1 Voice (Volume, pan)
• R2 Voice (Voice number, volume, octave,
pan, reverb depth, chorus depth, DSP depth)
• Harmony type, volume
• Pitch Bend Range
• DSP Return Level

116

The parameter below is set whether or not
the voice set function is on or off.
• R1 Voice (Octave, reverb depth, chorus
depth, DSP depth)
• Reverb ON/OFF
• Chorus ON/OFF
• DSP ON/OFF, variation ON/OFF
• DSP type
• Multi Effect ON/OFF
• Multi Effect Part setting
• Multi Effect 1 type, Dry/Wet
• Multi Effect 2 type, Dry/Wet

• The Voice Set function is on by default
when the power is initially turned on.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Overall Functions

■ Pedal

The various functions can be assigned to the Pedals 1/2: the footswitch connected
to the SUSTAIN jack (Pedal 1) and the foot controller connected to the FOOT VOL.
jack (Pedal 2) on the rear panel.
● Select the Functions to Be Controlled by the Pedals
Select one of the 16 functions that can be controlled by Pedal 1, and one of the 24
functions that can be controlled by Pedal 2.

Pedal1:

Sus tain

Pedal2:

Exp ression

Pedal Function List
Pedal 1/2 Functions
SUSTAIN

When you step on the foot switch, sustain is applied to the keyboard notes.

SOSTENUTO

When you step on the foot switch, the sostenuto effect is applied to the keyboard notes.

SOFT

When you step on the foot switch, the soft effect is applied to the keyboard notes.

REGIST.+

When you step on the foot switch, a register with one number higher is recalled. For
example, if you step on the foot switch with bank 1-3 recalled, 1-4 will be recalled, then
next 1-1 will be recalled.

REGIST. -

When you step on the foot switch, a register with one number lower is recalled. For
example, if you step on the foot switch with bank 3-2 recalled, 3-1 will be recalled, then
next 3-4 will be recalled.

TAP TEMPO

When the accompaniment is stopped (including synchro start standby), stepping on
the switch the number of beats in a measure will cause the tempo value to be set at
the actual speed at which you tapped the switch, and the accompaniment will start.
For 3/4 time, tap three times, and for 4/4 time, tap 4 times. The tempo can be set in a
range from 32-280.

START/STOP

Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the START/STOP button
on the panel.

BREAK

When you step on the foot switch, accompaniment will stop. Releasing the switch with
the foot will cause it to play again from the next measure.

BASS HOLD

When one of the Fingering Modes other than Full Keyboard is selected, the bass root
note will be held as long as you step on the footswitch.

INTRO

Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the INTRO button on the
panel.

MAIN A/AUTO FILL

Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the MAIN A/AUTO FILL
button on the panel.

MAIN B/AUTO FILL

Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the MAIN B/AUTO FILL
button on the panel.

ENDING

Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the ENDING button on
the panel.

DSP VARIATION

Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the DSP VARIATION
button on the panel.

HARMONY

Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the HARMONY button on
the panel.

GROOVE & DYNAMICS

Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the GROOVE &
DYNAMICS button on the panel.

117

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Overall Functions

Only Pedal 2 Functions
EXPRESSION

Simultaneously controls the volume of the R1, R2 and L voices
(your performance).

R1 VOLUME

Controls the R1 voice volume.

R2 VOLUME

Controls the R2 voice volume.

L VOLUME

Controls the L voice volume.

ACMP/SONG VOLUME

Controls the accompaniment/song volume in the same way as the
ACMP/SONG VOLUME [▼] and [▲] buttons.

HARMONY VOLUME

Controls the harmony volume.

BRIGHTNESS

Controls the brightness of the R1 voice.

RESONANCE

Controls the resonance of the R1 voice.

● Polarity Change (Normal/Reverse)
You can change the polarity of PEDAL 1/2 (foot switch/foot controller).
For example, when you are controlling volume with the foot controller, you can set
whether it increases or decreases when you step on the pedal.

P1 Polar ity:Nor mal
P2 Polar ity:Rev ers

118

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
MIDI Functions
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
In the rear panel of your PSR-730/630, there are MIDI terminals (MIDI IN, MIDI OUT), a TO
HOST terminal, and a HOST SELECT switch. By using the MIDI functions you can expand
your musical possibilities. This section explains what MIDI is, and what it can do, as well as
how you can use MIDI on your PSR-730/630.

What’s MIDI?
No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic instrument” and “digital instrument.”
In the world today, these are the two main categories of instruments. Let’s consider an
acoustic piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They are
easy to understand. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some
strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note
sounds. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note?
● Acoustic guitar note production

● Digital instrument note production

L

Sampling
Note

Tone Generator
(Electronic circuit)

Sampling
Note

R

Playing the keyboard

Pluck a string and the body resonates the
sound.

Based on playing information from the keyboard, a
sampling note stored in the tone generator is played
through the speakers.

As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampling note
(previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is
played based on information received from the keyboard. So then what is the
information from the keyboard that becomes the basis for note production?
For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on
the PSR-730/630 keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated
note, the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with
what voice,” “with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed,” and “when
was it released.” Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and
sent to the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the
stored sampling note.
Example of Keyboard Information
Voice number (with what voice)
Note number (with which key)
Note on (when was it pressed) and
note off (when was it released)
Velocity (about how strong)

01 (grand piano)
60 (C3)
Timing expressed numerically (quarter note)
120 (strong)

119

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
MIDI Functions

MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, which
allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other, by sending
and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program Change and various other
types of MIDI data, or messages.
The PSR-730/630 can control a MIDI device by transmitting note related data and
various types of controller data. The PSR-730/630 can be controlled by the incoming
MIDI messages which automatically determine tone generator mode, select MIDI
channels, voices and effects, change parameter values and of course play the voices
specified for the various parts.

MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel messages and System
messages. Below is an explanation of the various types of MIDI messages which the
PSR-730/630 can receive/transmit.
● Channel Messages
The PSR-730/630 is an electronic instrument that can handle 16 channels. This is
usually expressed as “it can play 16 instruments at the same time.” Channel
messages transmit information such as Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for each
of the 16 channels.
Message Name

PSR-730/630 Operation/Panel Setting

Note ON/OFF

Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played.
Each message includes a specific note number which corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based
on how hard the key is stuck.

Program Change

Voice setting (control change bank select MSB/LSB setting)

Control Change

Revoice setting(volume, pan pot, etc.)

● System Messages
This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI system. System messages
include messages like Exclusive Messages that transmit data unique to each
instrument manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the MIDI device.
Message Name

PSR-730/630 Operation/Panel Setting

Exclusive Message

Reverb/chorus/DSP settings, etc.

Realtime Messages

Clock setting
Start/stop operation

The messages transmitted/received by the PSR-730/630 are shown in the MIDI
Data Format and MIDI Implementation Chart on pages 168 and 169.

120

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
MIDI Functions

◆ MIDI Terminal/TO HOST Terminal
In order to exchange MIDI data between multiple devices, each device must
be connected by a cable.
There are two ways to connect: from the MIDI terminals of the PSR-730/630
to the MIDI terminals of an external device using a MIDI cable, or from the TO
HOST port of the PSR-730/630 to the serial port of a personal computer using
a special cable.
If you connect from the PSR-730/630 TO HOST terminal to a personal
computer, the PSR-730/630 will be used as a MIDI interface device, meaning
that a specialized MIDI interface device is not necessary.
In the rear panel of the PSR-730/630, there are two kinds of terminals, the
MIDI terminals and the TO HOST terminal.
• MIDI IN ......... Receives MIDI data from another MIDI device.
• MIDI OUT ..... Transmits the PSR-730/630’s keyboard information as MIDI data to
another MIDI device.
• TO HOST ...... Transmits and receives MIDI data to and from a personal computer.
••••••••••••••••

TO HOST

IN

• When using the TO HOST
terminal to connect to a
personal computer using
Windows, a Yamaha MIDI
driver must be installed in
the personal computer.
The Yamaha MIDI driver
can be obtained at
Yamaha’s home page on
the World Wide Web,
.
• Special MIDI cables (sold
separately) must be used
for connecting to MIDI devices. They can be bought
at music stores, etc.
• Never use MIDI cables
longer than about 15
meters. Cables longer
than this can pick up
noise which can cause
data errors.

MIDI • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
OUT

What You Can Do with MIDI
● Remotely play another PSR-730/630
MIDI transmit
MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

PSR-730/630

PSR-730/630
MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI receive

Initial send transmit/receive (page 128).
● Use the PSR-730/630 as a multi tone generator (playing 16 channels at one time).
Receive mode for all channels
set to “normal.”
PSR-730/630
MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI Receive

MIDI receive settings (page 126).

Personal computer,
QY700, etc.

121

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
MIDI Functions

● Play music from another keyboard (no tone generator) using the PSR-730/630 XG
tone generator.
MIDI receive
PSR-730/630

MIDI IN

MIDI keyboard with
no tone generator

MIDI OUT

MIDI receive settings (page 126).

● Record performance data (1-16 channels) using the PSR-730/630 Auto Accompaniment and Multi Pad features on a external sequencer (such as a personal
computer). After recording, edit the data with the sequencer, then play it again on
the PSR-730/630 (playback).
Can be used to edit and arrange
after recording
MIDI transmit
MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

PSR-730/630
PSR-530
MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI receive (playback)

MIDI transmit setting (page 125).
Initial send (page 128).

Personal computer,
QY700, etc.

Connecting to a Personal Computer
(TO HOST Terminal/HOST SELECT Switch)
You can enjoy using personal computer music software when you connect your
PSR-730/630’s TO HOST terminal or MIDI terminals to a personal computer.
There are two ways to connect.
● Connect using the PSR-730/630 MIDI terminals.
● Connect using the TO HOST terminal.

■ Connect using the PSR-730/630 MIDI terminals
Using a MIDI interface device installed in the personal computer, connect the MIDI
terminals of the personal computer and the PSR-730/630.
For the connection cable, use a special MIDI cable.
● When the computer has a MIDI interface installed, connect the MIDI OUT terminal
of the personal computer to the MIDI IN terminal of the PSR-730/630. Set the
HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI.”

122

• When using a personal computer, special software (sequencer software) is
needed.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
MIDI Functions

Computer (sequencer software)

MAC PC1 PC2 MIDI

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

MIDI IN

PSR-730/630

MIDI OUT

● When using a MIDI interface with a Macintosh series computer, connect the RS422 terminal of the computer (modem or printer terminal) to the MIDI interface,
then connect the MIDI OUT terminal on the MIDI interface to the MIDI IN terminal
of the PSR-730/630, as show in the diagram below.
Set the HOST SELECT switch on the PSR-730/630 to “MIDI.”
Computer (sequencer software)

MAC PC1 PC2 MIDI

MIDI interface
RS-422

MIDI IN

PSR-730/630

MIDI OUT

• When the HOST SELECT switch is set in the “MIDI” position, input and output in the TO HOST
switch is ignored.
• When using a Macintosh series computer, set the MIDI interface clock setting in the
application software to match the setting of the MIDI interface you are using. For details,
carefully read the owner’s manual for the software you are using.
Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
IBM PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corp.
Other company names and product names, etc. in this manual are registered trademarks or trademarks
of those companies.

123

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
MIDI Functions

■ Connect using the TO HOST terminal

Connect the serial port of the personal computer (RS-232C terminal or RS-422
terminal) to the TO HOST terminal of the PSR-730/630.
For the connection cable, use the cable below (sold separately) that matches the
personal computer type.
Macintosh Series
Connect the RS-422 terminal (modem or printer terminal) on the computer to the TO HOST terminal
on the PSR-730/630 using a serial cable (system peripheral cable, 8 bit). Set the PSR-730/630
HOST SELECT switch in the “MAC” position.

MAC PC1 PC2 MIDI
mini DIN 8-pin

mini DIN 8-pin

• Set the MIDI interface clock in the sequencer software you are using to 1 MHz. For details, carefully read
the owner’s manual for the software you are using.

IBM-PC/AT Series
Connect the RS-232C terminal on the computer to the TO HOST terminal on the PSR-730/630
using a serial cable (D-SUB 9P—>MINI DIN 8P cross cable). Set the PSR-730/630 HOST SELECT
switch in the “PC-2” position.

MAC PC1 PC2 MIDI
mini DIN 8-pin
D-SUB 9-pin

• When using a D-SUB 25P—>MINI DIN 8P cross cable, connect using a D-SUB 9P plug adaptor on the
computer side of the cable.

mini DIN 8-pin
D-SUB 25-pin

D-SUB 9-pin

For details about the necessary MIDI settings for computer and sequence software
you are using, see the owner’s manuals for each of them.

124

• If you connect from
the PSR-730/630 TO
HOST terminal to a
personal computer,
the PSR-730/630 will
be used as a MIDI interface device, meaning that a specialized
MIDI interface device
is not necessary.
• When the HOST SELECT switch is set to
“MAC,” “PC-1,” or
“PC-2,” don’t use the
MIDI IN/OUT terminals. (MIDI data cannot be sent or received through the
MIDI terminals).
• “Host is Offline!!” will
be shown on the display, when the Host
Select switch is set
appropriately and the
serial cable is connected to the PSR730/630 TO HOST
but not to the PC’s serial port (or the cable
is properly connected
to the PC which is
currently turned off).

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
MIDI Functions

The PSR-730/630 MIDI Functions
The PSR-730/630 has the following MIDI functions.
Function

Display

Settings

Page

Transmit Channel

TransmitCh~ 1 ... 16

125

Transmit Track

TransmitTr

Right1 ... Off

126

Receive Channel

Receive Ch

1 ... 16

126

Receive Mode

ReceiveMode Normal, Off, Remote, Bass, Chord

Local Control

Local~~~

Off, On

127

External Clock

Ext.Clock

Off, On

128

Initial Data Send

Init.Send

None

128

Template

Template

User ... Song Out

129

127

To access a MIDI function first use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the
triangular indicator in the display next to “MIDI”, then use the SUB MENU [▲] and
[▼] buttons to select the desired function from within the MIDI menu. When a
function is selected the current setting will appear on the top line of the display. Once
the function has been selected, use the [–] and [+] buttons or data dial (or number
buttons, where applicable) to set the function as required.

SUB MENU

MENU
DISK

Transmit Ch:

1

MULTI PAD
REGIST MEMORY

MENU

MIDI
DIGITAL EFFECT
OVERALL
GROOVE&DYNAMICS

■ Transmit Channel & Transmit Track
The PSR-730/630 can simultaneously transmit data on all 16 MIDI channels. The
Transmit Channel and Transmit Track functions determine what PSR-730/630 data is
transmitted via which MIDI channels.

● Transmit Channel
The “TransmitCh” function selects a MIDI channel to which a PSR-730/630 track
can be assigned via the Transmit Track function, below. First select a transmit
channel, then the transmit track for that channel. Different tracks can be assigned
to each of the 16 MIDI channels. Any of the standard MIDI channels - 1 through 16
— can be specified.

Transmit Ch:

1

ht1
125

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
MIDI Functions

● Transmit Track

The “Transmit Tr” function selects the track to be transmitted via the transmit
channel specified by the Transmit Channel function, above. The available settings
are as follows:

Transmit Tr: Rig ht1
Right1

Right-hand keyboard playing (R1 voice)

Right2

Right-hand keyboard playing (R2 voice)

Left

Left-hand keyboard playing (L voice)

Harmony1

Harmony notes 1

Harmony2

Harmony notes 2

Harmony3

Harmony notes 3

Rhythm2/Tr2

Auto Accompaniment RHYTHM2 track/Track 2

Rhythm1/Tr1

Auto Accompaniment RHYTHM1 track/Track 1

Bass/Tr3

Auto Accompaniment BASS track/Track 3

Chord1/Tr4

Auto Accompaniment CHORD1 track/Track 4

Chord2/Tr5

Auto Accompaniment CHORD2 track/Track 5

Pad/Tr6

Auto Accompaniment PAD track/Track 6

Phrase1/Tr7

Auto Accompaniment PHRASE1 track/Track 7

Phrase2/Tr8

Auto Accompaniment PHRASE2 track/Track 8

Track 9-16

Track 9-16

Off

Off (nothing is transmitted)

• The initial default channel/track settings are:
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

R1 voice
L voice
Bass / Track3
Chord1 / Track4
Chord2 / Track5
Pad / Track6
Phrase1 / Track7
Phrase2 / Track8

Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel

9 = Rhythm1 / Track1
10 = Rhythm2 / Track2
11 = R2 voice
12 = Harmony1
13 = Harmony2
14 = Harmony3
15 = Off
16 = Off

■ Receive Channel & Receive Mode
The PSR-730/630 can simultaneously receive data on all 16 MIDI channels,
allowing it to function as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator. The Receive
Channel and Receive Mode functions determine how each channel will respond to
received MIDI data.

● Receive Channel
The “Receive Ch” function selects a MIDI channel to which a receive mode is to
be assigned via the Receive Mode function, below. First select a receive channel,
then the receive mode for that channel. Any of the standard MIDI channels — 1
through 16 — can be specified.

Receivee Ch:
126

1

nd Piano

• When a track is assigned to more than
one MIDI channel, the
data from that track is
transmitted via the
lowest-numbered
channel.
• To avoid MIDI loops
which can cause operational errors, check
the PSR-730/630 Local Control setting
(page 127), and the
MIDI THRU settings
of any external MIDI
devices.
• MIDI transmit track
settings will be retained even after turning the power off. See
page 152 for the details.
• The channels set for
Rhythm1/Tr1Phrase2/Tr8 will be
used to transmit accompaniment data
when the PSR-730/
630 is in Style Mode,
and to transmit song
track data when the
PSR-730/630 is in
Song Mode.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
MIDI Functions

● Receive Mode

The “ReceiveMode” function specifies the receive mode for the channel selected
via the Receive Channel function, above. The receive mode settings are as follows:

R e c e i v e M o d e : N o r mnadl P i a n o
Normal

Received MIDI data is sent directly to the PSR-730/630 tone generator. If all
channels are set to “Normal”, the PSR-730/630 functions as a 16-channel
multi-timbral tone generator.

Off

No MIDI data is received on channels set to “Off”.

Remote

Received MIDI data is handled in the same way as data generated by the
PSR-730/630’s own keyboard. In other words, a remote keyboard could be
used to control the PSR-730/630 AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT functions, etc.

Bass

The note on/off messages received at the channel(s) set to “Bass” are
recognized as the bass notes in the accompaniment section. The bass notes
will be detected regardless of the accompaniment on/off and split point
settings on the PSR-730/630 panel.

Chord

The note on/off messages received at the channel(s) set to “Chord” are
recognized as the fingerings in the accompaniment section. The chords to
be detected depend on the fingering mode on the PSR-730/630. The chords
will be detected regardless of the accompaniment on/off and split point
settings on the PSR-730/630 panel.

• MIDI receive mode
settings will be retained even after turning the power off. See
page 152 for the details.
• The initial default setting for all channels is
“Normal.”
• In the Record mode,
the Receive mode
cannot be set.

■ Local Control
“Local Control” refers to the fact that, normally, the PSR-730/630 keyboard
controls the internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played directly
from the keyboard. This situation is “Local Control on” since the internal tone
generator is controlled locally by its own keyboard. Local control can be turned off,
however, so that the keyboard does not play the internal voices, but the appropriate
MIDI information is still transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector when notes are
played on the keyboard. At the same time, the internal tone generator can respond to
MIDI information received on channels set to the “Normal” mode via the MIDI IN
connector. This means that while an external MIDI sequencer, for example, plays the
PSR-730/630 internal voices, an external tone generator can be played from the PSR730/630 keyboard. The default Local Control setting is “On”.

Local::: Ch; On

nd Piano

127

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
MIDI Functions
■ Clock

Reception of an external MIDI clock signal can be enabled or disabled as required.
When disabled (“Off”), all of the time-based functions (Auto Accompaniment, SONG
recording and playback, etc.) are controlled by its own internal clock. When MIDI
clock reception is enabled (“On”), however, all timing is controlled by an external
MIDI clock signal received via the MIDI IN terminal (in this case the PSR-730/630
TEMPO setting has no effect). The default setting is “Off”.

Ext.Cloc k:

Off nd Piano

• External Clock is “Off”
be default when the
power is initially turnd
on.
• When External Clock
is turned “On”, AUTO
ACCOMPANIMENT
playback cannot be
started via the panel
[START/STOP] button, or started via the
synchro start function.
Also, the MULTI PAD
playback cannot be
initiated by pressing
the MULT PADs.
• When External Clock
is turned “On”, “EC”
will appear on the
TEMPO display, and
tempo cannot be
changed with the
panel button.

■ Initial Data Send
Transmits all current panel settings to a second PSR-730/630 or a MIDI data storage
device. To send the initial data select the “Init.Send Sure?”. Then press the [+] (YES)
to begin transmission of the initial data.

Init.Sen d Sure? nd PiYES
If you want to have the song play back with the panel settings used for recording,
execute the Initial Data Send function before recording the performance on the PSR730/630 to an external sequencer.

128

• During Style/Song/
Multi Pad playback, in
the synchro start
mode and in one of
the Record modes,
the display shows
“Init.Send Sure? - - -”
indicating that you
cannot execute the
initial data send operation.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
MIDI Functions

■ MIDI Template

The MIDI settings can be collected into a template (pattern). Just by selecting the
template that fits your purpose, you can set all the MIDI settings in one operation.
Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the MIDI menu so that the triangular
indicator in the display appears next to “MIDI” to the left of the display.
Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that “Template” appears on the display.
Referring to the template list below, use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to
select a template.

Template :

XG

• When you change the
transmit/receive channel settings after selecting one of the templates other than the
“User”, the “User”
Template will automatically be selected.

Module

MIDI Template list
1. XG Module

All receive channels are set to “Normal.”
When using the PSR-730/630 as the multi-timbral XG tone
generator.

2. Accordion

The receive channels are set as follows:
1ch: Remote, 2ch: Chord, 3ch: Bass, 4-16ch: Off
When playing the PSR-730/630 by an external MIDI Accordion.
The connected MIDI accordion can play the PSR-730/630 and
detect chords and basses in the auto accompaniment section.

3. MIDI Pedal

All receive channels are set to “Bass.”
When playing the PSR-730/630 using a connected (optional) MIDI
pedal. The connected MIDI pedal detects chords and basses in the
auto accompaniment section, allowing you to play on-bass chords.

4. Keyboard Out

The transmit channels are set as follows:
1ch: Right1, 2ch: Right2, 4ch: Left, 3ch, 5-16ch: Off
When outputting the performance data (note on/off messages).
Used to play the PSR-730/630 note on/off data with an external
tone generator and to record the PSR-730/630 note on/off data to
an external sequencer.

5. Acmp.Out

The transmit channels 9-16 are set with the Accompaniment
tracks.
9-10ch: Rhythms, 11ch: Bass, 12-13ch: Chords, 14ch: Pad, 1516ch: Phrases
When outputting the style data. Used to play the PSR-730/630
auto accompaniment data with an external tone generator and to
record the PSR-730/630 auto accompaniment data to an external
sequencer.

6. Song Out

All transmit channels are set with the Song tracks 1-16.
When outputting the song data. Used to play the PSR-730/630
song data with an external tone generator and to record your entire
performance on the PSR-730/630 to an external sequencer.

7. User

Other than the above settings 1-6.

129

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Appendix

PSR-730/630 Display MENU/SUB MENU Structure

MENU

SUB MENU

FUNCTION

PAGE

ex
Grand Piano (R1 voice name) ............................... R1 voice selection .......................................... 17

VOICE

ex
8Beat Pop1 (Style name) ........................................ Accompaniment style selection ...................... 22

STYLE

V.Arranger ............................................................. Virtual Arranger on/off .................................... 29

ex
UserSty1 ................................................................... User style selection ...................................... 100

STYLE REC

S.ChordRoot ........................................................... Source chord root setting ............................. 148
S.ChordType ........................................................... Source chord type setting ............................. 148
NTR

........................................................................... Note transposition rule setting ...................... 148

NTT

........................................................................... Note transposition table setting .................... 149

HighestKey ............................................................. Highest key setting ....................................... 149
LowLimit ................................................................... Note range (Low limit) setting ....................... 149
HighLimit ................................................................ Note range (high limit) setting ...................... 149
RTR

........................................................................... Retrigger rule setting .................................... 149

Quantize? ................................................................ Quantize ....................................................... 103
UserStyle ................................................................ User style name ........................................... 104
All Clear? ............................................................. User style clear ............................................. 105
Track Clear? ........................................................ Track clear .................................................... 105
Drum Cancel ........................................................... Drum cancel ................................................. 103

ex
Trumpet (Song name) ............................................... Song selection ................................................ 76

SONG

Play Mode ................................................................ Play mode selection ....................................... 77
Measure ..................................................................... Measure from which to start playback ............ 78
A-B Repeat ............................................................. Repeat playback setting ................................. 80
SongRepeat ............................................................. Song repeat setting ........................................ 81
NextSong ................................................................... Next song setting ............................................ 82

ex
SONG REC

SONG–001 ................................................................... User Song selection ................................. 85, 88
QuickRecord ........................................................... Record mode (Quick/Multi) selection ............. 88
Part Select ........................................................... Part selection (Multi record) ........................... 88
Punch In ................................................................... Measure selection (Multi record) .................... 92
Punch Out ................................................................ Measure selection (Multi record) ................... 92
Quantize? ................................................................ Quantize ......................................................... 93
SongName ................................................................... User song name ............................................. 94
Song Clear? ........................................................... Song clear ...................................................... 96
Track Clear? ........................................................ Track clear ...................................................... 94
Measure ..................................................................... Measure from which to start playback ............ 78
Song Edit? ............................................................. Song edit ........................................................ 96
Voice ........................................................................... Voice selection (Song edit) ............................. 97
Volume ........................................................................ Volume setting (Song edit) ............................. 97
Pan

........................................................................... Pan setting (Song edit) ................................... 97

ReverbDepth ........................................................... Reverb depth setting (Song edit) .................... 97
ChorusDepth ........................................................... Chorus depth setting (Song edit) .................... 97
DSPDepth ................................................................... DSP depth setting (Song edit) ........................ 97
Octave ........................................................................ Octave setting (Song edit) .............................. 97

130

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
PSR-730/630 Display MENU/SUB MENU Structure

MENU

SUB MENU

FUNCTION

PAGE

Load From Disk? ................................................ Loading data from a disk ................................ 70

DISK

Save To Disk? ..................................................... Saving data to a disk ...................................... 68
Format Disk? ........................................................ Formatting a disk ............................................ 67
Disk Copy? ............................................................. Copying disk ................................................... 72
Song Copy? ............................................................. Copying a song in a disk ................................ 73
Delete File? ........................................................ Deleting a file in a disk ................................... 75

Bank 01 (Bank name) ................................................ Registration bank selection ............................ 57

REGISTRATION

REGISTRATION MEMORY Button
Reg Naming ............................................................. Registration bank name ................................. 58

Bank 01 (Multi Pad set name) ................................... Multi pad set selection .................................... 61

MULTI PAD

MULTI PAD STOP Button
P1ChdMatch ............................................................. Chord match on/off (pad 1) ............................ 63
P2ChdMatch ............................................................. Chord match on/off (pad 2) ............................ 63
P3ChdMatch ............................................................. Chord match on/off (pad 3) ............................ 63
P4ChdMatch ............................................................. Chord match on/off (pad 4) ............................ 63

Bank 37 (Multi Pad set name) ................................... User pad set selection .................................. 107

MULTI PAD REC

P1ChdMatch ............................................................. Chord match on/off (user pad 1) .................. 107
P2ChdMatch ............................................................. Chord match on/off (user pad 2) .................. 107
P3ChdMatch ............................................................. Chord match on/off (user pad 3) .................. 107
P4ChdMatch ............................................................. Chord match on/off (user pad 4) .................. 107
Bank Clear? ........................................................... Bank clear .................................................... 109
Pad Clear? ............................................................. Pad clear ...................................................... 109
Pad Naming ............................................................. User pad name ............................................. 109

TransmitCh ............................................................. Transmit channel setting .............................. 125

MIDI

TransmitTr ............................................................. Transmit track setting ................................... 126
Receive Ch ............................................................. Receive channel setting ............................... 126
ReceiveMode ........................................................... Receive mode setting ................................... 127
Local ........................................................................... Local on/off ................................................... 127
Ext.Clock ................................................................ External/internal clock selection ................... 128
Init.Send ................................................................ Initial data send ............................................ 128
Template ................................................................... MIDI template selection ................................ 129

ex
Reverb: 1 Hall 1 .............................................. Reverb type selection ..................................... 43

DIGITAL EFFECT

REVERB Button
Rev.Return ............................................................. Reverb return level setting ............................. 43
Chorus: 1 Chorus1 ........................................... Chorus type selection ..................................... 44
CHORUS Button

ex

Cho.Return ............................................................. Chorus return level setting ............................. 44
DSP: 1 Hall 1 ..................................................... DSP type selection ......................................... 46
DSP Button
DSP Return ............................................................. DSP return level setting .................................. 46

131

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,
PSR-730/630 Display MENU/SUB MENU Structure

MENU

SUB MENU

FUNCTION

PAGE

ex
Harmony: 1 Duet ................................................ Harmony type selection .................................. 47
HARMONY Button
Harm.Vol ................................................................... Harmony volume setting ................................. 48
Effect1 In (PSR-730) ........................................... Effect1 part setting ......................................... 49
MULTI EFFECT Button
Effect2 In (PSR-730) ........................................... Effect2 part setting ......................................... 49
Effect1 (PSR-730) ................................................... Effect1 type selection ..................................... 50
Effect2 (PSR-730) ................................................... Effect2 type selection ..................................... 50
Eff1Dry/Wet (PSR-730) ......................................... Effect1 dry/wet setting .................................... 50
Eff2Dry/Wet (PSR-730) ......................................... Effect2 dry/wet setting .................................... 50
EQ Type (PSR-730) ................................................... Equalizer type selection ................................. 52
DIGITAL EQ Button
LowGain (PSR-730) ................................................... Low Gain setting (Equalizer) .......................... 53
LowMidGain (PSR-730) ........................................... LowMidGain setting (Equalizer) ..................... 53
MidGain (PSR-730) ................................................... MidGain setting (Equalizer) ............................ 53
HighMidGain (PSR-730) ......................................... HighMidGain setting (Equalizer) ..................... 53
HighGain (PSR-730) ................................................. HighGain setting (Equalizer) .......................... 53

OVERALL

TouchSense ............................................................. Touch sensitivity setting ............................... 115
PB Range ................................................................... Pitch bend range setting ................................. 54
Tuning ........................................................................ Overall tuning ............................................... 115
S.TuneNote ............................................................. Scale tuning (note) setting ............................ 115
S.TuneValue ........................................................... Scale tuning (value) setting .......................... 115
SongTrans. ............................................................. Song transposition setting ............................ 116
Metronome ................................................................ Metronome on/off ......................................... 116
SplitPoint ............................................................. Split point setting (Split voice) ........................ 21
AcmpSplit ................................................................ Split point setting (Auto accompaniment) ....... 30
FingerMode ............................................................. Fingering mode selection ............................... 31
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT ON/OFF Button
VoiceSet ................................................................... Voice set on/off ............................................. 116
Pedal1 ........................................................................ Selecting Pedal1 function ............................. 117
Pedal2 ........................................................................ Selecting Pedal2 function ............................. 117
P1 Polarity ........................................................... Pedal1 polarity setting .................................. 118
P2 Polarity ........................................................... Pedal2 polarity setting .................................. 118
ModWheel (PSR-730) ................................................. Selecting modulation wheel function .............. 55

GROOVE & DYNAMICS
(PSR-730)

BeatGroove ............................................................. Beat groove template selection ...................... 36
GROOVE & DYNAMICS Button
MeasGroove ............................................................. Measure groove template selection ............... 37
Dynamics ................................................................... Dynamics template selection .......................... 38
DynamcsRate ........................................................... Dynamics rate setting ..................................... 39
ExpandRate ............................................................. Expand rate setting ........................................ 39
BoostRate ................................................................ Boost rate setting ........................................... 40

• Sub-menu items with “
” have shortcut access (press and hold the specified button for a few seconds to
jump directly to the associated sub-menu function). In addition to the shortuts listed above, the [DUAL VOICE]
button can be held to jump to the R2 voice revoice function, and the [SPLIT VOICE] button can be held to jump
to the L voice revoice function.

132

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Voice List

■ Maximum Polyphony

The PSR-730 has 64-note maximum polyphony and the PSR-630 has 32.
Auto Accompaniment uses a number of the available notes, so when Auto
Accompaniment is used the total number of notes that can be played on the
keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Dual Voice,
Split Voice, Multi Pad, and Song functions.
When the maximum polyphony is exceeded, notes are played using lastnote priority.
[PSR-730] Panel Voice List
Voice

MIDI
Program
Voice Name
Change
LSB
Number
Piano
112
0
Grand Piano
112
1
BrightPiano
112
3
Honky Tonk
112
2
Midi Grand
113
2
CP 80
114
4
Galaxy EP
117
5
Super DX
112
5
DX Modern
112
4
Funk EP
115
5
Modern EP
113
5
Hyper Tines
116
5
New Tines
114
5
Venus EP
113
4
Tremolo EP
114
2
Rock Piano
112
7
Clavi
113
7
Wah Clavi
112
6
Harpsichord
113
6
GrandHarpsi
Chromatic Percussion
112
11
Vibraphone
113
11
Jazz Vibes
112
12
Marimba
112
13
Xylophone
112
114
Steel Drums
112
8
Celesta
112
9
Glocken
112
10
Music Box
112
14
TubularBells
112
108
Kalimba
112
47
Timpani
112
15
Dulcimer
Organ
112
16
Jazz Organ1
113
16
Jazz Organ2
112
17
Click Organ
113
17
Dance Organ
115
16
Drawbar Org
115
17
Mellow Draw
116
16
Bright Draw
112
18
Rock Organ1
113
18
Rock Organ2
114
18
Purple Org
116
17
60’s Organ
117
17
Blues Organ
120
16
Mellow Org
120
17
Perc.Organ
117
16
16+1 Organ
118
16
16+2 Organ
119
16
16+4 Organ
118
17
Elec.Organ
114
16
TheatreOrg1
114
17
TheatreOrg2

Bank Select

Number

MSB

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Voice

Bank Select

Number

MSB

LSB

52
53
54

0
0
0

112
113
112

55
56
57
58
59
60
61

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

112
115
113
112
113
114
112

62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

112
113
112
113
112
113
114
116
118
112
119
113
114
113
112
113
112
112
115
114

82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

112
114
112
112
112
113
119
112
112
113
112
112
113
113
114

97
98
99
100
101

0
0
0
0
0

112
113
112
112
112

• The Voice List includes MIDI program
change numbers for each voice. Use
these program change numbers when
playing the PSR-730/630 via MIDI from an
external device.
• When the sustain or sostenuto pedal
functions are being used (page 117),
some voices may sound continuously or
have a long decay after the notes have
been released while the pedal is held.

MIDI
Program
Voice Name
Change
Number
19
Pipe Organ
19
ChapelOrgan
20
Reed Organ
Accordion
21
Musette
21
Accordion
21
Trad. Accrd
23
Tango Accrd
23
Bandoneon
21
Soft Accrd
22
Harmonica
Guitar
24
Classic Gtr
24
Spanish Gtr
25
Folk Guitar
25
12StrGuitar
26
Jazz Guitar
26
Octave Gtr
26
HawaiianGtr
27
BrightClean
27
SolidGuitar
27
CleanGuitar
27
Elec.12Str
27
Tremolo Gtr
27
Slap Guitar
28
Funk Guitar
28
MutedGuitar
29
FeedbackGtr
29
Overdrive
30
Distortion
27
PedalSteel
25
Mandolin
Bass
32
Aco.Bass
32
Bass&Cymbal
33
FingerBass
34
Pick Bass
35
Fretless
35
Jaco Bass
17
Organ Bass
36
Slap Bass
37
Funk Bass
36
Fusion Bass
38
Synth Bass
39
Analog Bass
39
Dance Bass
38
Hi Q Bass
38
Rave Bass
Solo Strings
40
Solo Violin
40
Soft Violin
110
Fiddle
41
Viola
42
Cello

133

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Voice List

Bank Select

Voice
Number

MSB

LSB

102
103
104
105
106
107
108

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

112
112
113
112
112
112
112

109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

112
113
114
113
114
115
115
112
116
112
112
112
112
112
112
113
112
113
113
112

129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

115
112
114
113
112
112
114
112
112

138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

112
113
116
117
118
119
113
114
115
120
121
113
112
112
113
114

154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

112
112
113
112
114
112
116
112
113
113
115

134

MIDI
Program
Voice Name
Change
Number
43
Contrabass
46
Harp
46
Hackbrett
106
Shamisen
107
Koto
104
Sitar
105
Banjo
Ensemble
48
Strings
48
OrchStrings
48
Symphon. Str
49
SlowStrings
49
Str.Quartet
48
ConcertoStr
49
MarcatoStrs
49
ChamberStrs
48
Mellow Orch
44
TremoloStrs
45
PizzStrings
50
Syn Strings
51
Analog Strs
52
Choir
54
Air Choir
52
Vocal Ensbl
53
Vox Humana
53
Gothic Vox
54
Voices
55
Orch.Hit
Solo Brass
56
Sweet Trp
56
SoloTrumpet
56
SoftTrumpet
56
Flugel Horn
59
Muted Trp
57
Trombone
57
MelTrombone
60
French Horn
58
Tuba
Brass Ensemble
61
BrasSection
61
BigBandBrs
61
MellowBrass
61
Small Brass
61
Pop Brass
61
MellowHorns
59
BallroomBrs
61
Full Horns
61
High Brass
61
BrightBrass
61
Big Brass
57
Trb.Section
62
Synth Brass
63
Analog Brs
62
Jump Brass
62
TechnoBrass
Reed
64
Soprano Sax
65
Alto Sax
65
BreathyAlto
66
Tenor Sax
66
BreathTenor
67
BaritoneSax
66
Sax Section
71
Clarinet
71
MelClarinet
66
WoodwindEns
66
Brass Combo

Bank Select

Voice
Number

MSB

LSB

165
166
167
168

0
0
0
0

112
112
112
112

169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

112
112
112
113
112
112
112
112

177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

112
112
113
112
114
115
113
113
112
116
114
115
117
116
117
118
118
119

195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

113
112
113
112
112
114
112
112
112
115
112
112
112
113
115
113
113
114
116
117
113

216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227

127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
126
126

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

MIDI
Program
Voice Name
Change
Number
68
Oboe
69
EnglishHorn
70
Bassoon
109
Bagpipe
Pipe
73
Flute
75
Pan Flute
72
Piccolo
73
EthnicFlute
77
Shakuhachi
78
Whistle
74
Recorder
79
Ocarina
Synth Lead
80
Square Lead
81
Saw.Lead
81
Big Lead
98
Stardust
81
Blaster
81
Analogon
80
Vintage Ld
98
Sun Bell
83
Aero Lead
81
Fire Wire
80
Mini Lead
80
Vinylead
81
Warp
80
Hi Bias
80
Meta Wood
80
Tiny Lead
81
Sub Aqua
81
Fargo
Synth Pad
94
Insomnia
90
Krypton
99
Cyber Pad
95
Wave 2001
94
Equinox
88
Stargate
92
DX Pad
93
Loch Ness
88
Fantasia
88
Golden Age
91
Xenon Pad
89
Area 51
99
Atmosphere
89
Dark Moon
94
Ionosphere
93
Phase IV
88
Symbiont
94
Solaris
88
Time Travel
88
Millenium
95
Transform
Drum Kits
0
Std.Kit1
1
Std.Kit2
8
Room Kit
16
Rock Kit
24
Electro Kit
25
Analog Kit
27
Dance Kit
32
Jazz Kit
40
Brush Kit
48
Classic Kit
0
SFX Kit1
1
SFX Kit2

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Voice List

[PSR-630] Panel Voice List
Voice

MIDI
Program
Voice Name
Change
LSB
Number
Piano
112
0
Grand Piano
112
1
BrightPiano
112
3
Honky Tonk
112
2
Midi Grand
113
2
CP 80
114
4
Galaxy EP
112
5
DX Modern
112
4
Funk EP
115
5
Modern EP
113
5
Hyper Tines
116
5
New Tines
114
5
Venus EP
113
4
Tremolo EP
114
2
Rock Piano
112
7
Clavi
113
7
Wah Clavi
112
6
Harpsichord
113
6
GrandHarpsi
Chromatic Percussion
112
11
Vibraphone
113
11
Jazz Vibes
112
12
Marimba
112
13
Xylophone
112
114
Steel Drums
112
8
Celesta
112
9
Glocken
112
10
Music Box
112
14
TubularBells
112
108
Kalimba
112
47
Timpani
112
15
Dulcimer
Organ
112
16
Jazz Organ1
113
16
Jazz Organ2
112
17
Click Organ
113
17
Dance Organ
115
16
Drawbar Org
115
17
Mellow Draw
116
16
Bright Draw
112
18
Rock Organ1
113
18
Rock Organ2
114
18
Purple Org
116
17
60’s Organ
117
17
Blues Organ
117
16
16+1 Organ
118
16
16+2 Organ
119
16
16+4 Organ
118
17
Elec.Organ
114
16
TheatreOrg1
114
17
TheatreOrg2
112
19
Pipe Organ
113
19
ChapelOrgan
112
20
Reed Organ
Accordion
113
21
Trad. Accrd
112
21
Musette
112
23
Tango Accrd
113
23
Bandoneon
114
21
Soft Accrd
112
22
Harmonica
Guitar
112
24
Classic Gtr

Bank Select

Number

MSB

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

52
53
54
55
56
57

0
0
0
0
0
0

58

0

Voice

Bank Select

Number

MSB

LSB

59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

113
112
113
112
113
114
112
113
114
113
112
113
112
112
115

74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

112
114
112
112
112
113
119
112
112
113
112
112
113
113
114

89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

112
113
112
112
112
112
112
113
112
112
112
112

101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

112
113
114
113
114
115
115
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
113
112
113
112

MIDI
Program
Voice Name
Change
Number
24
Spanish Gtr
25
Folk Guitar
25
12StrGuitar
26
Jazz Guitar
26
Octave Gtr
26
HawaiianGtr
27
CleanGuitar
27
Tremolo Gtr
27
Slap Guitar
28
Funk Guitar
28
MutedGuitar
29
FeedbackGtr
29
Overdrive
30
Distortion
27
PedalSteel
Bass
32
Aco.Bass
32
Bass&Cymbal
33
FingerBass
34
Pick Bass
35
Fretless
35
Jaco Bass
17
Organ Bass
36
Slap Bass
37
Funk Bass
36
Fusion Bass
38
Synth Bass
39
Analog Bass
39
Dance Bass
38
Hi Q Bass
38
Rave Bass
Solo Strings
40
Solo Violin
40
Soft Violin
110
Fiddle
41
Viola
42
Cello
43
Contrabass
46
Harp
46
Hackbrett
106
Shamisen
107
Koto
104
Sitar
105
Banjo
Ensemble
48
Strings
48
OrchStrings
48
Symphon. Str
49
SlowStrings
49
Str.Quartet
48
ConcertoStr
49
MarcatoStrs
49
ChamberStrs
44
TremoloStrs
45
PizzStrings
50
Syn Strings
51
Analog Strs
52
Choir
54
Air Choir
52
Vocal Ensbl
53
Vox Humana
53
Gothic Vox
55
Orch.Hit

135

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Voice List

Bank Select

Voice
Number

MSB

LSB

119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

112
114
113
112
112
114
112
112

127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

113
112
116
117
118
119
113
114
115
113
112
112
113
114

141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

112
112
113
112
114
112
116
112
113
113
115
112
112
112
112

156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

112
112
112
113
112
112
112
112

164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

112
112
113
112
114
115
113
113
112
116
114
115
117

136

MIDI
Program
Voice Name
Change
Number
Solo Brass
56
SoloTrumpet
56
SoftTrumpet
56
Flugel Horn
59
Muted Trp
57
Trombone
57
MelTrombone
60
French Horn
58
Tuba
Brass Ensemble
61
BigBandBrs
61
BrasSection
61
MellowBrass
61
Small Brass
61
Pop Brass
61
MellowHorns
59
BallroomBrs
61
Full Horns
61
High Brass
57
Trb.Section
62
Synth Brass
63
Analog Brs
62
Jump Brass
62
TechnoBrass
Reed
64
Soprano Sax
65
Alto Sax
65
BreathyAlto
66
Tenor Sax
66
BreathTenor
67
BaritoneSax
66
Sax Section
71
Clarinet
71
MelClarinet
66
WoodwindEns
66
Brass Combo
68
Oboe
69
EnglishHorn
70
Bassoon
109
Bagpipe
Pipe
73
Flute
75
Pan Flute
72
Piccolo
73
EthnicFlute
77
Shakuhachi
78
Whistle
74
Recorder
79
Ocarina
Synth Lead
80
Square Lead
81
Saw.Lead
81
Big Lead
98
Stardust
81
Blaster
81
Analogon
80
Vintage Ld
98
Sun Bell
83
Aero Lead
81
Fire Wire
80
Mini Lead
80
Vinylead
81
Warp

Bank Select

Voice
Number

MSB

LSB

177
178
179
180
181

0
0
0
0
0

116
117
118
118
119

182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

113
112
113
112
112
114
112
112
112
115
112
112
112
113
115
113
113
114
113

201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212

127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
126
126

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

MIDI
Program
Voice Name
Change
Number
80
Hi Bias
80
Meta Wood
80
Tiny Lead
81
Sub Aqua
81
Fargo
Synth Pad
94
Insomnia
90
Krypton
99
Cyber Pad
95
Wave 2001
94
Equinox
88
Stargate
92
DX Pad
93
Loch Ness
88
Fantasia
88
Golden Age
91
Xenon Pad
89
Area 51
99
Atmosphere
89
Dark Moon
94
Ionosphere
93
Phase IV
88
Symbiont
94
Solaris
95
Transform
Drum Kits
0
Std.Kit1
1
Std.Kit2
8
Room Kit
16
Rock Kit
24
Electro Kit
25
Analog Kit
27
Dance Kit
32
Jazz Kit
40
Brush Kit
48
Classic Kit
0
SFX Kit1
1
SFX Kit2

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Voice List

[PSR-730/630] XG Voice List
PSR-730 PSR-630 Bank Select MIDI
Program
Voice Voice
Voice Name
Number Number MSB LSB Change
Number
Piano
228 213 0
0
0
GrandPno
229 214 0
1
0
GrndPnoK
230 215 0
18
0
MelloGrP
231 216 0
40
0
PianoStr
232 217 0
41
0
Dream
233 218 0
0
1
BritePno
234 219 0
1
1
BritPnoK
235 220 0
0
2
E.Grand
236 221 0
1
2
ElGrPnoK
237 222 0
32
2
Det.CP80
238 223 0
40
2
ElGrPno1
239 224 0
41
2
ElGrPno2
240 225 0
0
3
HnkyTonk
241 226 0
1
3
HnkyTnkK
242 227 0
0
4
E.Piano1
243 228 0
1
4
El.Pno1K
244 229 0
18
4
MelloEP1
245 230 0
32
4
Chor.EP1
246 231 0
40
4
HardEl.P
247 232 0
45
4
VX El.P1
248 233 0
64
4
60sEl.P
249 234 0
0
5
E.Piano2
250 235 0
1
5
El.Pno2K
251 236 0
32
5
Chor.EP2
252 237 0
33
5
DX Hard
253 238 0
34
5
DXLegend
254 239 0
40
5
DX Phase
255 240 0
41
5
DX+Analg
256 241 0
42
5
DXKotoEP
257 242 0
45
5
VX El.P2
258 243 0
0
6
Harpsi.
259 244 0
1
6
Harpsi.K
260 245 0
25
6
Harpsi.2
261 246 0
35
6
Harpsi.3
262 247 0
0
7
Clavi.
263 248 0
1
7
Clavi. K
264 249 0
27
7
ClaviWah
265 250 0
64
7
PulseClv
266 251 0
65
7
PierceCl
Chromatic Percussion
267 252 0
0
8
Celesta
268 253 0
0
9
Glocken
269 254 0
0
10 MusicBox
270 255 0
64 10 Orgel
271 256 0
0
11 Vibes
272 257 0
1
11 VibesK
273 258 0
45 11 HardVibe
274 259 0
0
12 Marimba
275 260 0
1
12 MarimbaK
276 261 0
64 12 SineMrmb
277 262 0
97 12 Balafon2
278 263 0
98 12 Log Drum
279 264 0
0
13 Xylophon
280 265 0
0
14 TubulBel
281 266 0
96 14 ChrchBel
282 267 0
97 14 Carillon
283 268 0
0
15 Dulcimer
284 269 0
35 15 Dulcimr2
285 270 0
96 15 Cimbalom
286 271 0
97 15 Santur
Organ
287 272 0
0
16 DrawOrgn

MIDI
PSR-730 PSR-630 Bank Select Program
Voice Voice
Change
Number Number MSB LSB Number
288 273 0
32 16
289 274 0
33 16
290 275 0
34 16
291 276 0
35 16
292 277 0
36 16
293 278 0
37 16
294 279 0
38 16
295 280 0
40 16
296 281 0
64 16
297 282 0
65 16
298 283 0
66 16
299 284 0
67 16
300 285 0
0
17
301 286 0
24 17
302 287 0
32 17
303 288 0
33 17
304 289 0
37 17
305 290 0
0
18
306 291 0
64 18
307 292 0
65 18
308 293 0
66 18
309 294 0
0
19
310 295 0
32 19
311 296 0
35 19
312 297 0
40 19
313 298 0
64 19
314 299 0
65 19
315 300 0
0
20
316 301 0
40 20
317 302 0
0
21
318 303 0
32 21
319 304 0
0
22
320 305 0
32 22
321 306 0
0
23
322 307 0
64 23
Guitar
323 308 0
0
24
324 309 0
16 24
325 310 0
25 24
326 311 0
43 24
327 312 0
96 24
328 313 0
0
25
329 314 0
16 25
330 315 0
35 25
331 316 0
40 25
332 317 0
41 25
333 318 0
96 25
334 319 0
0
26
335 320 0
18 26
336 321 0
32 26
337 322 0
0
27
338 323 0
32 27
339 324 0
0
28
340 325 0
40 28
341 326 0
41 28
342 327 0
43 28
343 328 0
45 28
344 329 0
0
29
345 330 0
43 29
346 331 0
0
30
347 332 0
40 30
348 333 0
41 30
349 334 0
0
31

Voice Name
DetDrwOr
60sDrOr1
60sDrOr2
70sDrOr1
DrawOrg2
60sDrOr3
EvenBar
16+2’2/3
Organ Ba
70sDrOr2
CheezOrg
DrawOrg3
PercOrgn
70sPcOr1
DetPrcOr
LiteOrg
PercOrg2
RockOrgn
RotaryOr
SloRotar
FstRotar
ChrchOrg
ChurOrg3
ChurOrg2
NotreDam
OrgFlute
TrmOrgFl
ReedOrgn
Puff Org
Acordion
AccordIt
Harmnica
Harmo 2
TangoAcd
TngoAcd2
NylonGtr
NylonGt2
NylonGt3
VelGtHrm
Ukulele
SteelGtr
SteelGt2
12StrGtr
Nyln&Stl
Stl&Body
Mandolin
Jazz Gtr
MelloGtr
JazzAmp
CleanGtr
ChorusGt
Mute.Gtr
FunkGtr1
MuteStlG
FunkGtr2
Jazz Man
Ovrdrive
Gt.Pinch
Dist.Gtr
FeedbkGt
FeedbGt2
GtrHarmo

MIDI
PSR-730 PSR-630 Bank Select Program
Voice Voice
Voice Name
Number Number MSB LSB Change
Number
350 335 0
65 31 GtFeedbk
351 336 0
66 31 GtrHrmo2
Bass
352 337 0
0
32 Aco.Bass
353 338 0
40 32 JazzRthm
354 339 0
45 32 VXUprght
355 340 0
0
33 FngrBass
356 341 0
18 33 FingrDrk
357 342 0
27 33 FlangeBa
358 343 0
40 33 Ba&DstEG
359 344 0
43 33 FngrSlap
360 345 0
45 33 FngBass2
361 346 0
65 33 ModAlem
362 347 0
0
34 PickBass
363 348 0
28 34 MutePkBa
364 349 0
0
35 Fretless
365 350 0
32 35 Fretles2
366 351 0
33 35 Fretles3
367 352 0
34 35 Fretles4
368 353 0
96 35 SynFretl
369 354 0
97 35 Smooth
370 355 0
0
36 SlapBas1
371 356 0
27 36 ResoSlap
372 357 0
32 36 PunchThm
373 358 0
0
37 SlapBas2
374 359 0
43 37 VeloSlap
375 360 0
0
38 SynBass1
376 361 0
18 38 SynBa1Dk
377 362 0
20 38 FastResB
378 363 0
24 38 AcidBass
379 364 0
35 38 Clv Bass
380 365 0
40 38 TeknoBa
381 366 0
64 38 Oscar
382 367 0
65 38 SqrBass
383 368 0
66 38 RubberBa
384 369 0
96 38 Hammer
385 370 0
0
39 SynBass2
386 371 0
6
39 MelloSB1
387 372 0
12 39 Seq Bass
388 373 0
18 39 ClkSynBa
389 374 0
19 39 SynBa2Dk
390 375 0
32 39 SmthBa 2
391 376 0
40 39 ModulrBa
392 377 0
41 39 DX Bass
393 378 0
64 39 X WireBa
Strings
394 379 0
0
40 Violin
395 380 0
8
40 SlowVln
396 381 0
0
41 Viola
397 382 0
0
42 Cello
398 383 0
0
43 Contrabs
399 384 0
0
44 Trem.Str
400 385 0
8
44 SlowTrStr
401 386 0
40 44 Susp Str
402 387 0
0
45 Pizz.Str
403 388 0
0
46 Harp
404 389 0
40 46 YangChin
405 390 0
0
47 Timpani
Ensemble
406 391 0
0
48 Strings1
407 392 0
3
48 S.Strngs
408 393 0
8
48 SlowStr
409 394 0
24 48 ArcoStr

137

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Voice List

MIDI
PSR-730 PSR-630 Bank Select Program
Voice Voice
Number Number MSB LSB Change
Number
410 395 0
35 48
411 396 0
40 48
412 397 0
41 48
413 398 0
42 48
414 399 0
45 48
415 400 0
0
49
416 401 0
3
49
417 402 0
8
49
418 403 0
40 49
419 404 0
41 49
420 405 0
64 49
421 406 0
65 49
422 407 0
0
50
423 408 0
27 50
424 409 0
64 50
425 410 0
65 50
426 411 0
0
51
427 412 0
0
52
428 413 0
3
52
429 414 0
16 52
430 415 0
32 52
431 416 0
40 52
432 417 0
0
53
433 418 0
0
54
434 419 0
40 54
435 420 0
41 54
436 421 0
64 54
437 422 0
0
55
438 423 0
35 55
439 424 0
64 55
Brass
440 425 0
0
56
441 426 0
16 56
442 427 0
17 56
443 428 0
32 56
444 429 0
0
57
445 430 0
18 57
446 431 0
0
58
447 432 0
16 58
448 433 0
0
59
449 434 0
0
60
450 435 0
6
60
451 436 0
32 60
452 437 0
37 60
453 438 0
0
61
454 439 0
35 61
455 440 0
40 61
456 441 0
41 61
457 442 0
42 61
458 443 0
0
62
459 444 0
12 62
460 445 0
20 62
461 446 0
24 62
462 447 0
27 62
463 448 0
32 62
464 449 0
45 62
465 450 0
64 62
466 451 0
0
63
467 452 0
18 63
468 453 0
40 63
469 454 0
41 63
470 455 0
45 63
471 456 0
64 63

138

Voice Name
60sStrng
Orchestr
Orchstr2
TremOrch
VeloStr
Strings2
S.SlwStr
LegatoSt
Warm Str
Kingdom
70s Str
Str Ens3
Syn.Str1
ResoStr
Syn Str4
SS Str
Syn.Str2
ChoirAah
S.Choir
Ch.Aahs2
MelChoir
ChoirStr
VoiceOoh
SynVoice
SynVox2
Choral
AnaVoice
Orch.Hit
OrchHit2
Impact
Trumpet
Trumpet2
BriteTrp
WarmTrp
Trombone
Trmbone2
Tuba
Tuba 2
Mute.Trp
Fr.Horn
FrHrSolo
FrHorn2
HornOrch
BrasSect
Tp&TbSec
BrssSec2
HiBrass
MelloBrs
SynBras1
QuackBr
RezSynBr
PolyBrss
SynBras3
JumpBrss
AnaVelBr
AnaBrss1
SynBras2
Soft Brs
SynBrss4
ChoirBrs
VelBrss2
AnaBrss2

MIDI
PSR-730 PSR-630 Bank Select Program
Voice Voice
Voice Name
Number Number MSB LSB Change
Number
Reed
472 457 0
0
64 SprnoSax
473 458 0
0
65 Alto Sax
474 459 0
40 65 Sax Sect
475 460 0
43 65 HyprAlto
476 461 0
0
66 TenorSax
477 462 0
40 66 BrthTnSx
478 463 0
41 66 SoftTenr
479 464 0
64 66 TnrSax 2
480 465 0
0
67 Bari.Sax
481 466 0
0
68 Oboe
482 467 0
0
69 Eng.Horn
483 468 0
0
70 Bassoon
484 469 0
0
71 Clarinet
Pipe
485 470 0
0
72 Piccolo
486 471 0
0
73 Flute
487 472 0
0
74 Recorder
488 473 0
0
75 PanFlute
489 474 0
0
76 Bottle
490 475 0
0
77 Shakhchi
491 476 0
0
78 Whistle
492 477 0
0
79 Ocarina
Synth Lead
493 478 0
0
80 SquareLd
494 479 0
6
80 Square 2
495 480 0
8
80 LMSquare
496 481 0
18 80 Hollow
497 482 0
19 80 Shmoog
498 483 0
64 80 Mellow
499 484 0
65 80 SoloSine
500 485 0
66 80 SineLead
501 486 0
0
81 Saw.Lead
502 487 0
6
81 Saw 2
503 488 0
8
81 ThickSaw
504 489 0
18 81 DynaSaw
505 490 0
19 81 DigiSaw
506 491 0
20 81 Big Lead
507 492 0
24 81 HeavySyn
508 493 0
25 81 WaspySyn
509 494 0
40 81 PulseSaw
510 495 0
41 81 Dr. Lead
511 496 0
45 81 VeloLead
512 497 0
96 81 Seq Ana
513 498 0
0
82 CaliopLd
514 499 0
65 82 Pure Pad
515 500 0
0
83 Chiff Ld
516 501 0
64 83 Rubby
517 502 0
0
84 CharanLd
518 503 0
64 84 DistLead
519 504 0
65 84 WireLead
520 505 0
0
85 Voice Ld
521 506 0
24 85 SynthAah
522 507 0
64 85 VoxLead
523 508 0
0
86 Fifth Ld
524 509 0
35 86 Big Five
525 510 0
0
87 Bass &Ld
526 511 0
16 87 Big&Low
527 512 0
64 87 Fat&Prky
528 513 0
65 87 SoftWurl
Synth Pad
529 514 0
0
88 NewAgePd
530 515 0
64 88 Fantasy2
531 516 0
0
89 Warm Pad
532 517 0
16 89 ThickPad

MIDI
PSR-730 PSR-630 Bank Select Program
Voice Voice
Voice Name
Change
Number Number MSB LSB Number
533 518 0
17 89 Soft Pad
534 519 0
18 89 SinePad
535 520 0
64 89 Horn Pad
536 521 0
65 89 RotarStr
537 522 0
0
90 PolySyPd
538 523 0
64 90 PolyPd80
539 524 0
65 90 ClickPad
540 525 0
66 90 Ana Pad
541 526 0
67 90 SquarPad
542 527 0
0
91 ChoirPad
543 528 0
64 91 Heaven2
544 529 0
66 91 Itopia
545 530 0
67 91 CC Pad
546 531 0
0
92 BowedPad
547 532 0
64 92 Glacier
548 533 0
65 92 GlassPad
549 534 0
0
93 MetalPad
550 535 0
64 93 Tine Pad
551 536 0
65 93 Pan Pad
552 537 0
0
94 Halo Pad
553 538 0
0
95 SweepPad
554 539 0
20 95 Shwimmer
555 540 0
27 95 Converge
556 541 0
64 95 PolarPad
557 542 0
66 95 Celstial
Synth Effects
558 543 0
0
96 Rain
559 544 0
45 96 ClaviPad
560 545 0
64 96 HrmoRain
561 546 0
65 96 AfrcnWnd
562 547 0
66 96 Caribean
563 548 0
0
97 SoundTrk
564 549 0
27 97 Prologue
565 550 0
64 97 Ancestrl
566 551 0
0
98 Crystal
567 552 0
12 98 SynDrCmp
568 553 0
14 98 Popcorn
569 554 0
18 98 TinyBell
570 555 0
35 98 RndGlock
571 556 0
40 98 GlockChi
572 557 0
41 98 ClearBel
573 558 0
42 98 ChorBell
574 559 0
64 98 SynMalet
575 560 0
65 98 SftCryst
576 561 0
66 98 LoudGlok
577 562 0
67 98 XmasBell
578 563 0
68 98 VibeBell
579 564 0
69 98 DigiBell
580 565 0
70 98 AirBells
581 566 0
71 98 BellHarp
582 567 0
72 98 Gamelmba
583 568 0
0
99 Atmosphr
584 569 0
18 99 WarmAtms
585 570 0
19 99 HollwRls
586 571 0
40 99 NylonEP
587 572 0
64 99 NylnHarp
588 573 0
65 99 Harp Vox
589 574 0
66 99 AtmosPad
590 575 0
67 99 Planet
591 576 0
0 100 Bright
592 577 0
64 100 FantaBel
593 578 0
96 100 Smokey
594 579 0
0 101 Goblins
595 580 0
64 101 GobSyn
596 581 0
65 101 50sSciFi

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Voice List

MIDI
PSR-730 PSR-630 Bank Select Program
Voice Voice
Voice Name
Number Number MSB LSB Change
Number
597 582 0
66 101 Ring Pad
598 583 0
67 101 Ritual
599 584 0
68 101 ToHeaven
600 585 0
70 101 Night
601 586 0
71 101 Glisten
602 587 0
96 101 BelChoir
603 588 0
0 102 Echoes
604 589 0
8 102 EchoPad2
605 590 0
14 102 Echo Pan
606 591 0
64 102 EchoBell
607 592 0
65 102 Big Pan
608 593 0
66 102 SynPiano
609 594 0
67 102 Creation
610 595 0
68 102 Stardust
611 596 0
69 102 Reso Pan
612 597 0
0 103 Sci-Fi
613 598 0
64 103 Starz
Ethnic
614 599 0
0 104 Sitar
615 600 0
32 104 DetSitar
616 601 0
35 104 Sitar 2
617 602 0
96 104 Tambra
618 603 0
97 104 Tamboura
619 604 0
0 105 Banjo
620 605 0
28 105 MuteBnjo
621 606 0
96 105 Rabab
622 607 0
97 105 Gopichnt
623 608 0
98 105 Oud
624 609 0
0 106 Shamisen
625 610 0
0 107 Koto
626 611 0
96 107 T. Koto
627 612 0
97 107 Kanoon
628 613 0
0 108 Kalimba
629 614 0
0 109 Bagpipe
630 615 0
0 110 Fiddle
631 616 0
0 111 Shanai
632 617 0
64 111 Shanai2
633 618 0
96 111 Pungi
634 619 0
97 111 Hichriki
Percussive
635 620 0
0 112 TnklBell
636 621 0
96 112 Bonang
637 622 0
97 112 Gender
638 623 0
98 112 Gamelan
639 624 0
99 112 S.Gamlan
640 625 0 100 112 Rama Cym
641 626 0 101 112 AsianBel
642 627 0
0 113 Agogo
643 628 0
0 114 SteelDrm
644 629 0
97 114 GlasPerc
645 630 0
98 114 ThaiBell
646 631 0
0 115 WoodBlok
647 632 0
96 115 Castanet
648 633 0
0 116 TaikoDrm
649 634 0
96 116 Gr.Cassa
650 635 0
0 117 MelodTom
651 636 0
64 117 Mel Tom2
652 637 0
65 117 Real Tom
653 638 0
66 117 Rock Tom
654 639 0
0 118 Syn.Drum
655 640 0
64 118 Ana Tom
656 641 0
65 118 ElecPerc
657 642 0
0 119 RevCymbl
Sound Effects
658 643 0
0 120 FretNoiz

MIDI
PSR-730 PSR-630 Bank Select Program
Voice Voice
Change
Number Number MSB LSB Number
659 644 0
0 121
660 645 0
0 122
661 646 0
0 123
662 647 0
0 124
663 648 0
0 125
664 649 0
0 126
665 650 0
0 127
SFX
666 651 64
0
0
667 652 64
0
1
668 653 64
0
3
669 654 64
0
16
670 655 64
0
32
671 656 64
0
33
672 657 64
0
34
673 658 64
0
35
674 659 64
0
36
675 660 64
0
37
676 661 64
0
48
677 662 64
0
49
678 663 64
0
50
679 664 64
0
54
680 665 64
0
55
681 666 64
0
64
682 667 64
0
65
683 668 64
0
66
684 669 64
0
67
685 670 64
0
68
686 671 64
0
69
687 672 64
0
70
688 673 64
0
80
689 674 64
0
81
690 675 64
0
82
691 676 64
0
83
692 677 64
0
84
693 678 64
0
85
694 679 64
0
86
695 680 64
0
87
696 681 64
0
88
697 682 64
0
89
698 683 64
0
90
699 684 64
0
96
700 685 64
0
97
701 686 64
0
98
702 687 64
0
99
703 688 64
0 100
704 689 64
0 112
705 690 64
0 113
706 691 64
0 114
707 692 64
0 115

Voice Name
BrthNoiz
Seashore
Tweet
Telphone
Helicptr
Applause
Gunshot
CuttngNz
CttngNz2
Str Slap
Fl.KClik
Rain
Thunder
Wind
Stream
Bubble
Feed
Dog
Horse
Bird 2
Ghost
Maou
Tel.Dial
DoorSqek
Door Slam
Scratch
Scratch 2
WindChm
Telphon2
CarEngin
Car Stop
Car Pass
CarCrash
Siren
Train
Jetplane
Starship
Burst
Coaster
SbMarine
Laughing
Scream
Punch
Heart
FootStep
MchinGun
LaserGun
Xplosion
FireWork

139

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Drum Kit List

• “<——” indicates that the drum kit is the same as “Standard Kit1”.
• Each percussion voice uses one note.
• The note numbers and note names printed on the keyboard are one octave higher than the
MIDI note numbers and note names shown in the list. For example, the note number and
note name, #36 and C1, on the keyboard correspond to the MIDI note number and note
name, #24 and C0, shown in the list.
• Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 … 4) cannot be played simultaneously.

PSR-730 Voice#
PSR-630 Voice#
Bank MSB#
Bank LSB#
Program Change#
MIDI
Note#
Note
13
C#-1 *3
14
D-1
*3
15
D#-1
16
E-1
17
F-1
*4
18
F#-1
*4
19
G-1
20
G#-1
21
A-1
22
A#-1
23
B-1
24
C0
25
C#0
26
D0
27
D#0
28
E0
29
F0
30
F#0
31
G0
32
G#0
33
A0
34
A#0
35
B0
36
C1
37
C#1
38
D1
39
D#1
40
E1
41
F1
42
F#1
*1
43
G1
44
G#1
*1
45
A1
46
A#1
*1
47
B1
48
C2
49
C#2
50
D2
51
D#2
52
E2
53
F2
54
F#2
55
G2
56
G#2
57
A2
58
A#2
59
B2
60
C3
61
C#3
62
D3
63
D#3
64
E3
65
F3
66
F#3
67
G3
68
G#3
69
A3
70
A#3
71
B3
72
C4
73
C#4
74
D4
75
D#4
76
E4
77
F4
78
F#4
79
G4
80
G#4
*2
81
A4
*2
82
A#4
83
B4
84
C5
85
C#5
86
D5
87
D#5
88
E5
89
F5
90
F#5
91
G5

140

216
201
127
0
0
Standard Kit 1
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl L
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl H
Snare Roll
Castanet
Snare L
Sticks
Bass Drum L
Open Rim Shot
Bass Drum M
Bass Drum H
Side Stick
Snare M
Hand Clap
Snare H
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2
Bongo H
Bongo L
Conga H Mute
Conga H Open
Conga L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Agogo H
Agogo L
Cabasa
Maracas
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Shaker
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree

217
202
127
0
1
Standard Kit 2
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Snare Roll 2
<——
Snare L 2
<——
<——
Open Rim Shot 2
Bass Drum M 2
Bass Drum H 2
<——
Snare M 2
<——
Snare H 2
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——

218
203
127
0
8
Room Kit
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
BD Room
<——
SD Room L
<——
SD Room H
Room Tom 1
<——
Room Tom 2
<——
Room Tom 3
<——
Room Tom 4
Room Tom 5
<——
Room Tom 6
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——

219
204
127
0
16
Rock Kit
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
SD Rock M
<——
Bass Drum M
<——
Bass Drum H 3
BD Rock
<——
SD Rock
<——
SD Rock Rim
Rock Tom 1
<——
Rock Tom 2
<——
Rock Tom 3
<——
Rock Tom 4
Rock Tom 5
<——
Rock Tom 6
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——

220
205
127
0
24
Electronic Kit
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Reverse Cymbal
<——
Hi Q
Snare M
<——
Bass Drum H 4
<——
BD Rock
BD Gate
<——
SD Rock L
<——
SD Rock H
E Tom 1
<——
E Tom 2
<——
E Tom 3
<——
E Tom 4
E Tom 5
<——
E Tom 6
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——

221
206
127
0
25
Analog Kit
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Reverse Cymbal
<——
Hi Q
SD Rock H
<——
Bass Drum M
<——
BD Analog L
BD Analog H
Analog Side Stick
Analog Snare L
<——
Analog Snare H
Analog Tom 1
Analog HH Closed 1
Analog Tom 2
Analog HH Closed 2
Analog Tom 3
Analog HH Open
Analog Tom 4
Analog Tom 5
Analog Cymbal
Analog Tom 6
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Analog Cowbell
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Analog Conga H
Analog Conga M
Analog Conga L
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Analog Maracas
<——
<——
<——
<——
Analog Claves
<——
<——
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Drum Kit List

PSR-730 Voice#
PSR-630 Voice#
Bank MSB#
Bank LSB#
Program Change#
MIDI
Note#
Note
13
C#-1 *3
14
D-1
*3
15
D#-1
16
E-1
17
F-1
*4
18
F#-1
*4
19
G-1
20
G#-1
21
A-1
22
A#-1
23
B-1
24
C0
25
C#0
26
D0
27
D#0
28
E0
29
F0
30
F#0
31
G0
32
G#0
33
A0
34
A#0
35
B0
36
C1
37
C#1
38
D1
39
D#1
40
E1
41
F1
42
F#1
*1
43
G1
44
G#1
*1
45
A1
46
A#1
*1
47
B1
48
C2
49
C#2
50
D2
51
D#2
52
E2
53
F2
54
F#2
55
G2
56
G#2
57
A2
58
A#2
59
B2
60
C3
61
C#3
62
D3
63
D#3
64
E3
65
F3
66
F#3
67
G3
68
G#3
69
A3
70
A#3
71
B3
72
C4
73
C#4
74
D4
75
D#4
76
E4
77
F4
78
F#4
79
G4
80
G#4
*2
81
A4
*2
82
A#4
83
B4
84
C5
85
C#5
86
D5
87
D#5
88
E5
89
F5
90
F#5
91
G5

222
207
127
0
27
Dance Kit
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Reverse Cymbal
<——
Hi Q
AnSD Snappy
<——
AnBD Dance-1
AnSD OpenRim
AnBD Dance-2
AnBD Dance-3
Analog Side Stick
AnSD Q
<——
AnSD Ana+Acoustic
Analog Tom 1
AnHH Closed-3
Analog Tom 2
Analog HH Closed 2
Analog Tom 3
AnHH Open-2
Analog Tom 4
Analog Tom 5
Analog Cymbal
Analog Tom 6
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Analog Cowbell
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Analog Conga H
Analog Conga M
Analog Conga L
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Analog Maracas
<——
<——
<——
<——
Analog Claves
<——
<——
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——

223
208
127
0
32
Jazz Kit
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
BD Jazz
<——
SD Jazz L
<——
SD Jazz H
Jazz Tom 1
<——
Jazz Tom 2
<——
Jazz Tom 3
<——
Jazz Tom 4
Jazz Tom 5
<——
Jazz Tom 6
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——

224
209
127
0
40
Brush Kit
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Brush Slap L
<——
<——
<——
<——
BD Soft
<——
Brush Slap
<——
Brush Tap
Brush Tom 1
<——
Brush Tom 2
<——
Brush Tom 3
<——
Brush Tom 4
Brush Tom 5
<——
Brush Tom 6
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——

225
210
127
0
48

226
211
126
0
0

227
212
126
0
1

Classic Kit

SFX 1

SFX 2

<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Bass Drum L2
<——
Gran Casa
Gran Casa Mute
<——
Marching Sn M
<——
Marching Sn H
Jazz Tom 1
<——
Jazz Tom 2
<——
Jazz Tom 3
<——
Jazz Tom 4
Jazz Tom 5
Hand Cym.Open L
Jazz Tom 6
Hand Cym.Closed L
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Hand Cym.Open H
<——
Hand Cym.Closed H
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——

Guitar Cutting Noise
Guitar Cutting Noise 2
String Slap

Dial Tone
Door Creaking
Door Slam
Scratch
Scratch 2
Windchime
Telephone Ring2

FL.Key Click

Engine Start
Tire Screech
Car Passing
Crash
Siren
Train
Jetplane
Starship
Burst Noise
Coaster
SvMarine

Rain
Thunder
Wind
Stream
Bubble
Feed

Laughing
Screaming
Punch
Heartbeat
Footsteps

Dog
Horse Gallop
Bird 2

Machine Gun
Laser Gun
Explosion
FireWork

Ghost
Maou

141

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Style List

No

Name

No

Name

8BEAT

Name
LATIN

1

8Beat Pop 1

35

8Beat Rock Ballad

71

Bossa Nova 1

2

8Beat Pop 2

36

16Beat Rock Ballad

72

Bossa Nova 2

3

8Beat Uptempo

37

Hard Rock

73

Bossa Nova 3

4

8Beat Standard

38

Rock Shuffle

74

Salsa

5

Folkrock

39

6/8 Heavy Rock

75

Samba

6

Pop Rock 1

40

US Rock

76

Mambo

7

Pop Rock 2

41

8

8Beat Medium

9

8Beat Ballad

10
11

16Beat Rock

77

Beguine

RHYTHM&BLUES

78

Merengue

42

R&B

79

Bolero Lento

Epic Ballad

43

Funk 2

80

Espagnole

Piano Ballad

44

Soul

81

Cajun

45

Gospel Shuffle

16BEAT

CARIBBEAN

12

16Beat Pop

46

6/8 Gospel

82

Reggae 12

13

16Beat Shuffle 1

47

4/4 Blues

83

Pop Reggae

14

16Beat Shuffle 2

15

16Beat Ballad 1

48

Rock & Roll 1

84

Cha Cha

16

16Beat Ballad 2

49

Rock & Roll 2

85

Rhumba

17

16Beat Ballad 3

50

Boogie

86

Pasodoble

18

Funk 1

51

Twist

87

Tango Continental

19

Soul Ballad
52

Bluegrass 1

88

Foxtrot

20

Slow Rock 1

53

Bluegrass 2

89

Jive

21

Slow Rock 2

54

Country 2/4

90

Hully Gully

22

6/8 Ballad

55

8Beat Country

91

Big Band Quickstep

DANCE

56

Country Rock

23

Dance Pop 1

57

Cowboy Boogie

92

March 1

24

Dance Pop 2

58

Country Ballad

93

March 2

25

Techno

59

Country Shuffle

94

6/8 March 1

26

Eurobeat

60

Country Waltz

95

Polka

27

Euro House

28

Hip Hop

61

Swing

96

Standard Waltz

29

Trip Hop

62

Big Band Swing

97

Pop Waltz

30

Synth Boogie

63

Big Band Ballad

98

German Waltz

DISCO

64

Jazz Quartet

99

Viennese Waltz

Dixieland

100

Musette Waltz

6/8 BALLAD

142

No

ROCK

ROCK & ROLL

BALLROOM LATIN

COUNTRY&WESTERN

BALLROOM STANDARD

MARCH

TRADITIONAL JAZZ

31

70s Disco

32

Disco Tropical

65

33

Party Pop

66

Cool Jazz

34

Polka Pop

67

Jazz Ballad

68

Jazz Waltz

69

Fusion

70

Funky Fusion

CONTEMPORARY JAZZ

WALTZ

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,
About Digital Effects (Reverb/Chorus/DSP)

There are three types of digital effects installed in the PSR-630: the reverb effect (system
effect), the chorus effect (system effect) and the DSP effect (can be set as either as a system effect
or insertion effect).
In the PSR-730, the Multi Effect (EFFECT 1/2: insertion) is added to the three PSR-630
effects, for a total of five effects.
There are basically two ways to use the effects: with the DSP effect set as a system effect or
as a insertion effect. Each different way will be explained here.
Although not all the effect settings cannot be made by operating the PSR-730/630 panel
manually, some of them may be accessible through MIDI.

■ When DSP type Is Selected as a System Effect
• The three PSR-630 effects or the five PSR-730 effects will be connected as shown below.
• Since the PSR-730 Multi Effect (EFFECT 1/2) is an insertion effect, it will be applied to only one part from
among the R1/R2/L parts.
• The signal will enter reverb/chorus/DSP according to the send level (Depth) set for each, and the signal with
the effect applied will be output according to the return level that is set. The reverb/chorus/DSP send levels
(Depth) are set for each part (track) with the Revoice mode. The reverb/chorus/DSP return levels value are
set in common for all the parts.
• The stereo panning is available for each of the reverb, chorus and DSP at the output for their signals. Using
MIDI, the panning position for the effect can be set (page 158).
• If a “Send Chorus to Reverb” (page 158) signal is transmitted to the PSR-730/630 from an external MIDI
device, a signal can be sent from the chorus to the reverb (connected in series). Also, if a “Send Variation
(DSP) to Reverb” (page 159) signal is transmitted, a signal can be sent from the DSP to the reverb and in the
same way if a “Send Variation (DSP) to Chorus” signal (page 159) is transmitted a signal can be sent from
DSP to the chorus. If these signals are used, the three effects can be connected in series, or used separately,
and a lot of different effects can be produced.
The bold lines are stereo lines.
Effect 1 is valid for
only one part.
Effect 1 part

Effect 2 is valid for
only one part.
Effect 2 part

Dry/Wet

R1 Voice

Dry/Wet

EFF1
Effect 1 on/off

EFF2
Effect 2 on/off

dry level
rev send

REVERB

cho send
DSP send

Dry/Wet

Dry/Wet

R2 Voice

EFF1
Effect 1 on/off

EFF2
Effect 2 on/off

PAN
reverb
pan

reverb
return

PAN
chorus
pan

chorus
return

dry level
rev send

send chorus to reverb

cho send
DSP send

Dry/Wet

Dry/Wet

L Voice

EFF2

EFF1
Effect 1 on/off

Effect 2 on/off

dry level

cho send
DSP send

send variation to chorus

Dry/Wet

Dry/Wet

EFF1
Effect 1 on/off

EFF2
Effect 2 on/off

dry level
rev send

DSP
(VARIATION)

cho send
DSP send

Channel 16

OUT
EQ
Digital
Equalizer
(PSR-730)

send variation to reverb

All tracks that can
be revoiced.

MIDI
Channel 1

CHORUS

rev send

PAN
variation
pan

DSP
return

Multi Effect
(PSR-730)

DRY LINE

143

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
About Digital Effects (Reverb/Chorus/DSP)

■ When DSP type Is Selected as a Insertion Effect

• The three PSR-630 effects or the five PSR-730 effects will be connected as shown below.
• Since the PSR-730 Multi Effect (EFFECT 1/2) is an insertion effect, it will be applied to only one part from
among the R1/R2/L parts.
• The signal will enter reverb and chorus according to the send level (Depth) set for each, and the signal with
the effect applied will be output according to the return level that is set. The reverb and chorus send levels
(Depth) are set for each part (track) with the Revoice mode. The reverb and chorus return level value is set
in common for all the parts.
• The stereo panning is available for each of the reverb and chorus at the output for their signals. Using MIDI,
the panning position for the effect can be set (page 158).
• If a “Send Chorus to Reverb” (page 158) signal is transmitted to the PSR-730/630 from an external MIDI
device, a signal can be sent from the chorus to the reverb (connected in series).
• The signal will enter DSP with the Dry/Wet (Depth) that is set, and a signal with the effect applied will be
output.The DSP Dry/Wet (Depth) are set for only R1 voice with the revoice mode. The DSP return level cannot
be set.

The bold lines are stereo lines.
Effect 1 is valid for
only one part.
Effect 1 part

Effect 2 is valid for
only one part.
Effect 2 part

Dry/Wet

R1 Voice

Dry/Wet

EFF1
Effect 1 on/off

EFF2
Effect 2 on/off

EFF1
Effect 1 on/off

dry

DSP

rev send

DSP on/off

EFF2

reverb reverb
return
pan

REVERB

PAN

rev send
cho send

send chorus to reverb

dry

Dry/Wet

EFF1
Effect 1 on/off

cho send
dry

Effect 2 on/off

Dry/Wet

L Voice

DSP Dry/Wet (Depth)

Dry/Wet

Dry/Wet

R2 Voice

Variation is valid for
only one part.
variation part

EFF2

rev send
cho send

Effect 2 on/off

CHORUS
PAN
chorus chorus
return
pan

All tracks that can
be revoiced.

Dry/Wet

Dry/Wet

MIDI
Channel 1

EFF1
Effect 1 on/off

Channel 16

144

EFF2
Effect 2 on/off

Multi Effect
(PSR-730)

DSP Dry/Wet (Depth)

dry

DSP

rev send

DSP on/off

OUT
EQ
Digital
Equalizer
(PSR-730)

cho send

DRY LINE

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
About Digital Effects (Reverb/Chorus/DSP)

The Digital Effect List
No.

Effect Type

Features

REVERB
01~04

Hall1~4

System

Concert hall reverb.

05~08

Room1~4

System

Small room reverb.

09, 10

Stage1, 2

System

Reverb for solo instruments.

11, 12

Plate1, 2

System

Simulated steel plate reverb.

13

OFF

—

No effect.

CHORUS
01~05

Chorus1~5

System

Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.

06~09

Flanger1~4

System

Pronounced three-phase modulation with a slight metallic sound.

10

OFF

—

No effect.

DSP
01~04

Hall1~4

System

Concert hall reverb.

05~08

Room1~4

System

Small room reverb.

09, 10

Stage1, 2

System

Reverb for solo instruments.

11, 12

Plate1, 2

System

Simulated steel plate reverb.

13, 14

Early Reflection1, 2

System

Early reflections only.

15

Gate Reverb

System

Gated reverb effect, in which the reverberation is quickly cut off for special
effects.

16

Reverse Gate

System

Similar to Gate Reverb, but with a reverse increase in reverb.

17~21

Chorus1~5

System

Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.

22~25

Flanger1~4

System

Pronounced three-phase modulation with slight metallic sound.

26

Symphonic

System

Exceptionally rich & deep chorusing.

27

Phaser

System

Pronounced, metallic modulation with periodic phase change.

28~32

Rotary Speaker 1~5

Insertion

Rotary speaker simulation.

33, 34

Tremolo 1, 2

Insertion

Rich Tremolo effect with both volume and pitch modulation.

35

Guitar Tremolo

Insertion

Simulated electric guitar tremolo.

36

Auto Pan

Insertion

Several panning effects that automatically shift the sound position (left, right,
front, back).

37

Auto Wah

Insertion

Repeating filter sweep “wah” effect.

38

Delay L, C, R

System

Three independent delays, for the left, right and center stereo positions.

39

Delay L, R

System

Initial delay for each stereo channel, and two separate feedback delays.

40

Echo

System

Stereo delay, with independent Feedback Level controls for each channel.

41

Cross Delay

System

Complex effect that sends the delayed repeats “bouncing” between the left and
right channels.

42

Distortion Hard

Insertion

Hard-edge distortion.

43

Distortion Soft

Insertion

This type is not so hard compared with Distortion Hard.

44

EQ Disco

Insertion

Discotype equalizer program to boost high and low frequencies.

45

EQ Telephone

Insertion

Equalizer program which eliminates higher and lower frequencies to simulate
the sounds through telephone.

46

OFF

—

No effect.

145

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,
About Digital Effects (Reverb/Chorus/DSP)

The Multi Effect List (PSR-730)
No.

Effect Type

Features

01~04

Hall1~4

Concert hall reverb.

05~08

Room1~4

Small room reverb.

09, 10

Stage1, 2

Reverb for solo instruments.

11, 12

Plate1, 2

Simulated steel plate reverb.

13~17

Chorus1~5

Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.

18~21

Flanger1~4

Pronounced three-phase modulation with a slight metallic sound.

22

Symphonic

Exceptionally rich & deep chorusing.

23

Phaser

Pronounced, metallic modulation with periodic phase change.

24~28

Rotary Speaker 1~5

Rotary speaker simulation.

29, 30

Tremolo 1, 2

Rich Tremolo effect with both volume and pitch modulation.

31

Guitar Tremolo

Simulated electric guitar tremolo.

32

Auto Pan

Several panning effects that automatically shift the sound position (left, right, front, back).

33

Auto Wah

Repeating filter sweep “wah” effect.

34

Delay L, C, R

Three independent delays, for the left, right and center stereo positions.

35

Delay L, R

Initial delay for each stereo channel, and two separate feedback delays.

36

Echo

Stereo delay, with independent Feedback Level controls for each channel.

37

Cross Delay

Complex effect that sends the delayed repeats “bouncing” between the left and right
channels.

38

Distortion Hard

Hard-edge distortion.

39

Distortion Soft

This type is not so hard compared with Distortion Hard.

40

EQ Disco*

Discotype equalizer program to boost high and low frequencies.

41

EQ Telephone*

Equalizer program which eliminates higher and lower frequencies to simulate the sounds
through telephone.

42

Off

No effect.

• When the effect type marked with * is selected, Dry/Wet section on the display
will show “- - -” indicating that Dry/Wet setting is disabled.

146

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Harmony Type List

No.

Type

Description

1

Duet

This harmony type produces a duophonic melody with the second voice below the
melody line.

2

Trio

This harmony type generates two voices in addition to the melody voice.

3

4Part

Three harmony notes are generated to produce a four-note chord.

4

4 Part Jazz

Similar to the preceding type, but depending on the chords played this type will
sometimes produce a more colorful sound.

5

Country

Similar to Duet, but the second voice is above the melody line.

6

Octave

One note is added an octave below the melody.

7

Tremolo

The note(s) pressed and held is(are) repeatedly played at the preset tempo.

8

Tremolo Duet

Combination of Tremolo and Duet; produces a duophonic melody with two voices played
alternately.

9

Tremolo Octave

Combination of Tremolo and Octave; produces a duophonic melody with two voices
played alternately (the second voice is an octave below the melody).

10

Strumming

This type adds arpeggiated pattern to the melody.

11

Trio Delay

Two notes slightly below the melody are added to create three parts. Additional notes are
delayed slightly.

12

Vibraphone & Jazz Guitar

Two voices, Vibraphone and Jazz Guitar, below the melody are added to create three
parts.

13

Trumpet & Sax

Two voices, Trumpet and Saxophone, below the melody are added to create three parts.

14

Back Vocal

“Vocal” voice is added to the melody to get a vocal part in the background.

15

Strings

“Strings” voice is added to the melody to create an orchestral atmosphere.

16

Forest

“Twitterings” of a bird are added to the melody to create an effect as if you were playing
outside.

• The Harmonies except for the types 6,7 and 9
are applied to the R1 voice according to the
chords detected in the Accompaniment section.

147

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Refining User Styles with Style File Format

■ Style File (Auto Accompaniment) Format
Source Pattern
ZSource chord root setting
XSource chord type setting
Chord change

NTR (Note Transposition Rule)
CNote Transposition rule setting

NTT (Note Transposition Table)
VNote Transposition table setting

The Style File Format (SFF) is a compilation of all of Yamaha’s auto
accompaniment know-how into a single unified format.
Since the PSR-730/630 supports the SFF format, you can enjoy
many styles in addition to the 100 preset SFF styles. Just insert a disk
with SFF styles on it into the disk drive and you can load them into the
PSR-730/630.
By using the user style function, you can take advantage of the power
of the SFF format and freely create your own user styles.
With the Auto Accompaniment function, chord changes (transpositions) are applied to the source pattern that forms the basis for the
accompaniment. The “Note Transposition Rule” and “Note Transposition Table” that are set for each track are used for this. After the
transposition is made, the transposed notes are checked to see if
they can be correctly played within the range of the instrument, then
the accompaniment is played.
The following SFF settings can be executed only after recording each
track (still in the Record Ready Mode or Rehearsal Mode).

Other Settings
BHighest Key setting
NNote range (Low Limit, High Limit) settings
MRetrigger Rule (RTR) setting

• The SFF settings can be done only when the Record Ready Mode or
Rehearsal Mode is engaged.
• The SFF settings cannot be made for the RHYTHM 1/2 tracks.

Accompaniment

Source Pattern Settings
Z Source Chord Root setting
X Source Chord Type setting

C Note Transposition rule setting

Set the key in which the source pattern will be played when the
user style is created. The default setting is CM7. (The source
chord root is “C” and the source chord type is “M7.”
After finishing recording, with the recorded track selected, select
the “S.ChordRoot” sub menu and use the [–] and [+] buttons or
the Data Dial to select the chord root.

S.ChordR oot:A

nd P

After setting the source chord root, select the “S.Chord Type” sub
menu and use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Data Dial to select
the chord type.

S.ChordT ype:m

nd P

See page 150 for the available chord types, chord notes and
scale notes.

148

NTR (Note Transposition Rule) Setting

Set the transposition rule for using the transposition table (see
item 4 below) when transposing. There are two types of rules.
Root Transposition Rule
This rule maintains the mutual relationship in pitch between
each note when transposing. Set this for tracks that contain
melody-like phrases.
Root Fixed Rule
To the extent possible, this rule maintains the pitch of each note
in the source pattern. Set it for piano-type or guitar-type chord
picking tracks.
After finishing recording, with the recorded track selected, select
“NTR” from the sub menu and use the [–] and [+] buttons or the
Data Dial to select the transposition rule.

NTR::::: ooooooF ixed

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Refining User Styles with Style File Format

NTT (Note Transposition Table) Setting
V Note Transposition table setting
Set the table for making the chord change (transposition) in the
source pattern. There are 6 tables, as explained below.
Bypass
No transposition is done.

N Note range (Low Limit, High Limit) settings

Set the note range (low and high limits) for the voices recorded
on user style tracks. By setting the note range, you can prevent
unrealistic notes (such as high notes from a bass or low notes
from a piccolo) from being produced and have them shifted to an
octave within the note range.
Example) When low limit is “C3” and high limit is “D4.”

Melody
This table is suitable for melody line transposition. Use it for
tracks with melodies like PHRASE 1/2.
Bass
This table is suitable for bass line transposition. The table
contents are the same as for “Melody,” but it recognizes on-bass
chords such as in the Fingered2 mode. Use it for tracks with low
pitched instruments such as bass tracks.
Chord
This table is suitable for chord transposition. Use it for tracks like
the CHORD 1/2 tracks, with piano-type or guitar-type chord
picking tracks.
M-m Only (M)
This table lowers the third by a semitone when changing from a
major chord to a minor chord or raises the minor third by a
semitone when changing from a minor chord to a major chord.
It doesn’t change any other notes.
M-m Only (H)
When changing from a major chord to a minor chord, this flattens
both the third and the sixth by a semitone. When changing from
a minor chord to a major, it raises the flatted third and sixth by a
semitone. It doesn’t change any other notes.
After finishing recording, with the recorded track selected, select
“NTT” from the sub menu and use the [–] and [+] buttons or the
Data Dial to select the transposition table.

NTT::::: ooBypas s

Other Settings
B Highest Key setting
Set the highest key (upper limit of the octaves) of the note
transposing for the Source Chord Root setting [1]. The notes
designated higher than the highest key will actually be played
back in the octave just below the highest key. This setting is
effective only when you select the Root Transposition Rule from
the item [3].

Root change
Notes played

CM
E3-G3-C4

C#M
F3-G#3-C#4

....
....

FM
F3-A3-C4

After finishing recording, with the recorded track selected, select
“LowLimit” and “HighLimit” from the submenu and use the [-] and
[+] buttons or the Data Dial to set the note range.

LowLimit :
HighLimi t:

28 nd P
127 nd P

M Retrigger Rule (RTR) setting
Set the method for handling notes as they are being produced
during chord change (transposition). There are 5 rule types, as
explained below.
Stop
The note is stopped while being produced, and the next note is
sounded.
PitchShift
The pitch of the note being produced is shifted to match the new
chord type.
PShftToRoot
The pitch of the note being produced is shifted to the note of the
new chord root. The octave of the note is not changed by the shift.
Retrigger
The note is stopped while being produced, and it is sounded
again with its pitch matching that of the new chord type.
Ret.ToRoot
The note is stopped while being produced, and it is sounded
again with the note of the new chord root.
After finishing recording, with the recorded track selected, select
“RTR” from the sub menu and use the [–] and [+] buttons or the
Data Dial to select the retrigger rule.

RTR::::: o

oSto p

Example) When highest key is “F”.
Root change
Notes played

CM
C#M
DM
.... FM
F#M
C3-E3-G3 C#3-F3-G#3 D3-F#3-A3 .... F3-A3-C4 F#2-A#2-C#3

After finishing recording, with the recorded track selected, select
“HighestKey” from the submenu and use the [-] and [+] buttons
or the Data Dial to select the highest key.

HighestK ey: D#

nd P

149

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Refining User Styles with Style File Format
■ About the Source Chord Type

When you change the chord of the source pattern from the default CM7 to others
(see “Source Pattern Settings” on page 148), the chord notes and scale notes will
change depending on the currently selected chord type.
See page 101 for the information on the chord note and scale note.
[ex.] Source Chord Root of “C”
CM 6 [Maj6]

CM [Maj]

CM 7

CM 7 (#11)[Maj7(#11)] CM add9

[Maj7]

[Maj(9)]

C
C S C

C 7 (9)

C S

C S C

C 6 (9)

[Maj7(9)]

C C S

C S C

Caug

[Maj6(9)]

C S C

C S C

Cm

[aug]

Cm 7

C S C

Cm 7 b5

[min7]

C

C C C

C

C

S C

S C

S C

C 7 sus4

CmM 7 (9) [minMaj7(9)] Cdim

C

C C

C 7 b5 [7b5]

[7sus4]

C C

C

150

C

C
C
[1+8]

C

C 1+5

C

C 7 (#9) [7(#9)]

C C
C S C
[1+5]

C

S

C
C

C
C

S

C

Csus 4

[sus4]

C S

C C

C
C S

C

C

C

C 7 (13)

C S

CM 7 aug

[Maj7aug]

[7(13)]

C
C S C

C 7 aug

C 1+2+5

C C S

S C

[1+2+5]

C S

C C

[7aug]

C
C S C S

C

C

C S C

C
C

C C

C 7 [7]

C 7 (#11) [7(#11)]

[7(9)]

C

C S

C S

C C C

S
C

S

C

C 7 (b13) [7(b13)]

C

[min7(11)]

C
C S

Cdim 7 [dim7]

C S

C

C 7 (9)

C S C

[7(b9)]

C

C

S C

S C C

Cm 7 (11)

C

C C

[dim]

C
S C

C
C

S C

[min6]

C S

C

C C

C

C S

C 1+8

C

S

C

C

C S C

S C

Cm 7 (9) [min7(9)]

[min(9)]

C S

C

C
C S

C S C

Cm (9)

[min7b5]

C

CmM 7 [minMaj7]

C 7 (b9)

C C S

C C C

Cm 6

[min]

S C S
C C C

C S C

S C C
C S C

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Troubleshooting

Something not working as it should? In many cases what appears to be a malfunction can
be traced to a simple error that can be remedied immediately. Before assuming that your PSR730/630 is faulty, please check the following points.
PROBLEM
The speakers produce a “pop” sound whenever the power is
turned ON or OFF.

POSSIBLE CAUSE/SOLUTION
This is normal and is no cause for alarm.

The volume is reduced or the sound is distorted.
The registration memory doesn’t work properly.
Recorded song data will not play back properly.

The batteries probably need to be replaced. Either replace all six
batteries, or use an AC power adaptor.

The display goes bland and all panel controls are reset.

No sound when the keyboard is played.

Not all simultaneously-played notes sound.
Auto Accompaniment seems to “skip” when the keyboard is
played.

Auto Accompaniment doesn’t sound when started.

The R1/R2/L voice volume settings could be set too low. Make sure
the voice volumes are set at appropriate levels (pages 14, 111).
The Local Control function could be turned off. Make sure Local
Control is turned on (page 127).
You are probably exceeding the maximum polyphony of the
PSR-730/630. The PSR-730 can play up to 64 notes (32 notes
for PSR-630) at the same time — including split, dual, autoaccompaniment, song, and multi pad notes. Notes exceeding
this limit will not sound.
The MIDI Clock mode may be set to “on”. Make sure it is turned
“off” (page 128).
Make sure that all accompaniment tracks are turned on, and that
the they are all set to appropriate volume levels.

Auto accompaniment won’t function properly. No lower keyboard sound.

Make sure you are using fingerings recognized by the selected
fingering mode, and are playing in the Auto Accompaniment
section of the keyboard.
Are you sure you’re playing in the Auto-Accompaniment section
of the keyboard? Make sure that the Auto Accompaniment split
point is set appropriately (page 30).
Are you playing chords that the PSR-730/630 can recognize
(see chord types on page 31~)?

The Harmony function will not turn on.

Harmony cannot be turned on when the FULL KEYBOARD
fingering mode is selected or if a percussion kit voice is selected.
Select an appropriate fingering mode or voice.

Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch.

Make sure that the scale tuning value for those notes is set to “0”
(page 115).

151

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Data Backup & Initialization

■ Data Backup

Except for the data listed below, all PSR-730/630 panel settings are reset to their initial
settings whenever the power is turned on.
• Registration Memory
• User Style Data
• User Pad Data
• MIDI Transmit Settings
• MIDI Receive Settings

The data listed above can be backed up — i.e. retained in memory — as long as a
working set of batteries is installed and you keep the following Off/On procedure.
z Turn the power OFF by pressing the [STAND BY/ON] switch.
x Unplug the DC output cable of the PA-6 from the DC IN 10-12V jack on the rear
panel of the PSR-730/630.
c Then unplug the PA-6 Power Adaptor from the wall AC outlet.
When turning the power ON, simply reverse the procedure.

■ Data Initialization
All data can be initialized and restored to the factory preset condition by turning on the
power while holding the highest (rightmost) white key on the keyboard. “Backup RAM
Clear” will appear briefly on the display.
STAND BY
ON

Backup R AM Clea r

152

• All registration and
User Style/Pad
memory data, plus
the other settings
listed above, will be
erased and/or
changed when the
data initialization
procedure is carried
out.
• Carrying out the
data initialization
procedure will usually restore normal
operation if the PSR730/630 freezes or
begins to act erratically for any reason.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,
MIDI Data Format

Many MIDI messages listed in the MIDI Data Format are expressed in decimal
numbers, binary numbers and hexadecimal numbers. Hexadecimal numbers
may include the letter “H” as a suffix. Also, “n” can freely be defined as any
whole number.
To enter data/values, refer to the table below.
Decimal
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63

Hexadecimal
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F

Binary
0000 0000
0000 0001
0000 0010
0000 0011
0000 0100
0000 0101
0000 0110
0000 0111
0000 1000
0000 1001
0000 1010
0000 1011
0000 1100
0000 1101
0000 1110
0000 1111
0001 0000
0001 0001
0001 0010
0001 0011
0001 0100
0001 0101
0001 0110
0001 0111
0001 1000
0001 1001
0001 1010
0001 1011
0001 1100
0001 1101
0001 1110
0001 1111
0010 0000
0010 0001
0010 0010
0010 0011
0010 0100
0010 0101
0010 0110
0010 0111
0010 1000
0010 1001
0010 1010
0010 1011
0010 1100
0010 1101
0010 1110
0010 1111
0011 0000
0011 0001
0011 0010
0011 0011
0011 0100
0011 0101
0011 0110
0011 0111
0011 1000
0011 1001
0011 1010
0011 1011
0011 1100
0011 1101
0011 1110
0011 1111

Decimal
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127

Hexadecimal
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F

Binary
0100 0000
0100 0001
0100 0010
0100 0011
0100 0100
0100 0101
0100 0110
0100 0111
0100 1000
0100 1001
0100 1010
0100 1011
0100 1100
0100 1101
0100 1110
0100 1111
0101 0000
0101 0001
0101 0010
0101 0011
0101 0100
0101 0101
0101 0110
0101 0111
0101 1000
0101 1001
0101 1010
0101 1011
0101 1100
0101 1101
0101 1110
0101 1111
0110 0000
0110 0001
0110 0010
0110 0011
0110 0100
0110 0101
0110 0110
0110 0111
0110 1000
0110 1001
0110 1010
0110 1011
0110 1100
0110 1101
0110 1110
0110 1111
0111 0000
0111 0001
0111 0010
0111 0011
0111 0100
0111 0101
0111 0110
0111 0111
0111 1000
0111 1001
0111 1010
0111 1011
0111 1100
0111 1101
0111 1110
0111 1111

• Except the table above, for example 144-159(decimal)/9nH/1001 0000-1001
1111(binary) displays the Note On Message for each channel (1-16). 176-191/
BnH/1011 0000-1011 1111 displays the Control Change Message for each
channel (1-16). 192-207/CnH/1100 0000-1100 1111 displays the Program
Change Message for each channel (1-16). 240/FOH/1111 0000 denotes the
start of a System Exclusive Message. 247/F7H/1111 0111 denotes the end of
a System Exclusive Message.
• aaH (hexidecimal)/0aaaaaaa (binary) denotes the data address. The address
contains High, Mid, and Low.
• bbH/0bbbbbbb denotes the byte count.
• ccH/0ccccccc denotes the check sum.
• ddH/0ddddddd denotes the data/value.

(1) TRANSMIT FLOW
MIDI ← NOTE ON/OFF
OUT
CONTROL CHANGE
BANK SELECT MSB
BANK SELECT LSB
DATA ENTRY MSB
DATA ENTRY LSB
MAIN VOLUME
PANPOT
EXPRESSION
SUSTAIN
SOSTENUTE
SOFT PEDAL
REVERB SEND LEVEL
VARIATION SEND LEVEL
PROGRAM CHANGE
PITCH BEND

9nH
BnH
BnH,00H
BnH,20H
BnH,06H
BnH,26H
BnH,07H
BnH,0AH
BnH,0BH
BnH,40H
BnH,42H
BnH,43H
BnH,5BH
BnH,5EH
CnH
EnH

SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE


UNIVERSAL REALTIME
F0H 7FH.....F7H
UNIVERSAL NON-REALTIME F0H 7EH.....F7H

XG PARAMETER CHANGE
F0H 43H 1nH 4CH aaH aaH aaH ddH
.....ddH F7H
XG BULK DUMP
F0H 43H 0nH 4CH bbH bbH aaH aaH
aaH ddH.....ddH ccH F7H
SPECIAL OPERATORS
SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE
MIDI CLOCK
START
STOP
ACTIVE SENSING

F8H
FAH
FCH
FEH

(2) RECEIVE FLOW
MIDI → NOTE OFF
IN
NOTE ON/OFF
CONTROL CHANGE
BANK SELECT MSB
BANK SELECT LSB
MODULATION
PORTAMENTO TIME
DATA ENTRY MSB
DATA ENTRY LSB
MAIN VOLUME
PANPOT
EXPRESSION
SUSTAIN
PORTAMENTO
SOSTENUTO
SOFT PEDAL
HARMONIC CONTENT
RELEASE TIME
ATTACK TIME
BRIGHTNESS
PORTAMENTO CONTROL
REVERB SEND LEVEL
CHORUS SEND LEVEL
VARIATION SEND LEVEL
DATA INCREMENT
DATA DECREMENT
NRPN LSB
NRPN MSB
VIBRATO RATE
VIBRATO RATE
VIBRATO DEPTH
VIBRATO DELAY
FILTER CUTOFF FREQ.
FILTER RESONANCE
AEG ATTACK TIME
AEG DECAY TIME
AEG RELEASE
DRUM INST
CUTOFF FREQ.
FILTER RESONANCE
AEG ATTACK RATE
AEG DECAY RATE
PITCH COARSE

8nH
9nH

BnH,00H
BnH,20H
BnH,01H
BnH,05H
BnH,06H
BnH,26H
BnH,07H
BnH,0AH
BnH,0BH
BnH,40H
BnH,41H
BnH,42H
BnH,43H
BnH,47H
BnH,48H
BnH,49H
BnH,4AH
BnH,54H
BnH,5BH
BnH,5DH
BnH,5EH
BnH,60H
BnH,61H
BnH,62H
BnH,63H
BnH,63H,01H,62H,08H,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,01H,62H,08H,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,01H,62H,09H,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,01H,62H,0AH,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,01H,62H,20H,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,01H,62H,21H,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,01H,62H,63H,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,01H,62H,64H,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,01H,62H,66H,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,14H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,15H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,16H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,17H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,18H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

153

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
MIDI Data Format

PITCH FINE
LEVEL
PANPOT
REVERB SEND
CHORUS SEND
VARIATION SEND
RPN LSB
RPN MSB
PITCH BEND SENS.
FINE TUNING

BnH,63H,19H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,1AH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,1CH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,1DH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,1EH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,1FH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH
BnH,64H
BnH,65H
BnH,65H,00H,64H,00H,06H,mmH
BnH,65H,00H,64H,01H,06H,mmH,
26H,llH
BnH,65H,00H,64H,02H,06H,mmH
BnH,65H,7FH,64H,7FH
BnH,78H,00H
BnH,79H,00H
BnH,7BH,00H
BnH,7CH,00H
BnH,7DH,00H
BnH,7EH
BnH,7FH

COARSE TUNING
NULL
ALL SOUND OFF
RESET ALL CONTROLLERS
ALL NOTES OFF
OMNI OFF
OMNI ON
MONO
POLY
PROGRAM CHANGE

CnH

CHANNEL AFTER TOUCH

DnH

PITCH BEND CHANGE

EnH

SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE


UNIVERSAL REALTIME
F0H 7FH.....F7H
UNIVERSAL NON-REALTIME F0H 7EH.....F7H

XG PARAMETER CHANGE
F0H 43H 1nH 4CH aaH aaH aaH ddH
.....ddH F7H
XG BULK DUMP
F0H 43H 0nH 4CH bbH bbH aaH aaH
aaH ddH.....ddH ccH F7H
PARAMETER REQUEST
F0H 43H 3nH 4CH aaH aaH aaH F7H
DUMP REQUEST
F0H 43H 2nH 4CH aaH aaH aaH F7H



SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE
MIDI CLOCK
START
STOP
ACTIVE SENSING

F8H
FAH
FCH
FEH

(3) TRANSMIT/RECEIVE DATA
(3-1) CHANNEL VOICE MESSAGES
(3-1-1) NOTE OFF (Recive only)
STATUS
NOTE NUMBER
VELOCITY

1000nnnn (8nH)
0kkkkkkk
0vvvvvvv

n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER
k = 0 (C-2) - 127 (G8)
v: ignored

1001nnnn (9nH)
0kkkkkkk
0vvvvvvv
00000000

n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER
k = 0 (C-2) - 127 (G8)
(v π 0) NOTE ON
(v = 0) NOTE OFF

(3-1-2) NOTE ON/OFF
STATUS
NOTE NUMBER
VELOCITY

(3-1-3) PROGRAM CHANGE
STATUS
1100nnnn (CnH)
PROGRAM NUMBER 0ppppppp

n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER
p = 0 - 127

* PROGRAM NUMBER: XG DRUM VOICE number correspondence
P=1
Standard Kit
P=2
Standard2 Kit
P=9
Room Kit
P = 17
Rock Kit
P = 25
Elctrnic Kit
P = 26
Analog Kit
P = 28
Dance Kit
P = 33
Jazz Kit
P = 41
Brush Kit
P = 49
Classic Kit
* PROGRAM NUMBER: XG SFX KIT number correspondence
P=1
SFX1 Kit
P=2
SFX2 Kit
When DRUM VOICE is selected and program change data for a different DRUM
VOICE is received, the currently selected DRUM VOICE will be replaced with the
new DRUM VOICE.

154

(3-1-4) CHANNEL AFTER TOUCH (Recive only)
STATUS
VALUE

1101nnnn (DnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER
0vvvvvvv
v = 0 - 127 AFTER TOUCH VALUE

(3-1-5) PITCH BEND CHANGE
STATUS
LSB
MSB

1110nnnn (EnH)
0vvvvvvv
0vvvvvvv

n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER
PITCH BEND CHANGE LSB
PITCH BEND CHANGE MSB

(3-1-6) CONTROL CHANGE
STATUS
CONTROL NUMBER
CONTROL VALUE

1011nnnn (BnH)
0ccccccc
0vvvvvvv

* Transmit CONTROL NUMBER.
c=0
BANK SELECT MSB

c = 32
c= 6
c = 38
c= 7
c = 10
c = 11
c = 64
c = 66
c = 67
c = 91
c = 94

0:XG NORMAL,
64:SFX NORMAL,
126:XG SFX KIT,
127:XG DRUM
BANK SELECT LSB
; v = 0 - 127
*3
DATA ENTRY MSB
; v = 0 - 127
*1
DATA ENTRY LSB
; v = 0 - 127
*1
MAIN VOLUME
; v = 0 - 127
PANPOT
; v = 0 - 127
EXPRESSION
; v = 0 - 127
SUSTAIN
; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON
*2
SOSTENUTO
; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON
*2
SOFT PEDAL
; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON
*2
REVERB SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127
VARIATION SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127
(When only Connection = 1[System])

* Receive CONTROL NUMBER.
c= 0
BANK SELECT MSB

c = 32
c= 1
c= 5
c= 6
c = 38
c= 7
c = 10
c = 11
c = 64
c = 65
c = 66
c = 67
c = 71
c = 72
c = 73
c = 74
c = 84
c = 91
c = 93
c = 94
c = 96
c = 97

n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

;v=

;v=

0:XG NORMAL,
64:SFX NORMAL,
126:XG SFX KIT,
127:XG DRUM
BANK SELECT LSB
; v = 0 - 127
*3
MODULATION
; v = 0 - 127
*2
PORTAMENTO TIME
; v = 0 - 127
*2
DATA ENTRY MSB
; v = 0 - 127
*1
DATA ENTRY LSB
; v = 0 - 127
*1
MAIN VOLUME
; v = 0 - 127
PANPOT
; v = 0 - 127
EXPRESSION
; v = 0 - 127
SUSTAIN
; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON
*2
PORTAMENTO
; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON
*2
SOSTENUTO
; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON
*2
SOFT PEDAL
; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON
*2
HARMONIC CONTENT ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63
*2
RELEASE TIME
; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63
*2
ATTACK TIME
; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63
*2
BRIGHTNESS
; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63
*2
PORTAMENT CONTROL ; v = 0 - 127
*2
REVERB SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127
CHORUS SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127
VARIATION SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127
(When only Connection = 1[System])
DATA INCREMENT
; v = 127
*1
DATA DECREMENT
; v = 127
*1

*1 Only when setting the appointed parameter with RPN, NRPN.
*2 Does not effect Rhythm Voice.
*3 MSB=0, anything other than 63 is 0.

• Until a PROGRAM CHANGE message is received, the BANK SELECT
operation will be suspended. When a Voice, including VOICE BANK, is
changed, set the BANK SELECT and Program Change Message, and
transmit in the following order, BANK SELECT MSB, LSB, PROGRAM
CHANGE.
• MODULATION controls the Vibrato Depth.
• PORTAMENTO TIME controls the Pitch Change Speed when the
Portamento Switch = ON. 0 being the shortest time, and 127 being the
longest.
• PANPOT changes the value for the melody voice and rhythm voice in
relation to the preset value.
• Portamento time is fixed to 0 when the PORTAMENTO CONTROL is
used.
• HARMONIC CONTENT applies adjustment to the resonance value that
is set by the voice. This parameter specifies relative change with the
value of 64 producing 0 adjustment. As values get higher the sound
becomes increasingly eccentric. Note that for some voices the effective
parameter range is narrower than the legal parameter range.
• RELEASE TIME applies adjustment to the envelope release time set by
the voice. This parameter specifies relative change with the value of 64
producing 0 adjustment.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
MIDI Data Format

• ATTACK TIME applies adjustment to the envelope attack time set by the
voice. This parameter specifies relative change with the value of 64
producing 0 adjustment.
• BRIGHTNESS applies adjustment to the cut-off frequency set by the
voice. This parameter specifies relative change with the value of 64
producing 0 adjustment. Lower voices produce a softer sound. For some
voices the effective parameter range is narrower than the legal
parameter range.
(3-2) CHANNEL MODE MESSAGES
STATUS
CONTROL NUMBER
CONTROL VALUE

1011nnnn (BnH)
0ccccccc
0vvvvvvv

n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER
c = CONTROL NUMBER
v = DATA VALUE

(3-2-1) ALL SOUND OFF (Recive only)
(CONTROL NUMBER = 78H , DATA VALUE = 0)
Switches off all sound from the channel. Does not reset Note On and Hold On
conditions established by Channel Messages.

(3-2-2) RESET ALL CONTROLLERS (Recive only)
(CONTROL NUMBER = 79H , DATA VALUE = 0)
Resets controllers as follows.
PITCH BEND CHANGE
AFTER TOUCH
MODULATION
EXPRESSION
SUSTAIN
SOSTENUTO
SOFT PEDAL
NRPN
RPN
PORTAMENT CONTROL
PORTAMENTO

0 (Center)
0 (min.)
0 (min.)
127 (max.)
0 (off)
0 (off)
0 (off)
Sets number to null. (Internal data remains unchanged)
Sets number to null. (Internal data remains unchanged)
Resets portamento source note number
0 (off)

(3-2-3) ALL NOTES OFF (Recive only)
(CONTROL NUMBER = 7BH , DATA VALUE = 0)
Switches off all of the channel’s “on” notes. However, any notes being held by
SUSTAIN or SOSTENUTO continue to sound until SUSTAIN/SOSTENUTO goes off.

(3-2-4) OMNI OFF (Recive only) (CONTROL NUMBER = 7CH , DATA VALUE = 0)
Same processing as for All Notes Off.

(3-2-5) OMNI ON (Recive only) (CONTROL NUMBER = 7DH , DATA VALUE = 0)

First appoints the parameter for NRPN MSB/LSB, then sets the parameter value for data
entry MSB/LSB.
NRPN
MSB LSB
01H 08H
01H 09H
01H 0AH
01H 20H
01H 21H
01H 63H
01H 64H
01H 66H
14H rrH
15H rrH
16H rrH
17H rrH
18H rrH
19H rrH
1AH rrH
1CH rrH

D.ENTRY
MSB LSB
mmH —
mmH —
mmH —
mmH —
mmH —
mmH —
mmH —
mmH —
mmH —
mmH —
mmH —
mmH —
mmH —
mmH —
mmH —
mmH —

1DH rrH
1EH rrH
1FH rrH

mmH —
mmH —
mmH —

PARAMETER NAME
VIBRATO RATE
VIBRATO DEPTH
VIBRATO DELAY
FILTER CUTOFF FREQUENCY
FILTER RESONANCE
EG ATTACK TIME
EG DECAY TIME
EG RELEASE
DRUM FILTER CUTOFF FREQ.
DRUM FILTER RESONANCE
DRUM AEG ATTACK RATE
DRUM AEG DECAY RATE
DRUM PITCH COARSE
DRUM PITCH FINE
DRUM LEVEL
DRUM PANPOT

DATA RANGE
00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
00H - 7FH (0 - max.)
00H ,01H - 40H - 7FH
(random,left - center - right)
DRUM REVERB SEND LEVEL 00H - 7FH (0 - max.)
DRUM CHORUS SEND LEVEL 00H - 7FH (0 - max.)
DRUM VARIATION SEND LEVEL 00H - 7FH (0 - max.)

The MSG14H-1FH (for drums) message is accepted as long as the channel is set
with a drum voice.
rrH : drum instrument note number

(3-5) SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGES
(3-5-1) MIDI CLOCK
STATUS

11111000 (F8H)

Transmission: 96 clocks per measure are transmitted.
Reception: If the instrument’s clock is set to external, after FAH is received from the
external device the instrument’s clock will sync with the 96 beats per measure
received from the external device.
Decides whether the internal clock, or Timing Clocks received via the MIDI IN will
be used.

(3-5-2) START
STATUS

11111010 (FAH)

Transmission: Transmitted when instrument’s Rhythm or Song playback is started.
Reception: Depending upon the condition, Rhythm, Song Playback, or Song Rec will
start.

Same processing as for All Notes Off. Omni On is not executed.

(3-5-3) STOP
(3-2-6) MONO (Recive only) (CONTROL NUMBER = 7EH , DATA VALUE = 0)
Same processing as for All Notes Off. If the 3rd byte is in a range of 0-16 the
corresponding channel will be changed to Mode 4 (m=1).

(3-2-7) POLY (Recive only) (CONTROL NUMBER = 7FH , DATA VALUE = 0)
Same processing as for All Sounds Off and the corresponding channel will be
changed to Mode 3.

STATUS

(3-5-4) ACTIVE SENSING
STATUS

(3-3) REGISTERED PARAMETER NUMBER (RPN)
STATUS
RPN LSB
RPN LSB NUMBER
RPN MSB
RPN MSB NUMBER
DATA ENTRY MSB
DATA VALUE
DATA ENTRY LSB
DATA VALUE

1011nnnn (BnH)
01100100 (64H)
0ppppppp
01100101 (65H)
0qqqqqqq
00000110 (06H)
0mmmmmmm
00100110 (26H)
0lllllll

n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER
p = RPN LSB(refer to the list below)

11111100 (FCH)

Transmission: Transmitted when instrument’s Rhythm or Song playback is stopped.
Reception: Depending upon the condition, Rhythm, Song Playback, or Song Rec will
stop.

11111110 (FEH)

Transmission: Transmitted approximately once every 200msec.
Reception: Sensing is started once this Code is received. If Status or Data is not
received within 400ms, the MIDI Receive Buffer will be cleared, and all notes,
including those being sustained, will be cut OFF. Also, all control values will be reset
to their factory defaults.

q = RPN MSB(refer to the list below)
m = Data Value

(3-6) SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE
(3-6-1) YAMAHA MIDI FORMAT

l = Data Value

First appoints the parameter for RPN MSB/LSB, then sets the parameter value for
data entry MSB/LSB.
RPN
LSB MSB
00H 00H
01H 00H

D.ENTRY
MSB LSB PARAMETER NAME
DATA RANGE
mmH —
PITCH BEND SENSITIVITY 00H - 18H (0 - 24 semitones)
mmH llH FINE TUNE
{mmH,llH} = {00H,00H} - {40H,00H} - {7FH,7FH}
(-8192*100/8192) - 0 - (+8192*100/8192)
02H 00H mmH —
COARSE TUNE
28H - 40H - 58H (-24 - 0 - +24 semitones)
7FH 7FH —
—
NULL
Clears the current RPN number setting. Does not change the internal parameter settings.

(3-6-1-1) SECTION CONTROL
binary
11110000
01000011
01111110
00000000
0sssssss

hexadecimal
F0
43
7E
00
SS

0ddddddd
11110111

DD
F7

(3-4) NON-REGISTERED PARAMETER NUMBER (NRPN) (Recive only)
STATUS
NRPN LSB
NRPN LSB NUMBER
NRPN MSB
NRPN MSB NUMBER
DATA ENTRY MSB
DATA VALUE

1011nnnn (BnH)
01100010 (62H)
0ppppppp
01100011 (63H)
0qqqqqqq
00000110 (06H)
0mmmmmmm

n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER
p = NRPN LSB(refer to the list below)
q = NRPN MSB(refer to the list below)
m = Data Value

Exclusive status
YAMAHA ID
Style
Switch No.
00H
: INTRO A
01H~07H : INTRO B
08H
: MAIN A
09H~0FH : MAIN B
10H
: FILL IN AA
11H~17H : FILL IN BB
18H
: FILL IN AB
19H~1FH : FILL IN BA
20H
: ENDING A
21H~27H : ENDING B
Switch On/Off : 00H (Off),7FH (On)
End of Exclusive

When an ON code is received, the appointed section will be changed.

155

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
MIDI Data Format

(3-6-1-2) TEMPO CONTROL
binary
11110000
01000011
01111110
00000000
0ttttttt
0ttttttt
0ttttttt
0ttttttt
11110111

hexadecimal
F0
43
7E
01
TT
TT
TT
TT
F7

(3-6-3-1-2) XG PARMETER CHANGE
Exclusive status
YAMAHA ID
Style
Tempo4
Tempo3
Tempo2
Tempo1
End of Exclusive

The internal clock will be set to the received Tempo value.
Tempo Meta Event is a large data block (24-bit), it is divided into 4 groups with 7-bits
going into each of the Tempos 1-4 (4 receives the remaining 3 bits).

(3-6-2) UNIVERSAL SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE
(3-6-2-1) UNIVERSAL REALTIME MESSAGE
(3-6-2-1-1) MIDI MASTER VOLUME (Recive only)
binary
11110000
01111110
01111111
00001001
00000001
0sssssss
0ttttttt
11110111
or
11110000
01111110
0xxxnnnn

hexadecimal
F0
7F
7F
04
01
SS
TT
F7

00001001
00000001
0sssssss
0ttttttt
11110111

04
01
SS
TT
F7

F0
7F
XN

Exclusive status
Universal Realtime
ID of target Device
Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message
Sub-ID #2=Master Volume
Volume LSB
Volume MSB
End of Exclusive
Exclusive status
Universal Realtime
When N is received N=0-F, whichever is received.
When N is transmitted N always=0.
X = don’t care
Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message
Sub-ID #2=Master Volume
Volume LSB
Volume MSB
End of Exclusive

The volume for all channels will be changed simultaneously.
The TT value is used as the MIDI Master Volume value. (the ss value is ignored.)

(3-6-2-2) UNIVERSAL NON REALTIME MESSAGE
(3-6-2-2-1) GENERAL MIDI SYSTEM ON
binary
11110000
01111110
01111111
00001001
00000001
11110111
or
11110000
01111110
0xxxnnnn

hexadecimal
F0
7E
7F
09
01
F7

00001001
00000001
11110111

09
01
F7

F0
7E
XN

Exclusive status
Universal Non-Realtime
ID of target Device
Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message
Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On
End of Exclusive
Exclusive status
Universal Non-Realtime
When N is received N=0-F, whichever is received.
When N is transmitted N always=0.
X = don’t care
Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message
Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On
End of Exclusive

Depending upon the received ON message, the System Mode will be changed to XG.
Except MIDI Master Tuning, all control data be reset to default values.
This message requires approximately 50ms to execute, so sufficient time should be
allowed before the next message is sent.

(3-6-3) XG STANDARD
(3-6-3-1) XG PARAMETER CHANGE
(3-6-3-1-1) XG SYSTEM ON
binary
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
01001100
00000000
00000000
01111110
00000000
11110111

hexadecimal
F0
43
1N
4C
00
00
7E
00
F7

Exclusive status
YAMAHA ID
Device Number
Model ID
Address High
Address Mid
Address Low
Data
End of Exclusive

Depending upon the received ON message, the SYSTEM MODE will be changed to
XG.Controllers will be reset, all values of Multi Part and Effect, and All System values
denoted by “XG” data within All System will be reset to default values in the table.
This message requires approximately 50ms to execute, so sufficient time should be
allowed before the next message is sent.

156

binary
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
01001100
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
0ddddddd
|
11110111

hexadecimal
F0
43
1N
4C
AA
AA
AA
DD
|
F7

Exclusive status
YAMAHA ID
Device Number
Model ID
Address High
Address Mid
Address Low
Data
End of Exclusive

For parameters with data size of 2 or 4, transmit the appropriate number of data bytes.
For more information on Address and Parameters, refer to < Table 1-2 > ~ < Table
1-8 > (pages 157-162).
The 4 data types listed below are transmitted and received.
(These are transmitted only after a Parameter change request is received.)
XG System Data
Multi Effect Data
Multi EQ Data
Multi Part Data
Drums Setup Data

(3-6-3-2) XG BULK DUMP
binary
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01001100
0bbbbbbb
0bbbbbbb
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
0ddddddd
|
0ccccccc
11110111

hexadecimal
F0
43
0N
4C
BB
BB
AA
AA
AA
DD
|
CC
F7

Exclusive status
YAMAHA ID
Device Number
Model ID
ByteCount
ByteCount
Address High
Address Mid
Address Low
Data
Check sum
End of Exclusive

For more information on Address and Byte Count, refer to < Table 1-2 > ~ < Table 1-8 >
(pages 157-162).
The Check Sum value is set such that the sum of Byte Count, Address, Data, and
Check Sum has value zero in its seven least significant bits.
If the top of the block is appointed to the Address the XG Bulk Dump, Bulk Request
will be received.
The Block is a unit that consists of the data, arranged in the list, as the Total Size.
The 5 data types listed below are transmitted and received.
(These are transmitted only after a Bulk Dump request is received.)
System Data
Multi Effect Data(Individual effect unit)
Multi EQ Data
Multi Part Data(Individual part unit)
Drums Setup Data(Individual note unit)
System Information(Individual only)

(3-6-3-3) XG PARAMETER REQUEST (Recive only)
binary
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
01001100
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
11110111

hexadecimal
F0
43
3n
4C
AA
AA
AA
F7

Exclusive status
YAMAHA ID
Device Number
Model ID
Address High
Address Mid
Address Low
End of Exclusive

For more information on Address and Byte Count refer to < Table 1-2 > ~ < Table
1-8 > (pages 157-162).
The 4 data types listed below are received.
System Data
Multi Effect Data
Multi EQ Data
Multi Part Data
Drums Setup Data

(3-6-3-4) XG DUMP REQUEST (Recive only)
binary
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01001100
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
11110111

hexadecimal
F0
43
2n
4C
AA
AA
AA
F7

Exclusive status
YAMAHA ID
Device Number
Model ID
Address High
Address Mid
Address Low
End of Exclusive

For more information on Address and Byte Count refer to < Table 1-2 > ~ < Table 1-8 >
(pages 157-162).

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
MIDI Data Format

(3-6-5) Others

The 5 data types listed below are received.
System Data
Multi Effect Data(Individual module unit)
Multi EQ Data
Multi Part Data(Individual part unit)
Drums Setup Data(Individual note unit)
System Information

(3-6-5-1) MIDI MASTER TUNING (Recive only)

(3-6-4) SPECIAL OPERATORS
(3-6-4-1) VOLUME ,EXPRESSION AND PAN REALTIME CONTROL OFF
binary
11110000
01000011
01110011
01000101
00010001
0000nnnn
01001001
0vvvvvvv
11110111

hexadecimal
F0
43
73
45
11
0N
45
VV
F7

Exclusive status
YAMAHA ID
Clavinova ID
CVP-98/96/94/92 ID
Sub ID
N = MIDI Channel
Volume and Expression Realtime Control Off
Value VV: off=7FH, on=00H
End of Exclusive

binary
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00100111
00110000
00000000
00000000
0mmmmmmm
0lllllll
0ccccccc
11110111

hexadecimal
F0
43
1N
27
30
00
00
MM
LL
CC
F7

Exclusive status
YAMAHA ID
When N is received N=0-F, whichever is received.
Model ID
Sub ID

Master Tune MSB
Master Tune LSB
don’t care
End of Exclusive

Changes tuning of all channels.
MM, LL values are used to define the MIDI Master Tuning value.
T = M-128
T : Tuning value (-99cent - +99cent)
M : A single byte value (28-228) consists of bytes 0-3 of MM = MSB, bytes 0-3 of LL = LSB.

When “On” is received, subsequent volume, expression, and PAN changes are only
valid after the reception of the next key on. Normal operation resumes when “Off” is
received.

In this setting, GM System ON, XG System ON will not be reset.

< Table 1-1> Parmeter Basic Address

SYSTEM

Parameter Change
Address
(H) (M) (L)
00 00 00
00 00 7D
00 00 7E
00 00 7F

Description
System
Drum Setup Reset
XG System On
All Parameter Reset

INFORMATION

01 00

00

System Information

EFFECT 1

02 01

00

Effect1(Reverb,Chorus,Variation)

MULTI EQ

02 40

00

Multi EQ(PSR-730 ONLY)

EFFECT 2

03 00

00

Effect2(PSR-730 ONLY)

MULTI PART

08 00

00
:
00

Multi Part 1

08 0F
DRUM

30 0B 00
31 0B 00

Multi Part 16
Drum Setup 1 → Address
Drum Setup 2
:
3n 0B 00
3n 0C 00
:
:
:
3n 5B 00

Parameter
:
note number 13
note number 14
:
note number 91

< Table 1-2 > MIDI Parameter Change table ( SYSTEM )
Address
(H)
00 00

00
01
02
03

04
05
06
7D
7E
7F
TOTAL SIZE 6

Size
(H)
4

Data
(H)
0000
..07FF

Prameter Name

Description

Master Tune

1
1
1

00..7F

Master Volume
Not Used
Transpose
Drum Setup Reset
XG System On
All Parameter Reset

-102.4..+102.3[cent]
1st bit3-0 -> bit15-12
2nd bit3-0 -> bit11-8
3rd bit3-0 -> bit7-4
4th bit3-0 -> bit3-0
0..127

28..58
n
00
00

-24..+24[semitones]
n=Drum Setup Number
00=XG Sytem on
00=on (receive only)

Default
Value(H)
00 04 00 00
(0400)
(With XG, GM On, it will not reset.)

7F
40

157

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
MIDI Data Format

< Table 1-3 > MIDI Parameter table ( System information )
Address
(H)
01 00

Size
(H)
D

Data
(H)
20..7F

Prameter Name

00
Model Name
:
0D
0E
1
00
0F
1
00
TOTAL SIZE 10
(Transmitted by Dump Request. Not received. Bulk Dump Only)

Description
32..127(ASCII)

< Table 1-4 > MIDI Parameter Change table (EFFECT 1)
Address
(H)
02
01

02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
TOTAL SIZE 0E

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Data
(H)
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
01..7F

02

01

10
11
12
13
14
15
TOTAL SIZE 6

1
1
1
1
1
1

00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F

Reverb Parameter 11
Reverb Parameter 12
Reverb Parameter 13
Reverb Parameter 14
Reverb Parameter 15
Reverb Parameter 16

Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

Depend on Reverb type
Depend on Reverb type
Depend on Reverb type
Depend on Reverb type
Depend on Reverb type
Depend on Reverb type

02

01

2

Chorus Type MSB
Chorus Type LSB
Chorus Parameter 1
Chorus Parameter 2
Chorus Parameter 3
Chorus Parameter 4
Chorus Parameter 5
Chorus Parameter 6
Chorus Parameter 7
Chorus Parameter 8
Chorus Parameter 9
Chorus Parameter 10
Chorus Return
Chorus Pan
Send Chorus To Reverb

Refer to the Ef. Type List
00 : basic type
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
-∞..0..+6dB(0..96..127)
L63..C..R63(1..64..127)
-∞..0..+6dB(0..96..127)

41(=Chorus1)
00
Depend on Chorus Type
Depend on Chorus Type
Depend on Chorus Type
Depend on Chorus Type
Depend on Chorus Type
Depend on Chorus Type
Depend on Chorus Type
Depend on Chorus Type
Depend on Chorus Type
Depend on Chorus Type
60
40
00

00

Prameter Name

Description

Reverb Type MSB
Reverb Type LSB
Reverb Parameter 1
Reverb Parameter 2
Reverb Parameter 3
Reverb Parameter 4
Reverb Parameter 5
Reverb Parameter 6
Reverb Parameter 7
Reverb Parameter 8
Reverb Parameter 9
Reverb Parameter 10
Reverb Return
Reverb Pan

Refer to the Ef. Type List
00 : basic type
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
-∞..0..+6dB(0..96..127)
L63..C..R63(1..64..127)

Default
Value(H)
01(=HALL1)
00
Depend on Reverb type
Depend on Reverb type
Depend on Reverb type
Depend on Reverb type
Depend on Reverb type
Depend on Reverb type
Depend on Reverb type
Depend on Reverb type
Depend on Reverb type
Depend on Reverb type
60
40

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
TOTAL SIZE 0F

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
01..7F
00..7F

02

01

30
31
32
33
34
35
TOTAL SIZE 6

1
1
1
1
1
1

00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F

Chorus Parameter 11
Chorus Parameter 12
Chorus Parameter 13
Chorus Parameter 14
Chorus Parameter 15
Chorus Parameter 16

Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

Depend on Chorus Type
Depend on Chorus Type
Depend on Chorus Type
Depend on Chorus Type
Depend on Chorus Type
Depend on Chorus Type

02

01

40

2

42

2

44

2

46

2

48

2

4A

2

00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F

Variation Type MSB
Variation Type LSB
Vari. Param. 1 MSB
Vari. Param. 1 LSB
Vari. Param. 2 MSB
Vari. Param. 2 LSB
Vari. Param. 3 MSB
Vari. Param. 3 LSB
Vari. Param. 4 MSB
Vari. Param. 4 LSB
Vari. Param. 5 MSB
Vari. Param. 5 LSB

Refer to the Ef. Type List
00 : basic type
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

“05(=DELAY L,C,R)”
00
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type

158

20

Size
(H)
2

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
MIDI Data Format

Address
(H)

Size
(H)
4C
2

56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
60
TOTAL SIZE 21

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Data
(H)
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
01..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..01
00..1F
01..7F
01..7F
01..7F
01..7F
01..7F

02

1
1
1
1
1
1

00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F

4E

2

50

2

52

2

54

2

01

70
71
72
73
74
75
TOTAL SIZE 6

Prameter Name

Description

Vari. Param. 6 MSB
Vari. Param. 6 LSB
Vari. Param. 7 MSB
Vari. Param. 7 LSB
Vari. Param. 8 MSB
Vari. Param. 8 LSB
Vari. Param. 9 MSB
Vari. Param. 9 LSB
Vari. Param. 10 MSB
Vari. Param. 10 LSB
Variation Return
Variation Pan
Send Vari. To Reverb
Send Vari. To Chorus
Variation Connection
Variation Part
MW Vari. Ctrl Depth
PB Vari. Ctrl Depth
CAT Vari. Ctrl Depth
Not Used
Not Used

Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
-∞..0..+6dB(0..96..127)
L63..C..R63(1..64..127)
-∞..0..+6dB(0..96..127)
-∞..0..+6dB(0..96..127)
0:insertion,1:system
part1..32(0..31),off(127)
-63..+63
-63..+63
-63..+63

Default
Value(H)
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
60
40
00
00
00
7F
40
40
40

Variation Parameter 11
Variation Parameter 12
Variation Parameter 13
Variation Parameter 14
Variation Parameter 15
Variation Parameter 16

option Parameter
option Parameter
option Parameter
option Parameter
option Parameter
option Parameter

Depend on Variation Type
Depend on Variation Type
Depend on Variation Type
Depend on Variation Type
Depend on Variation Type
Depend on Variation Type

< Table 1-5 > MIDI Parameter Change table ( MULTI EQ )(PSR-730 ONLY)
Address
(H)
02 40

00

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
TOTAL SIZE 15

Size
(H)
1

Data
(H)
34..4C

Prameter Name

Description

EQ Type

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

34..4C
04..28
01..78
00..01
34..4C
0E..36
01..78

EQ Gain1
EQ Frequency1
EQ Q1
EQ Shape1
EQ Gain2
EQ Frequency2
EQ Q2
Not Used
EQ Gain3
EQ Frequency3
EQ Q3
Not Used
EQ Gain4
EQ Frequency4
EQ Q4
Not Used
EQ Gain5
EQ Frequency5
EQ Q5
EQ Shape5

0:FLAT
1:JAZZ
2:POPS
3:ROCK
4:CLASSIC
-12..+12[dB]
32..2000[Hz]
0.1..12.0
00:Shelving,01:Peaking
-12..+12[dB]
0.1..10[KHz]
0.1..12.0

40
0C
07
00
40
1C
07

-12..+12[dB]
0.1..10[KHz]
0.1..12.0

40
22
07

-12..+12[dB]
0.1..10[KHz]
0.1..12.0

40
2E
07

-12..+12[dB]
0.5..16.0[KHz]
0.1..12.0
00:Shelving,01:Peaking

40
3C
07
00

34..4C
0E..36
01..78
34..4C
0E..36
01..78
34..4C
1C..3A
01..78
00..01

Default
Value(H)
0

< Table 1-6 > MIDI Parameter change table (Effect2))(PSR-730 ONLY)
Address
(H)
03 0n

00

(H)
2

02
03
04
05
06
07

1
1
1
1
1
1

Size
(H)
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F

Data

Prameter Name

Insertion Type MSB
Insertion Type LSB
Insertion Parameter1
Insertion Parameter2
Insertion Parameter3
Insertion Parameter4
Insertion Parameter5
Insertion Parameter6

Refer to the Ef. Type List “49(=DISTORTION)”
00 : basic type
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

Description

Default
Value(H)

00

159

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
MIDI Data Format

Address
(H)
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
TOTAL SIZE 12
20
21
22
23
24
25
TOTAL SIZE 06

Size
(H)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Data
(H)
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F

Prameter Name

Description

Insertion Parameter7
Insertion Parameter8
Insertion Parameter9
Insertion Parameter10
Insertion Part
MW INS CTRL DPT
BEND INS CTRL DPT
CAT INS CTRL DPT
Not Used
Not Used

Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Part1..16,OFF

1
1
1
1
1
1

00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F

Insertion Parameter11
Insertion Parameter12
Insertion Parameter13
Insertion Parameter14
Insertion Parameter15
Insertion Parameter16

Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F

Ins. Param.1 MSB
Ins. Param.1 LSB
Ins. Param.2 MSB
Ins. Param.2 LSB
Ins. Param.3 MSB
Ins. Param.3 LSB
Ins. Param.4 MSB
Ins. Param.4 LSB
Ins. Param.5 MSB
Ins. Param.5 LSB
Ins. Param.6 MSB
Ins. Param.6 LSB
Ins. Param.7 MSB
Ins. Param.7 LSB
Ins. Param.8 MSB
Ins. Param.8 LSB
Ins. Param.9 MSB
Ins. Param.9 LSB
Ins. Param.10 MSB
Ins. Param.10 LSB

Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List
Refer to the Ef. Parameter List

03

0n

03

0n

30

2

03

0n

32

2

03

0n

34

2

03

0n

36

2

03

0n

38

2

03

0n

3A

2

03

0n

3C

2

03

0n

3E

2

03

0n

40

2

03

0n

42

2

Default
Value(H)

7F

TOTAL SIZE 14
For effect types that do not require MSB, the Parameters for Address 02-0B will be received. Address 30-42 will not be received.
For effect types that require MSB, the Parameters for Address 30-42 will be received. Address 02-0B will not be received.
When Bulk Dumps that include Effect Type data are transmitted, the Parameters for Address 02 - 0B will always be transmitted. But, effects that require MSB, when the bulk dump is
received the Parameters for Address 02 - 0B will not be received.
n=Insertion Effect No.(0-1)

< Table 1-7 > MIDI Parameter Change table (MULTI PART)
Address
(H)
08 nn
nn
nn
nn
nn

00
01
02
03
04

Size
(H)
1
1
1
1
1

nn
nn

05
06

1
1

Data
(H)
00..20
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..0F,
7F
00..01
00..02

nn

07

1

00..02

Part Mode

nn
nn
nn

08
09
0A

1
2

28..58
00..FF

Note Shift
Detune

nn
nn
nn
nn

0B
0C
0D
0E

1
1
1
1

00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F

Volume
Velocity Sense Depth
Velocity Sense Offset
Pan

nn
nn
nn
nn

0F
10
11
12

1
1
1
1

00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F

Note Limit Low
Note Limit High
Dry Level
Chorus Send

160

Prameter Name

Description

Element Reserve
Bank Select MSB
Bank Select LSB
Program Number
Rcv Channel

0..32
0..127
0..127
1..128
0..16;1..16,127;off

Mono/Poly Mode
Same Note Number
Key On Assign

0:mono,1:poly
0:single
1:multi
2:inst (for DRUM)
0:normal
1..3:drum thru,drum1..2
-24..+24[semitones]
-12.8..+12.7[Hz]
1st bit3..0 -> bit7..4
2nd bit3..0 -> bit3..0
0..127
0..127
0..127
0:random
L63..C..R63(1..64..127)
C-2..G8
C-2..G8
0..127
0..127

Default
Value(H)
0(Part10),2(Others)
7F(Part10),00(Others)
00
00
Part No.
01
00

00 (Except Part10)
01 (Part10)
40
08 00
(80)
64
40
40
40

00
7F
7F
00

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
MIDI Data Format

Address
(H)
nn
nn

Data
(H)
00..7F
00..7F

Prameter Name

Description

13
14

Size
(H)
1
1

Reverb Send
Variation Send

0..127
0..127

Default
Value(H)
28
00

nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn

15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F

Vibrato Rate
Vibrato Depth
Vibrato Delay
Filter Cutoff Freq.
Filter Resonance
EG Attack Time
EG Decay Time
EG Release Time

-64..+63
-64..+63
-64..+63
-64..+63
-64..+63
-64..+63
-64..+63
-64..+63

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn

1D
1E
1F
20
21
22

1
1
1
1
1
1

28..58
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F

MW Pitch Control
MW Filter Control
MW Amp. Control
MW LFO PMod Depth
MW LFO FMod Depth
MW LFO AMod Depth

-24..+24[semitones]
-9600..+9450[cent]
-100..+100[%]
0..127
0..127
0..127

40
40
40
0A
00
00

1
1
1
1
1
1

28..58
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F

Bend Pitch Control
Bend Filter Control
Bend Amp. Control
Bend LFO PMod Depth
Bend LFO FMod Depth
Bend LFO AMod Depth

-24..+24[semitones]
-9600..+9450[cent]
-100..+100[%]
0..127
0..127
0..127

42
40
40
00
00
00

nn 23
nn 24
nn 25
nn 26
nn 27
nn 28
TOTAL SIZE 29
nn
nn

30
:
40

nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn

41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F

Scale Tuning C
Scale Tuning C#
Scale Tuning D
Scale Tuning D#
Scale Tuning E
Scale Tuning F
Scale Tuning F#
Scale Tuning G
Scale Tuning G#
Scale Tuning A
Scale Tuning A#
Scale Tuning B

-64..+63[cent]
-64..+63[cent]
-64..+63[cent]
-64..+63[cent]
-64..+63[cent]
-64..+63[cent]
-64..+63[cent]
-64..+63[cent]
-64..+63[cent]
-64..+63[cent]
-64..+63[cent]
-64..+63[cent]

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn

4D
4E
4F
50
51
52

1
1
1
1
1
1

28..58
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F

CAT Pitch Control
CAT Filter Control
CAT Amplitude Control
CAT LFO PMod Depth
CAT LFO FMod Depth
CAT LFO AMod Depth

-24..+24[semitones]
-9600..+9450[cent]
-100..+100[%]
0..127
0..127
0..127

40
40
40
00
00
00

nn

53
:
66

nn
nn

67
68

off/on
0..127

00
00

nn

69
:
6E
TOTAL SIZE 3F

Not Used
:
Not Used

Not Used
:
Not Used
1
1

00..01
00..7F

Portamento Switch
Portamento Time
Not Used
:
Not Used

nn = PartNumber
If there is a Drum Voice assigned to the Part, the following parameters are ineffective.
• Bank Select LSB
• Pitch EG
• Portamento
• Soft Pedal
• Mono/Poly
• Scale Tuning

161

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
MIDI Data Format

< Table 1-8 > MIDI Parameter Change table ( DRUM SETUP )
Address
(H)
3n
rr
3n
rr
3n
rr
3n
rr
3n
rr

00
01
02
03
04

3n
rr
05
3n
rr
06
3n
rr
07
3n
rr
08
3n
rr
09
3n
rr 0A
3n
rr
0B
3n
rr
0C
3n
rr 0D
3n
rr
0E
3n
rr
0F
TOTAL SIZE 10

Size
(H)
1
1
1
1
1

Data
(H)
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F

Prameter Name

Description

Pitch Coarse
Pitch Fine
Level
Alternate Group
Pan

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..01
00..01
00..01
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F

Reverb Send Level
Chorus Send Level
Variation Send Level
Key Assign
Rcv Note Off
Rcv Note On
Filter Cutoff Freq.
Filter Resonance
EG Attack Rate
EG Decay1 Rate
EG Decay2 Rate

-64..+63
-64..+63[cent]
0..127
0:off,1..127
0:random
L63..C..R63(1..64..127)
0..127
0..127
0..127
0:single,1:multi
off/on
off/on
-64..63
-64..63
-64..63
-64..63
-64..63

Default
Value(H)
40
40
Depend on the Note
Depend on the Note
Depend on the Note
Depend on the Note
Depend on the Note
7F
00
Depend on the Note
01
40
40
40
40
40

n:Drum Setup Number(0 - 1)
rr:note number(0DH - 5BH)
If XG SYSTEM ON and/or GM On message is received, all Drum Setup Parameter will be reset to default values.
According to the Drum Setup Reset message, individual Drum Setup Parameters can be reset to default values.

< Table 1-9 > Effect Type List
XG ESSENTIAL EFFECT
Same as LSB=0
XG OPTION EFFECT
* If the received value does not contain an effect type in the TYPE LSB, the LSB will be directed to TYPE 0.
* Panel Effects are based on the “[Number] Effect Name”.
* Using an external sequencer, capable of editing and transmitting the system exclusive messages and parameter changes, allows you to select the reverb, chorus and DSP effect types
which are not accessible from the PSR-730/630 panel operation. When one of the effects is selected by the external sequencer, “XG Rev.,” “XG Cho.” or “XG Eff.” will be shown on
the display.

REVERB TYPE
TYPE
MSB
000
001
002
003
004
005..015
016
017
018
019
020..127

TYPE LSB
00
NO EFFECT
[1]HALL1
[6]ROOM1
[10]STAGE1
[13]PLATE
NO EFFECT
[14]WHITE ROOM
[15]TUNNEL
CANYON
[16]BASEMENT
NO EFFECT

01

02

[2]HALL2
ROOM2
[11]STAGE2

[8]ROOM2

01

02

CHORUS2
CELESTE2
FLANGER2

CHORUS3
CELESTE3

03...07

08

09...15

16

17

18

19

[3]HALL3
[7]ROOM3
STAGE
PLATE

[4]HALL4
ROOM
[12]STAGE3
PLATE

[5]HALL5
ROOM

[9]ROOM4

16

17

18

19

CELESTE
FLANGER

CELESTE
FLANGER

20

21...

20

21...

CHORUS TYPE
TYPE
MSB
000
001..064
065
066
067
068
069..071
072
073..086
087
088..127

162

TYPE LSB
00
NO EFFECT
NO EFFECT
CHORUS1
CELESTE1
FLANGER 1
SYMPHONIC
NO EFFECT
PHASER 1
NO EFFECT
ENSEMBLE DETUNE
NO EFFECT

03...07

08

CHORUS4
CELESTE4
FLANGER3

09...15

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
MIDI Data Format

DSP(VARIATIOM) EFFECT TYPE
TYPE
MSB
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012..015
016
017
018
019
020
021..063
064
065
066

TYPE LSB
00
NO EFFECT
[1]HALL1
[4]ROOM1
[7]STAGE1
PLATE
DELAY L,C,R
[18]DELAY L,R
[19]ECHO
[20]CROSS DELAY
ER1
GATE REVERB
REVERS GATE
NO EFFECT
WHITE ROOM
TUNNEL
CANYON
BASEMENT
KARAOKE 1
NO EFFECT
THRU
CHORUS1
[13]CELESTE

067
068
069
070
071
072
073

FLANGER 1
SYMPHONIC
ROTARY SP.
TREMOLO
AUTO PAN
[24]PHASER
DISTORTION

074
075
076
077
078

OVER DRIVE
AMP SIM.
3BAND EQ
2BAND EQ
AUTO WAH

079
080
081
082

THRU
PITCH CHANGE
THRU
TOUCH WAH 1

083
084
085
086
087
088
089..127

COMPRESSOR
NOISE GATE
VOICE CANCEL
2WAY ROTARY SP
ENSEMBLE DETUNE
AMBIENCE
THRU

01

02

[2]HALL2
ROOM2
[8]STAGE2

[5]ROOM2

03...07

08

09...15

16

17

18

19

20

[3]HALL3
[6]ROOM3
STAGE
PLATE
[17]DELAY LCR

HALL
ROOM
[9]STAGE3
PLATE

HALL
ROOM

ROOM

CHORUS

[10]CHORUS1

[22]ROTARY
FAST

[23]ROTARY
SLOW

Rotary Sp

Tremolo

Gtr Tremolo

20

21...

ER2

KARAOKE 2

KARAOKE 3

CHORUS2
[12]CHORUS3

CHORUS
CELESTE3

CHORUS
[11]CHORUS2

FLANGER

FLANGER

[14]FLANGER
FLANGER
[15]SYMPHONIC
Rotary Sp
[21]TREMOLO
Rotary Sp
[16]AUTO PAN Rotary Sp

PHASER
COMP+
DISTORTION
DIST.HARD
EQ DISCO
AUTO WAH+
DIST

AUTO WAH+
OVERDRIVE

DIST.SOFT
EQ TEL

[25]WAH

PITCH CHANGE2
TOUCH WAH+
DIST

TOUCH WAH+
OVERDRIVE

TOUCH WAH 2

MULTI EFFECT (INSERTION) TYPE
TYPE
MSB
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009..019
020
021..064
065
066
067
068
069
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079..081
082
083
084
085..086
087
088..127

TYPE LSB
00
THRU
HALL 1
ROOM 1
STAGE 1
PLATE
DELAY L,C,R
DELAY L,R
ECHO
CROSS DELAY
THRU
KARAOKE 1
THRU
CHORUS 1
CELESTE 1
FLANGER 1
SYMPHONIC
ROTARY SPEAKER 1
TREMOLO
AUTO PAN
PHASER 1
DISTORTION
OVER DRIVE
AMP SIMULATOR
3BAND EQ
2-BAND EQ
AUTO WAH(LFO)
THRU
TOUCH WAH 1
COMPRESSOR
NOISE GATE
THRU
ENSEMBLE DETUNE
THRU

01

02

HALL 2
ROOM 2
STAGE 2

ROOM 3

KARAOKE 2

KARAOKE 3

CHORUS 2
CELESTE 2
FLANGER 2

CHORUS 3
CELESTE 3

03...07

08

CHORUS 4
CELESTE 4
FLANGER 3

09...15

16

17

18

19

HALL
ROOM
STAGE
PLATE
Delay LCR

HALL
ROOM
STAGE
PLATE

HALL
ROOM

ROOM

CHORUS
FLANGER
Symphonic
Rotary Sp
Tremolo
AutoPan

CHORUS
FLANGER

Rotary Sp

Rotary Sp
Rotary Sp

DIST.HARD
EQ DISCO

DIST.SOFT
EQ TEL

Rotary Sp

Tremolo

21...

Gtr Tremolo

Auto Wah
TOUCH WAH 2

163

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
MIDI Data Format

< Table 1-10 > Effect Parameter List
HALL1,HALL2, ROOM1,ROOM2,ROOM3, STAGE1,STAGE2
PLATE (reverb, variation, insertion block)
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Parameter
Reverb Time
Diffusion
Initial Delay
HPF Cutoff
LPF Cutoff

11
12
13
14
15
16

Er/Rev Balance
High Damp
Feedback Level

CROSS DELAY (variation, insertion block)

0.3–30.0s
0–10
0–63
Thru–8.0kHz
1.0k–Thru

Value
0–69
0–10
0–63
0–52
34–60

Dry/Wet

D63>W – D=W – DR – E=R – EW – D=W – DR – E=R – EW – D=W – DW – D=W – DW – D=W – DW – D=W – DW – D=W – DL Delay

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

11
12
13
14
15
16

DELAY L,C,R (variation, insertion block)

Low Frequency
Low Gain
High Frequency
High Gain

2

(variation
(insertion
(variation
(insertion

Value
1–7430
1–3714
1–7430
1–3714
1–127
0–2
1–10

0.1–743.0ms
0.1–371.4ms
0.1–743.0ms
0.1–371.4ms
-63–+63
L,R,L&R
0.1–1.0

EARLY REF1,EARLY REF2(variation block)

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Parameter
Lch Delay

Parameter
L->R Delay

table#5

WHITE ROOM, TUNNEL, CANYON, BASEMENT (reverb, variation block)

No.
1

No.
1

See Table

Control

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Parameter
Delay Time
Feedback Level
HPF Cutoff
LPF Cutoff

0–127
-63–+63
Thru–8.0kHz
1.0k–Thru

Value
0–127
1–127
0–52
34–60

Dry/Wet

D63>W – D=W – DW – D=W – DW – D=W – DW – D=W – DW – D=W – DW – D=W – DR,L->R,L<-R,Lturn,Rturn,L/R

Value
0–127
0–127
0–127
0–5

EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ

32Hz–2.0kHz
-12–+12dB
500Hz–16.0kHz
-12–+12dB

4–40
52–76
28–58
52–76

11
12
13
14
15
16

EQ Mid Frequency
EQ Mid Gain
EQ Mid Width

Low Frequency
Low Gain
High Frequency
High Gain

100Hz–10.0kHz (variation block)
-12–+12dB (variation block)
1.0–12.0 (variation block)

Control
●

table#3
table#3

14–54
52–76
10–120

table#3

See Table
table#1

Parameter
LFO Frequency
LFO Depth
Phase Shift Offset
Feedback Level

0.00Hz–39.7Hz
0–127
0–127
-63–+63

Value
0–127
0–127
0–127
1–127

0–127
normal/invers

32Hz–2.0kHz
-12–+12dB
500Hz–16.0kHz
-12–+12dB
D63>W – D=W – DW – D=W – DW – D=W – DW – D=W – DH – L=H – LW – D=W – DW – D=W – DW – D=W – DW – D=W – DW – D=W – DW – D=W – DW – D=W – DW – D=W – DW – D=W – D Effect Data Value Assign Table
Table#1
LFO Frequency

Table#4
Reverb time

Table#7
Delay Time(400.0ms)

Table#11
Reverb Width;Depth;Height

Data

Data

Data

Data

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

Value Data
Value Data
Value Data
Value
0.00
32
1.35
64
2.69
96
8.41
0.04
33
1.39
65
2.78
97
8.75
0.08
34
1.43
66
2.86
98
9.08
0.13
35
1.47
67
2.94
99
9.42
0.17
36
1.51
68
3.03
100
9.76
0.21
37
1.56
69
3.11
101
10.1
0.25
38
1.60
70
3.20
102
10.8
0.29
39
1.64
71
3.28
103
11.4
0.34
40
1.68
72
3.37
104
12.1
0.38
41
1.72
73
3.45
105
12.8
0.42
42
1.77
74
3.53
106
13.5
0.46
43
1.81
75
3.62
107
14.1
0.51
44
1.85
76
3.70
108
14.8
0.55
45
1.89
77
3.87
109
15.5
0.59
46
1.94
78
4.04
110
16.2
0.63
47
1.98
79
4.21
111
16.8
0.67
48
2.02
80
4.37
112
17.5
0.72
49
2.06
81
4.54
113
18.2
0.76
50
2.10
82
4.71
114
19.5
0.80
51
2.15
83
4.88
115
20.9
0.84
52
2.19
84
5.05
116
22.2
0.88
53
2.23
85
5.22
117
23.6
0.93
54
2.27
86
5.38
118
24.9
0.97
55
2.31
87
5.55
119
26.2
1.01
56
2.36
88
5.72
120
27.6
1.05
57
2.40
89
6.06
121
28.9
1.09
58
2.44
90
6.39
122
30.3
1.14
59
2.48
91
6.73
123
31.6
1.18
60
2.52
92
7.07
124
33.0
1.22
61
2.57
93
7.40
125
34.3
1.26
62
2.61
94
7.74
126
37.0
1.30
63
2.65
95
8.08
127
39.7

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

Value Data Value Data Value
0.3
32
3.5
64 17.0
0.4
33
3.6
65 18.0
0.5
34
3.7
66 19.0
0.6
35
3.8
67 20.0
0.7
36
3.9
68 25.0
0.8
37
4.0
69 30.0
0.9
38
4.1
1.0
39
4.2
1.1
40
4.3
1.2
41
4.4
1.3
42
4.5
1.4
43
4.6
1.5
44
4.7
1.6
45
4.8
1.7
46
4.9
1.8
47
5.0
1.9
48
5.5
2.0
49
6.0
2.1
50
6.5
2.2
51
7.0
2.3
52
7.5
2.4
53
8.0
2.5
54
8.5
2.6
55
9.0
2.7
56
9.5
2.8
57 10.0
2.9
58 11.0
3.0
59 12.0
3.1
60 13.0
3.2
61 14.0
3.3
62 15.0
3.4
63 16.0

Table#2
Modulation Delay Offset

Table#5
Delay Time(200.0ms)

Data

Data

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

Value Data
Value Data
Value Data
Value
0.0
32
3.2
64
6.4
96
9.6
0.1
33
3.3
65
6.5
97
9.7
0.2
34
3.4
66
6.6
98
9.8
0.3
35
3.5
67
6.7
99
9.9
0.4
36
3.6
68
6.8
100
10.0
0.5
37
3.7
69
6.9
101
11.1
0.6
38
3.8
70
7.0
102
12.2
0.7
39
3.9
71
7.1
103
13.3
0.8
40
4.0
72
7.2
104
14.4
0.9
41
4.1
73
7.3
105
15.5
1.0
42
4.2
74
7.4
106
17.1
1.1
43
4.3
75
7.5
107
18.6
1.2
44
4.4
76
7.6
108
20.2
1.3
45
4.5
77
7.7
109
21.8
1.4
46
4.6
78
7.8
110
23.3
1.5
47
4.7
79
7.9
111
24.9
1.6
48
4.8
80
8.0
112
26.5
1.7
49
4.9
81
8.1
113
28.0
1.8
50
5.0
82
8.2
114
29.6
1.9
51
5.1
83
8.3
115
31.2
2.0
52
5.2
84
8.4
116
32.8
2.1
53
5.3
85
8.5
117
34.3
2.2
54
5.4
86
8.6
118
35.9
2.3
55
5.5
87
8.7
119
37.5
2.4
56
5.6
88
8.8
120
39.0
2.5
57
5.7
89
8.9
121
40.6
2.6
58
5.8
90
9.0
122
42.2
2.7
59
5.9
91
9.1
123
43.7
2.8
60
6.0
92
9.2
124
45.3
2.9
61
6.1
93
9.3
125
46.9
3.0
62
6.2
94
9.4
126
48.4
3.1
63
6.3
95
9.5
127
50.0

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

Value Data Value Data
0.1
32 50.5
64
1.7
33 52.0
65
3.2
34 53.6
66
4.8
35 55.2
67
6.4
36 56.8
68
8.0
37 58.3
69
9.5
38 59.9
70
11.1
39 61.5
71
12.7
40 63.1
72
14.3
41 64.6
73
15.8
42 66.2
74
17.4
43 67.8
75
19.0
44 69.4
76
20.6
45 70.9
77
22.1
46 72.5
78
23.7
47 74.1
79
25.3
48 75.7
80
26.9
49 77.2
81
28.4
50 78.8
82
30.0
51 80.4
83
31.6
52 81.9
84
33.2
53 83.5
85
34.7
54 85.1
86
36.3
55 86.7
87
37.9
56 88.2
88
39.5
57 89.8
89
41.0
58 91.4
90
42.6
59 93.0
91
44.2
60 94.5
92
45.7
61 96.1
93
47.3
62 97.7
94
48.9
63 99.3
95

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

Value Data
Value Data
Value Data
Value
0.1
32 100.9
64 201.6
96 302.4
3.2
33 104.0
65 204.8
97 305.5
6.4
34 107.2
66 207.9
98 308.7
9.5
35 110.3
67 211.1
99 311.8
12.7
36 113.5
68 214.2
100 315.0
15.8
37 116.6
69 217.4
101 318.1
19.0
38 119.8
70 220.5
102 321.3
22.1
39 122.9
71 223.7
103 324.4
25.3
40 126.1
72 226.8
104 327.6
28.4
41 129.2
73 230.0
105 330.7
31.6
42 132.4
74 233.1
106 333.9
34.7
43 135.5
75 236.3
107 337.0
37.9
44 138.6
76 239.4
108 340.2
41.0
45 141.8
77 242.6
109 343.3
44.2
46 144.9
78 245.7
110 346.5
47.3
47 148.1
79 248.9
111 349.6
50.5
48 151.2
80 252.0
112 352.8
53.6
49 154.4
81 255.2
113 355.9
56.8
50 157.5
82 258.3
114 359.1
59.9
51 160.7
83 261.5
115 362.2
63.1
52 163.8
84 264.6
116 365.4
66.2
53 167.0
85 267.7
117 368.5
69.4
54 170.1
86 270.9
118 371.7
72.5
55 173.3
87 274.0
119 374.8
75.7
56 176.4
88 277.2
120 378.0
78.8
57 179.6
89 280.3
121 381.1
82.0
58 182.7
90 283.5
122 384.3
85.1
59 185.9
91 286.6
123 387.4
88.3
60 189.0
92 289.8
124 390.6
91.4
61 192.2
93 292.9
125 393.7
94.6
62 195.3
94 296.1
126 396.9
97.7
63 198.5
95 299.2
127 400.0

Value Data
Value
100.8
96 151.2
102.4
97 152.8
104.0
98 154.4
105.6
99 155.9
107.1
100 157.5
108.7
101 159.1
110.3
102 160.6
111.9
103 162.2
113.4
104 163.8
115.0
105 165.4
116.6
106 166.9
118.2
107 168.5
119.7
108 170.1
121.3
109 171.7
122.9
110 173.2
124.4
111 174.8
126.0
112 176.4
127.6
113 178.0
129.2
114 179.5
130.7
115 181.1
132.3
116 182.7
133.9
117 184.3
135.5
118 185.8
137.0
119 187.4
138.6
120 189.0
140.2
121 190.6
141.8
122 192.1
143.3
123 193.7
144.9
124 195.3
146.5
125 196.9
148.1
126 198.4
149.6
127 200.0

Data

Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
23
26
30
35
40

Table#3
EQ Frequency

Table#6
Room Size

Table#9
Compressor Release Time

Data

Data

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

Value Data Value
0.1
32
5.1
0.3
33
5.3
0.4
34
5.4
0.6
35
5.6
0.7
36
5.7
0.9
37
5.9
1.0
38
6.1
1.2
39
6.2
1.4
40
6.4
1.5
41
6.5
1.7
42
6.7
1.8
43
6.8
2.0
44
7.0
2.1
2.3
2.5
2.6
2.8
2.9
3.1
3.2
3.4
3.5
3.7
3.9
4.0
4.2
4.3
4.5
4.6
4.8
5.0

Value Data
Value Data
Value Data
Value
0.5
32
8.8
64
17.6
96
27.5
0.8
33
9.1
65
17.9
98
28.1
1.0
34
9.4
66
18.2
99
28.5
1.3
35
9.6
67
18.5
100
28.8
1.5
36
9.9
68
18.8
101
29.2
1.8
37
10.2
69
19.1
102
29.5
2.0
38
10.4
70
19.4
103
29.9
2.3
39
10.7
71
19.7
104
30.2
2.6
40
11.0
72
20.0
2.8
41
11.2
73
20.2
3.1
42
11.5
74
20.5
3.3
43
11.8
75
20.8
3.6
44
12.1
76
21.1
3.9
45
12.3
77
21.4
4.1
46
12.6
78
21.7
4.4
47
12.9
79
22.0
4.6
48
13.1
80
22.4
4.9
49
13.4
81
22.7
5.2
50
13.7
82
23.0
5.4
51
14.0
83
23.3
5.7
52
14.2
84
23.6
5.9
53
14.5
85
23.9
6.2
54
14.8
86
24.2
6.5
55
15.1
87
24.5
6.7
56
15.4
88
24.9
7.0
57
15.6
89
25.2
7.2
58
15.9
90
25.5
7.5
59
16.2
91
25.8
7.8
60
16.5
92
26.1
8.0
61
16.8
93
26.5
8.3
62
17.1
94
26.8
8.6
63
17.3
95
27.1

Table#8
Compressor Attack Time

Data

Value Data
Value
50
40
2.0k
56
41
2.2k
63
42
2.5k
70
43
2.8k
80
44
3.2k
90
45
3.6k
100
46
4.0k
110
47
4.5k
125
48
5.0k
140
49
5.6k
160
50
6.3k
180
51
7.0k
200
52
8.0k
225
53
9.0k
250
54
10.0k
280
55
11.0k
315
56
12.0k
355
57
14.0k
400
58
16.0k
450
59
18.0k
500
60
THRU(20.0k)
560
630
700
800
900
1.0k
1.1k
1.2k
1.4k
1.6k
1.8k

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Value
10
15
25
35
45
55
65
75
85
100
115
140
170
230
340
680

Table#10
Compressor Ratio
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Value
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
5.0
7.0
10.0
20.0

167

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
MIDI Implementation Chart

[Portable Keyboard]
Model: PSR-730

Function

Basic
Default
Channel Changed

Transmitted

1~16
1~16

Recognized

*1
*1

1~16
1~16

Default
Messages
Altered

3
X
**************

3
X
X

: True voice

0~127
**************

0~127
0~127

Velocity

Note ON
Note OFF

O 9nH, v=1~127
X 9nH, v=0

O 9nH, v=1~127
X

After
Touch

key’s
Ch’s

X
X

X
O

O

O

O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
X
O
X
X
O
X
X

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

Mode

Note
Number

Pitch Bender
Control Change

0, 32
1
5
7, 10, 11
6, 38
64~67
71, 74
72, 73
84
91, 93, 94
96~97
98~99
100~101
120
121

*3
*3

*3

Program
Change : True #

O 0~127
**************

O 0~127

System Exclusive

O

O

System

: Song Position
: Song Select
Common : Tune

X
X
X

X
X
X

System : Clock
Real Time : Commands

O
O

O
O

Aux

X
X
O
X

X
O (123~127)
O
X

: Local ON/OFF
: All Notes OFF
Messages : Active Sense
: Reset
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY

168

Date: 14-APR-1997
Version: 1.0

MIDI Implementation Chart

Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO

Remarks

*2
*2

Bank Select
Modulation
Portamento Time
Data Entry
Sound Controller
Sound Controller
Portamento Controllers
Effect Depth
RPN Inc, Dec
NRPN LSB, MSB
RPN LSB, MSB
All Sound Off
Reset All Controllers

O : Yes
X : No

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
MIDI Implementation Chart

[Portable Keyboard]
Model: PSR-630

Function

Basic
Default
Channel Changed

Transmitted

1~16
1~16

Recognized

*1
*1

1~16
1~16

Default
Messages
Altered

3
X
**************

3
X
X

: True voice

0~127
**************

0~127
0~127

Velocity

Note ON
Note OFF

O 9nH, v=1~127
X 9nH, v=0

O 9nH, v=1~127
X

After
Touch

key’s
Ch’s

X
X

X
O

O

O

Mode

Note
Number

Pitch Bender
Control Change

0, 32
1
5
7, 10, 11
6, 38
64~67
71, 74
72, 73
84
91, 93, 94
96~97
98~99
100~101
120
121

O
X
X
O
O
O
O
X
X
O
X
X
O
X
X

*3

*3
*3

*3

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

Program
Change : True #

O 0~127
**************

O 0~127

System Exclusive

O

O

System

: Song Position
: Song Select
Common : Tune

X
X
X

X
X
X

System : Clock
Real Time : Commands

O
O

O
O

Aux

X
X
O
X

X
O (123~127)
O
X

: Local ON/OFF
: All Notes OFF
Messages : Active Sense
: Reset
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY

Date: 14-APR-1997
Version: 1.0

MIDI Implementation Chart

Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO

Remarks

*2
*2

Bank Select
Modulation
Portamento Time
Data Entry
Sound Controller
Sound Controller
Portamento Controllers
Effect Depth
RPN Inc, Dec
NRPN LSB, MSB
RPN LSB, MSB
All Sound Off
Reset All Controllers

O : Yes
X : No

169

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,
MIDI Implementation Chart
*1

The tracks for each channel can be selected on the panel. See page
125 for more information.

*2

Incoming MIDI messages control the PSR-730/630 as 16 channel
multi timbral tone generator when initially shipped (factory set). The
MIDI messages don’t affect the panel controls including the Panel
Voice selection since they are directly sent to the tone generator of
the PSR-730/630. However, the following MIDI messages affects
the panel controls such as Panel Voice, Style, Multi Pad and Song
settings:
•
•
•
•

MIDI MASTER TUNE, MASTER TUNE (XG System Parameter).
TRANSPOSE (XG System Parameter).
System Exclusive Messages related to the REVERB, CHORUS,
DSP EFFECT and MULTI EFFECT (PSR-730 only) settings.
XG MULTI EQ PARAMETER (PSR-730 only)
*3

Also, the MIDI messages affect the panel settings when one of the
folowing MIDI reception modes is selected.
These modes can be selected on the panel (see page 127).
Remote

: The Note On/Off messages received at the designated Remote (receive) channel are processed the
same as the notes normally played on the keyboard.

In this mode, only the following channel messages will be
recognized:
• Note On/Off
• Control Changes
Bank Select (R1 voice only)
Modulation
Volume
Expression
Sustain
Sostenute
Soft Pedal
All Notes Off
• Program Change (R1 voice only)
• Pitch Bend

170

Off

: The MIDI channel messages will not be received at
the designated channel.

Bass

: The note on/off messages received at the channel(s)
set to “Bass” are recognized as the bass notes in the
accompaniment section. The bass notes will be
detected regardless of the accompaniment on/off
and split point settings on the PSR-730/630 panel.

Chord

: The note on/off messages received at the channel(s)
set to “Chord” are recognized as the fingerings in the
accompaniment section. The chords to be detected
depend on the fingering mode on the PSR-730/630.
The chords will be detected regardless of the accompaniment on/off and split point settings on the
PSR-730/630 panel.

Though these messages will not output by playing the keyboard and
changing the panel settings, they may be included in the Song or
Style data and output.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Specifications

Keyboards
• 61 standard-size keys (C1 — C6) with touch
response.

Display
• Large multi-function LCD display

Setup

Overall Controls

• User Style : 4 (101 — 104)

• Transpose

• Recording Tracks : 5 Sections x 8 tracks

• Pitch Bend Range
• Modulation

• Drum Cancel
• Quantize

• Touch Sensitivity

• Naming

• Master Tuning

• Track Clear, All Clear

• Stand by/ON

• Scale Tuning
• Song Transpose

• Master Volume : MIN — MAX

• Metronome

Control & Number Buttons
• MENU ▲▼, VOICE, STYLE, SONG, SUB
MENU ▲▼, [1] — [0], [+] (YES), [–] (NO)

Disk Drive
Demo
• 15 Songs

Voice
PSR-730
• 200 Panel Voices +12 Drum Kits + 480 XG
Voices

• Split Voice Split Point
• Accompaniment Split Point
• Fingering Mode : SINGLE FINGER/FINGERED
1/FINGERED 2/FULL KEYBOARD/MULTIFINGER
• Voice Set
• Pedal 1/2

Digital Effect

• 215 Panel Voices +12 Drum Kits + 480 XG
Voices
• Polyphony : 32

Multi Pad Recording
• User Pad Set : 4 (101 — 104)
• Naming
• Pad Clear, Bank Clear

MIDI
• Transmit Settings
• Receive Settings
• Local Control
• Clock

• Reverb : 13 types

• Initial Data Send

• Chorus : 10 types

• MIDI Template

• DSP (system/insertion) : 46 types
• Multi Effect : 42 types x 2
• Digital Equalizer : 5 types + 1 User Setting
• Harmony : 16 types

• Polyphony : 64
PSR-630

Style Recording

• Tempo : 32 — 280

Registration Memory
• 32 Regist Bank : 1 — 4
• Naming
• Accompaniment Freeze

Auxiliary Jacks
• DC IN 10-12V, PHONES, SUSTAIN, FOOT
VOL, AUX OUT R, L+R/L, MIDI IN/OUT, TO
HOST

Amplifiers
• 6 W + 6 W (when using PA-6 power adaptor)
• 4 W + 4 W (when using batteries)

• Voice Set
• R1/R2/L Voices
• Revoice : Voice, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb
Depth, Chorus Depth, DSP Depth
• Split Voice Mode
• Dual Voice Mode

Auto Accompaniment

Multi Pads
• 36 Multi Pad Sets
• 4 Pads + STOP
• Chord Match
• Naming

Disk

• 100 Styles
• Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF

• Song Recording/Playback

• Accompaniment Track : RHYTHM1/2, BASS,
CHORD1/2, PAD, PHRASE1/2

• Save
• Load

• Accompaniment Track Settings : ON/OFF

• Disk Copy

• Accompaniment Control : SYNC START, SYNC
STOP, START/STOP, INTRO, MAIN A/B
(AUTO FILL), ENDING
• Beat Indicator

• Song Copy
• Delete File

• Accompaniment Volume
• Revoice : Voice, Volume, Pan, Reverb Depth,
Chorus Depth
• Virtual Arranger

Groove & Dynamics

• Dynamics Template : 17 types
• Dynamics Rate : 0 — 100%
• Expand Rate : 0 — 400%
• Boost Rate : 0 — 400%

One Touch Setting

• 12 cm (4-3/4 ”) x 2

Power Consumption
• 24 W (when using PA-6 AC power adaptor)

Batteries
• Six SUM-1, “D” size, R-20 or equivalent
batteries

• Format

Song
• Song Volume
• Minus One Practice
• Repeat Play
• Song Repeat
• Next Song

Rated Voltage
• DC 10-12V

Dimensions (W x D x H)
• 973 x 397 x 155 mm
(38-1/4 ” x 15-5/8 ” x 6-1/8 ”)

Weight
• 9.5 kg (20.9 lbs.) excluding batteries

Supplied Accessories
• Sample Disk

• Beat Groove Template : 49 types
• Measure Groove Template : 25 types

Speakers

Song Recording
• Quick Record, Multi Record
• Recording Tracks :
Quick Record : ACCOMPANIMENT,
MELODY 1 — 4
Multi Record : 1 — 16
• Punch In/Punch Out
• Quantize
• Naming
• Song Clear, Track Clear

• Music Stand
• Owner’s Manual

Optional Accessories
• Headphones
: HPE-150
• AC Power Adaptor : PA-6
• Foot Switch

: FC4, FC5

• Foot Volume

: FC7

• Keyboard Stand

: L-6, L-7

• Song Edit : Voice, Volume, Octave, Pan,
Reverb Depth, Chorus Depth, DSP Depth

* Specifications subject to change without notice.

171

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Index

A

AC power adaptor ..................................................... 12

G

Accompaniment styles .............................................. 22

GM System Level 1 ..................................................... 3
Groove & Dynamics .................................................. 35

Accompaniment tracks, song .................................... 86
Auto accompaniment ................................................ 22

H

Harmony ................................................................... 47
Host Select .............................................................. 122

Auto accompaniment on/off ...................................... 23
Auto Fill ..................................................................... 27
AUX OUT .................................................................. 13

I

Icons ........................................................................... 8
Initial data send ....................................................... 128

B

Bank, registration ...................................................... 57

Initialization (data backup) ...................................... 152

Batteries .................................................................... 12

Insertion Effect .................................................. 45, 144

Beat Groove .............................................................. 36

Intro, accompaniment ................................................ 27

Beat indicator ............................................................ 26

C

Boost Rate ................................................................ 40

K

Keyboard percussion ................................................ 19

Chord Match function ................................................ 63

L

Local control ............................................................ 127

Chord types, auto accompaniment ........................... 34

Load .......................................................................... 70

Chorus ...................................................................... 44
Clock ....................................................................... 128

M

Main A & Main B sections ......................................... 27

Connectors ................................................................ 13

Master tuning .......................................................... 115

Contents ...................................................................... 4

Measure Groove ....................................................... 37

Control Change ....................................................... 120

Measure, song play from specified ........................... 78
Melody tracks, clearing ............................................. 94

D

Data Dial ................................................................... 18

Melody tracks, song .................................................. 84

Delete File ................................................................. 75

Menu structure ........................................................ 130

Demonstration playback ............................................ 14

Menus ....................................................................... 10

Digital Effect .............................................................. 42

Metronome .............................................................. 116

Digital Equalizer ........................................................ 51

MIDI connectors ...................................................... 121

Disk Copy .................................................................. 72

MIDI data format ..................................................... 153

Display operation ........................................................ 8

MIDI functions ......................................................... 125

DOC .......................................................................... 66

MIDI implementation chart ...................................... 168

Drum kit list ............................................................. 140

MIDI template .......................................................... 129

DSP ........................................................................... 45

Minus-one practice .................................................... 79

Dual voice mode ....................................................... 19

Modulation wheel ...................................................... 55

Dynamics Rate .......................................................... 39

Multi effect ................................................................. 48

Dynamics Template ................................................... 38

Multi-finger fingering mode ....................................... 35
Multi pad set selection .............................................. 61

E

Effects ....................................................................... 42

Multi Pads, playing .................................................... 62

Ending, accompaniment ........................................... 25

Music stand ................................................................. 7

Expand Rate ............................................................. 39

F

Note On/Off ............................................................. 120

O

On bass chord ........................................................... 34

Features ...................................................................... 2
Freeze (Accompaniment Freeze function) ................ 60
Fill-in ......................................................................... 27

One touch setting ...................................................... 40

Fingered 1 fingering mode ........................................ 33

Overall functions ..................................................... 114

Fingered 2 fingering mode ........................................ 34
Fingering modes, accompaniment ............................ 31
Floppy disk ................................................................ 64
Foot Volume .............................................................. 13
Format ....................................................................... 67
Full Keyboard fingering mode ................................... 34

172

N

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Index

P

R

Panel controls ............................................................. 6

T

Tempo, accompaniment ............................................ 26

Pedal Function list ................................................... 117

To Host .................................................................... 121

Phones jack .............................................................. 13

Touch sensitivity ...................................................... 115

Pitch Bend ................................................................. 54

Track assignment, minus-one ................................... 79

Polarity .................................................................... 118

Track muting, accompaniment .................................. 28

Polyphony ............................................................... 133

Transmit channel & track ......................................... 125

Power supply ............................................................. 12

Transposition ............................................................. 56

Precautions ................................................................. 1

Troubleshooting ....................................................... 151

R1, R2, & L voices .................................................... 16

V

Variation (DSP) ......................................................... 46

Receive channel & mode ........................................ 126

Velocity .................................................................... 119

Record Ready Mode ................................... 85, 99, 106

Virtual Arranger ......................................................... 29

Registration bank ...................................................... 58

Voice list .................................................................. 133

Registration memory ................................................. 57

Voice set .................................................................. 116

Rehearsal mode ........................................ 86, 101, 108

Voice, revoice .......................................................... 110

Repeat play ............................................................... 80

Voices, about the ....................................................... 16

Reverb ....................................................................... 43

Voices, selecting & playing ........................................ 17

Revoicing ................................................................ 110

Volume control, accompaniment ............................... 29

Root key .................................................................... 32

Volume control, song ................................................. 78
Volume, harmony ...................................................... 48

S

Sample disk .............................................................. 76
Save .......................................................................... 68

X

XG ............................................................................... 3

Scale tuning ............................................................ 115
SFF ......................................................................... 148
Shortcuts ................................................................... 11
Single Finger fingering mode .................................... 32
Song clear ................................................................. 94
Song Copy ................................................................ 73
Song Edit .................................................................. 96
Song mode ................................................................ 11
Song playback ........................................................... 76
Song recording .......................................................... 83
Specifications .......................................................... 171
Split point, auto accompaniment ............................... 30
Split point, split voice ................................................. 21
Split voice mode ........................................................ 20
Stand by/ON switch ................................................... 14
Start modes, accompaniment ................................... 23
Stop Accompaniment function .................................. 25
Style file .................................................................... 66
Style mode ................................................................ 11
Style selection ........................................................... 22
Style, revoice ........................................................... 112
Sustain jack ............................................................... 13
Sustain Pedal ............................................................ 13
Synchro Stop function ............................................... 28
Synchronized start .................................................... 24
System Effect .................................................... 45, 143

173

Limited Warranty
90 DAYS LABOR

1 YEAR PARTS

Yamaha Corporation of America, hereafter referred to as Yamaha, warrants to the original consumer of a product included in the categories listed below,
that the product will be free of defects in materials and/or workmanship for the periods indicated. This warranty is applicable to all models included in
the following series of products:

PSR SERIES OF PORTATONE ELECTRONIC KEYBOARDS
If during the first 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date, your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to have a defect in
material and/or workmanship, Yamaha and/or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for parts or labor.
If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date, Yamaha will, subject to
the terms of this warranty, supply these parts without charge. However, charges for labor, and/or any miscellaneous expenses incurred are the consumers
responsibility. Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products and/or to use reconditioned units as warranty
replacements.
THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICH YAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE PRODUCTS.
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANT ABILITY IS
LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY
EVENT FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and/or the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages. Therefore, these
limitations and exclusions may not apply to you.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state.

CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES
If warranty service should be required, it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities:
1. Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product, or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product for assistance.
You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below.
2. Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to: the retailer selling the product, an authorized service center, or to Yamaha with an explanation of
the problem. Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date (sales receipt, credit card copy, etc.) when requesting service and/or parts under
warranty.
3. Shipping and/or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility.* Units shipped for service should be packed securely.
*Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the first 90 days.

IMPORTANT: Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization. A Return Authorization (RA) will be issued that has a
tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if needed.
4. Your owners manual contains important safety and operating instructions. It is your responsibility to be aware of the contents of this manual and to
follow all safety precautions.

EXCLUSIONS
This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name, trademark, and/or ID numbers have been altered, defaced, exchanged removed, or to failures
and/or damages that may occur as a result of:
1. Neglect, abuse, abnormal strain, modification or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity.
2. Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product, an
authorized service center, or an authorized service representative of Yamaha.
3. This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U.S.A., the District of Columbia, and
Puerto Rico. This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U.S.A. or in any other country.
Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below.

Model___________________________

Serial #________________________________

Sales Slip #________________________________

Purchased from____________________________________________________________ Date______________________________________
(Retailer)

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA
Electronic Service Division
6600 Orangethorpe Avenue
Buena Park, CA 90620

KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FOR YOUR RECORDS. DO NOT MAIL!

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the
authorized distributor listed below.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha
ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.

NORTH AMERICA
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: 714-522-9011

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen
Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana
o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

ASIA

ITALY
Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.,
Home Keyboard Division
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN
Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A.
Jorge Juan 30, 28001, Madrid, Spain
Tel: 91-577-7270

PORTUGAL
Valentim de Carvalho CI SA
Estrada de Porto Salvo, Paço de Arcos 2780 Oeiras,
Portugal
Tel: 01-443-3398/4030/1823

GREECE

MEXICO
Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V.,
Departamento de ventas
Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del
Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F.
Tel: 686-00-33

BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA.
Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil
Tel: 011-853-1377

Philippe Nakas S.A.
Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece
Tel: 01-364-7111

SWEDEN

Yamaha Music Argentina S.A.
Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 1-371-7021

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha de Panama S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
Tel: 507-269-5311

EUROPE
THE UNITED KINGDOM
Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
Tel: 01908-366700

IRELAND
Danfay Ltd.
61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin
Tel: 01-2859177

GERMANY/SWITZERLAND
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
F.R. of Germany
Tel: 04101-3030

AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria
Tel: 01-60203900

THE NETHERLANDS
Yamaha Music Nederland
Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands
Tel: 030-2828411

BELGIUM
Yamaha Music Belgium
Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium
Tel: 02-7258220

FRANCE
Yamaha Musique France,
Division Claviers
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: 2737-7688

INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA
Cosmos Corporation
#131-31, Neung-Dong, Sungdong-Ku, Seoul
Korea
Tel: 02-466-0021~5

MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.
16-28, Jalan SS 2/72, Petaling Jaya, Selangor,
Malaysia
Tel: 3-717-8977

Yamaha Scandinavia AB
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1
Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031 89 34 00

PHILIPPINES
Yupangco Music Corporation
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,
Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines
Tel: 819-7551

DENMARK

ARGENTINA

HONG KONG

YS Copenhagen Liaison Office
Generatorvej 8B
DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00

SINGAPORE

FINLAND
Warner Music Finland OY/Fazer Music
Aleksanterinkatu 11, P.O. Box 260
SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: 0435 011

NORWAY
Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB
Grini Næringspark 1
N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 77 70

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.
Blk 202 Hougang, Street 21 #02-01,
Singapore 530202
Tel: 747-4374

TAIWAN
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad,
Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2713-8999

THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor,
Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng,
Bangkok 10320, Thailand
Tel: 02-641-2951

ICELAND
Skifan HF
Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120
IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: 525 5000

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of
Germany
Tel: 04101-3030

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
International Marketing Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2317

AFRICA

OCEANIA

Yamaha Corporation,
International Marketing Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2312

MIDDLE EAST

AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
17-33 Market Street, South Melbourne, Vic. 3205,
Australia
Tel: 3-699-2388

NEW ZEALAND
Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.
146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,
Auckland, New Zealand
Tel: 9-634-0099

TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
F.R. of Germany
Tel: 04101-3030

COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
International Marketing Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2312

Yamaha Corporation,
International Marketing Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2317

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Electronic Musical Instrument Division
[PK] 13

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-3273

M.D.G., EMI Division © 1997 Yamaha Corporation
VY78900 808POCP3.3-05E0 Printed in Japan



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V1.2 (40-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Fill forms, Extract, Assemble, Print high-res
Create Date                     : 1997:06:26 19:07:18
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 3.0J (Power Macintosh 版)
Subject                         : 
Creator                         : Adobe PageMaker 6.0
Author                          : 
Title                           : 
Modify Date                     : 1999:09:08 18:16:10+09:00
Page Count                      : 178
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools